11 Radionavigation

Introduction
RADIO NAVIGATION
Oxford Aviation Academy (UK) Limited 2008

All Rights Reserved
This text book is to be used only for the purpose of private study by individuals and may not be reproduced
in any form or medium, copied, stored in a retrieval system, lent, hired, rented, transmitted or adapted in
whole or in part without the prior written consent of Oxford Aviation Academy.
Copyright in all documents and materials bound within these covers or attached hereto, excluding that material
which is reproduced by the kind permission of third parties and acknowledged as such, belongs exclusively to
Oxford Aviation Academy.
Certain copyright material is reproduced with the permission of the International Civil Aviation Organisation,
the United Kingdom Civil Aviation Authority and the European Aviation Safety Agency (EASA).
This text book has been written and published as a reference work to assist students enrolled on an approved
EASA Air Transport Pilot Licence (ATPL) course to prepare themselves for the EASA ATPL theoretical
knowledge examinations. Nothing in the content of this book is to be interpreted as constituting instruction
or advice relating to practical flying.
Whilst every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of the information contained within this book, neither
Oxford Aviation Academy nor the distributor gives any warranty as to its accuracy or otherwise. Students
preparing for the EASA ATPL theoretical knowledge examinations should not regard this book as a substitute
for the EASA ATPL theoretical knowledge training syllabus published in the current edition of CS-FCL 1
Flight Crew Licensing (Aeroplanes) (the Syllabus). The Syllabus constitutes the sole authoritative definition
of the subject matter to be studied in an EASA ATPL theoretical knowledge training programme. No student
should prepare for, or is currently entitled to enter himself/herself for the EASA ATPL theoretical knowledge
examinations without first being enrolled in a training school which has been granted approval by an EASA
authorised national aviation authority to deliver EASA ATPL training.
Oxford Aviation Academy excludes all liability for any loss or damage incurred or suffered as a result of any
reliance on all or part of this book except for any liability for death or personal injury resulting from Oxford
Aviation Academys negligence or any other liability which may not legally be excluded.
Cover Photograph: Boeing 737 - 800 on approach to Bournemouth (EGHH)

Photographed by Colin K Work, for www.airteamimages.com

This edition distributed by Transair (UK) Ltd, Shoreham, England: 2008

Printed in Singapore by KHL Printing Co. Pte Ltd
ii
RADIO NAVIGATION
Introduction
Textbook Series
Book
Title
EASA Ref. No.
010 Air Law
010
020 Aircraft General Knowledge 1
021 01
Airframes & Systems
021 01 01-04
021 01 05
021 01 06
021 01 07
021 01 08-09
021 01 10
021 01 11
021 04 00
Fuselage, Wings & Stabilising Surfaces

Landing Gear
Flight Controls
Hydraulics
Air Systems & Air Conditioning
Anti-icing & De-icing
Fuel Systems
Emergency Equipment
021 02
Electrics Electronics
021 02 01
021 02 02
021 02 05
Direct Current
Alternating Current
Basic Radio Propagation.
021 00
Powerplant
021 03 01
021 03 02
Piston Engines
Gas Turbines
022
Instrumentation
022 01
022 03
022 02
022 04
Flight Instruments
Warning & Recording
Automatic Flight Control
Power Plant & System Monitoring Instruments
Subject
030 Flight Performance & Planning 1
031
032
Mass & Balance

Performance
030 Flight Performance & Planning 2
033
Flight Planning & Monitoring
040 Human Performance & Limitations
040
050 Meteorology
050
10
060 Navigation 1
061
General Navigation
11
060 Navigation 2
062
Radio Navigation
12
070 Operational Procedures
070
13
080 Principles of Flight
080
14
090 Communications
091
092
VFR Communications
IFR Communications
iii
Introduction
iv
RADIO NAVIGATION
RADIO NAVIGATION
Introduction
Contents
PROPERTIES of RADIO WAVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
RADIO PROPAGATION THEORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
MODULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
ANTENNAE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
DOPPLER RADAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
VHF DIRECTION FINDER (VDF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
AUTOMATIC DIRECTION FINDER (ADF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
VHF OMNI-DIRECTIONAL RANGE (VOR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
INSTRUMENT LANDING SYSTEM (ILS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
MICROWAVE LANDING SYSTEM (MLS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
RADAR PRINCIPLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
GROUND RADAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
AIRBORNE WEATHER RADAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
SECONDARY SURVEILLANCE RADAR (SSR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
TRAFFIC COLLISION and AVOIDANCE SYSTEM (TCAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
DISTANCE MEASURING EQUIPMENT (DME) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
AREA NAVIGATION SYSTEMS (RNAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
ELECTRONIC HORIZONTAL SITUATION INDICATOR (EHSI) . . . . . . . . . . . 313
GLOBAL NAVIGATION SATELLITE SYSTEMS (GNSS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
LORAN C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
REVISION QUESTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Introduction
vi
RADIO NAVIGATION
Properties of Radio Waves
Chapter 1
CHAPTER ONE
PROPERTIES of RADIO WAVES
Contents
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
THE RADIO NAVIGATION SYLLABUS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
ELECTRO-MAGNETIC (EM) RADIATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
POLARISATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
RADIO WAVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
FREQUENCY BANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
PHASE COMPARISON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
PRACTICE FREQUENCY (f ) - WAVELENGTH () CONVERSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . 11
ANSWERS TO PRACTICE f - CONVERSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
QUESTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
ANSWERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Chapter 1
Chapter 1
INTRODUCTION
Radio and radar systems are now an integral and essential part of aviation, without which
the current intensity of air transport operations would be unsustainable. In the early days of
aviation aircraft were flown with visual reference to the ground and flight at night, in cloud or
over the sea was not possible. As the complexity of aircraft increased it became necessary to
design navigational systems to permit aircraft to operate without reference to terrain features.
The early systems developed were, by modern standards very basic and inaccurate. They
provided reasonable navigational accuracy for en-route flight over land, but only a very limited
service over the oceans, and, until about 40 years ago, flight over the oceans used the traditional
seafarers techniques of astro-navigation, that is using sights taken on the sun, moon, stars
and planets to determine position. Developments commenced in the 1910s, continued at an
increasing rate during the 1930s and 1940s and up to the present day leading to the development
of long range systems which by the 1970s were providing a global navigation service.
It is perhaps ironic that, having forsaken navigation by the stars, the most widely used navigation
systems in the last few years are once again space based, that is the satellite navigation systems
we now take as being the norm. Whilst global satellite navigation systems (GNSS) are becoming
the standard in aviation and many advocate that they will replace totally all the terrestrial
systems, the ICAO view is that certain terrestrial systems will have to be retained to back-up
GNSS both for en-route navigation and runway approaches.
The development of radar in the 1930s allowed air traffic control systems to be developed
providing a control service capable of identifying and monitoring aircraft such that aircraft
operations can be safely carried out at a much higher intensity than would be otherwise possible.
Modern satellite technology is being used to provide a similar service over oceans and land
areas where the provision of normal radar systems is not possible.
THE RADIO NAVIGATION SYLLABUS

The syllabus starts by looking at the nature of radio waves and how they travel through the
atmosphere. This is essential to understand why different radio frequencies are selected for
particular applications and also the limitations imposed. The introductory chapters also cover
how radio waves are produced, transmitted, received and how information is added to and
recovered from radio waves.
ELECTRO-MAGNETIC (EM) RADIATION

If a direct electric current (DC) is passed through a wire then a magnetic field is generated
around the wire perpendicular to the current flow.
If an alternating electric current (AC) is passed through the wire then, because the direction of
current flow is changing, the polarity of the magnetic field will also change, reversing polarity as
the current direction reverses. At low frequencies the magnetic field will return to zero with the
current, but as frequency increases the magnetic field will not have collapsed completely before
the reversed field starts to establish itself and energy will start to travel outwards from the wire
in the form of electromagnetic radiation ie radio waves.
The resulting EM energy is made up of two components, an electrical (E) field parallel to the
wire and a magnetic (H) field perpendicular to the wire.
Chapter 1
Figure 1.3. Vertical Polarization.

Figure 1.1 Vertical Polarisation
POLARISATION
The polarisation of radio waves is defined as the plane of the electric field and is dependent
on the plane of the aerial. A vertical aerial will emit radio waves with the electrical field in
the vertical plane and hence produce a vertically polarised wave, and a horizontal aerial will
produce a horizontally polarised wave.
To receive maximum signal strength from an incoming radio wave it is essential the receiving
aerial is in the same plane as the polarisation of the wave, so a vertically polarised radio wave
would require a vertical aerial.
Circular polarisation can be produced in a variety of ways, one of which is using a helical antenna,
(see Chapter 22). In circular polarisation the electrical (and hence magnetic) field rotates at the
frequency of the radio wave. The rotation may be right handed or left handed dependent on the
orientation of the aerial array.
For reception of a circularly polarised wave an aerial of the same orientation is required, or a
simple dipole aerial. There are two significant advantages. Firstly in radar systems, if circular
polarisation is used, when the energy is reflected from water droplets the circularity is reversed
and therefore the clutter caused by precipitation can be eliminated. Secondly, if a dipole aerial
is used the orientation of the aerial is no longer critical, as it is with linear polarisation, and,
clearly, this will be a major advantage in mobile systems, such as cellular phones and satellite
communication and navigation systems.
Chapter 1
RADIO WAVES
The length of time it takes to generate one cycle of a radio wave is known as the period
and is generally signified by the Greek letter tau (), and measured in micro-seconds (s).
(1s = 10-6 second).
Period ( W )
Figure 1.2 Sinusoidal Wave - Period
If, for example, the period of one cycle of a radio wave is 0.125s then the number of cycles
produced in one second would be the reciprocal of this giving:

1
1
=
0.125 x 10-6
= 8 000 000 cycles per second which are known as Hertz (Hz).
This is known as the frequency (f) of the wave; hence:

1

f =
(1)

The frequency of radio waves is expressed in Hertz (Hz). Since the order of magnitude of the
frequency of radio waves is very high, for convenience, the following terms are used to express
the frequency:
Kilo-Hertz (kHz)
Mega-Hertz (MHz)
Giga-Hertz (GHz)
=
=
=
103 Hz =
106 Hz =
109 Hz =
1 000 Hz
1 000 000 Hz
1 000 000 000 Hz
So in the example above the frequency would be expressed as 8 MHz.

The speed of radio waves (c) is the same as the speed of light (which is also EM radiation) and
is approximately:
300 000 000 ms-1 (= 300 x 106 ms-1), or 162 000 nautical miles per second
Chapter 1
Wavelength ( O )
Figure 1.3 Sinusoidal Wave - Wavelength
If a radio wave travels at 300 x 106 ms-1 and the period is 0.125 s, then the length () of each
wave will be:

= c.
300 x 106 x 0.125 x 10-6 = 37.5 m
(2)
This is known as the wavelength. From equation (1) this can also be stated as:
c

=
f

Giving:

(3)
300 x 106
= 37.5 m
8 x 106
Hence if the frequency is known then the wavelength can be determined and if the wavelength
is known then the frequency can be calculated from:

f =
(4)
Examples:
1.
If the frequency of a radio wave is 121.5 MHz calculate the wavelength.
c
300 x 106
=
f
121.5 x 106
= 2.47 m
Chapter 1
2.
If the wavelength is 1515 m, what is the corresponding frequency?
f =
c
=
300 x 106
1515
= 198 000 Hz = 198 x 103 Hz = 198 kHz
For ease of calculation we can simplify the formulae:

f =
300
(m)
300
m
f (MHz)
MHz
But we must ensure that our input arguments are correct, ie to calculate the frequency the
wavelength must be in metres and to calculate the wavelength the frequency must be input in
MHz.
Example:
3.
Determine the frequency corresponding to a wavelength of 3.2 cm.
Noting that 3.2 cm = 0.032 m the calculation becomes:
f =
4.
Determine the wavelength corresponding to a frequency of 357 kHz.
Noting that 375 kHz = 0.375 MHz the calculation is:
300
0.032
300
0.375
= 9375 Mhz (or 9.375 Ghz)
= 800 m
Chapter 1
FREQUENCY BANDS
The radio part of the electro-magnetic spectrum extends from 3 kHz to 300 GHz. For convenience
it is divided into 8 frequency bands. These are shown at table 1 with the frequencies, wavelengths
and the uses made of the frequency bands in civil aviation. Note that each frequency band is
related to its neighbouring band(s) by a factor of 10.
Frequency Band
Frequencies
Wavelengths
Civil Aeronautical
Usage
Very Low Frequency (VLF)
3 30 kHz
100 10 km
Nil
Low Frequency (LF)
30 300 kHz
10 1 km
NDB/ADF, LORAN
C
Medium Frequency (MF)
300 3000 kHz
1000 100 m
NDB/ADF,
long range
communications
High Frequency (HF)
3 30 MHz
100 10 m
long range
communications
10 1 m
Short range
communication,
VDF, VOR, ILS
localiser, marker
beacons
Very High Frequency (VHF)
30 300 MHz
Ultra High Frequency (UHF)
300 3000 MHz
100 10 cm
ILS glidepath,
DME, SSR, Satellite
communications,
GNSS, long range
radars
Super High Frequency (SHF)
3 30 GHz
10 1 cm
RADALT, AWR,
MLS, short range
radars
Extremely High Frequency

(EHF)
30 300 GHz
10 1 mm
Nil
Table 1
Chapter 1
PHASE COMPARISON
Some radio navigation systems use the comparison of phase between two signals to define
navigational information. The first important point is that the two signals being compared must
have the same frequency, otherwise any phase comparison would be meaningless. The second
point is that one signal will be designated the reference signal and the other a variable signal and
that the comparison must yield a positive result.
Figure 1.4 Sinusoidal Wave - Phase Comparison

To determine the phase difference between 2 signals, first identify the position of (for example)
zero phase on each of the waves, then move in the positive direction from the chosen point on
the reference wave to measure the phase angle through which the reference wave has travelled
before zero phase is reached on the variable wave.
In this example, starting at zero phase on the reference wave (point A), we observe that the
reference wave has travelled through a phase angle of 270 before zero phase is reached on the
variable wave (point B), hence the phase difference is 270.
The relationship can also be found mathematically. At the origin the phase of the reference wave
is 0 (= 360) and the phase of the variable wave is 090. Subtracting the instantaneous phase of
the variable wave from the instantaneous phase of the reference wave gives the same result, note
the result must always be positive.
Reference variable = 360 90 = 270
Note: The phase difference must be positive, so if the calculation yields a negative result simply add 360
to get a positive answer.
Chapter 1
10
INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Chapter 1
PRACTICE FREQUENCY (f ) - WAVELENGTH () CONVERSIONS

In each of the following examples, calculate the frequency or wavelength as appropriate and
determine in which frequency band each of the frequencies lies.
Wavelength
1
2
2.7 m
5.025 GHz
137.5 m
5
6
137.5 MHz
3 km
7
8
329 MHz
29 cm
9
10
Frequency Band
198 kHz
3
4
Frequency
500 kHz
5 cm
11
Chapter 1
ANSWERS TO PRACTICE f - CONVERSIONS
12
Wavelength
Frequency
Frequency Band
1515 m
198 kHz
LF
2.7 m
111.1 MHz
VHF
5.97 cm
5.025 GHz
SHF
137.5 m
2181.8 kHz
MF
2.18 m
137.5 MHz
VHF
3 km
100 kHz
MF
91.2 cm
329 MHz
UHF
29 cm
1034 MHz
UHF
600 m
500 kHz
MF
10
5 cm
6 GHz
SHF
Chapter 1
QUESTIONS
1.
A radio wave is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
an energy wave comprising an electrical field in the same plane as a magnetic field
an electrical field alternating with a magnetic field
an energy wave where there is an electrical field perpendicular to a magnetic field
an energy field with an electrical component
2.

The speed of radio waves is:
3.
The plane of polarisation of an electromagnetic wave is:
a.
b.
c.
d.
a.
b.
c.
d.
4.
the plane of the magnetic field

the plane of the electrical field
the plane of the electrical or magnetic field dependent on the plane of the aerial
none of the above
If the wavelength of a radio wave is 3.75 metres, the frequency is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
5.
300 km per second

300 million metres per second
162 nm per second
162 million nm per second
80 kHz
8 MHz
80 MHz
800 kHz
The wavelength corresponding to a frequency of 125 MHz is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
2.4 m
24 m
24 cm
24 mm
6.
The frequency which corresponds to a wavelength of 6.98 cm is:
a.
b.
c.
d.
7.
The frequency band containing the frequency corresponding to 29.1 cm is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
4298 GHz
4.298 GHz
429.8 GHz
42.98 GHz
HF
VHF
SHF
UHF
13
Chapter 1
8.
To carry out a phase comparison between two electromagnetic waves:

a.
b.
c.
d.
9.
The phase of the reference wave is 110 as the phase of the variable wave is 315. What is the
phase difference?
a.
b.
c.
d.
10.

045
135
225
315
The wavelength corresponding to a frequency of 15 625 MHz is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
12.
205
025
155
335
Determine the approximate phase difference between the reference wave and the variable
wave:
(The reference wave is the solid line and the variable wave is the dashed line)
a.
b.
c.
d.
11.
both waves must have the same amplitude

both waves must have the same frequency
both waves must have the same amplitude and frequency
both waves must have the same phase
1.92 m
19.2 m
1.92 cm
19.2 cm
Which frequency band is a wavelength of 1200 m?

a.
b.
c.
d.
14
UHF
LF
HF
MF
Chapter 1
15
Chapter 1
ANSWERS
10
11
12
16
Theory
Chapter 2
CHAPTER TWO
RADIO PROPAGATION THEORY
Contents
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
FACTORS AFFECTING PROPAGATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
PROPAGATION PATHS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
NON-IONOSPHERIC PROPAGATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
IONOSPHERIC PROPAGATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
SKYWAVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
HF COMMUNICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
SELCAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
PROPAGATION SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
SUPER-REFRACTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
SUB-REFRACTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
QUESTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
17
Chapter 2
18
Theory
Theory
Chapter 2
INTRODUCTION
In the context of radio waves the term propagation simply means how the radio waves travel
through the atmosphere. Different frequency bands use different propagation paths through
the atmosphere; the propagation path often determines the uses to which a particular frequency
band can be put in either communication or navigation systems. The different propagation
paths associated with particular frequencies can also impose limitations on the use of those
frequencies.
FACTORS AFFECTING PROPAGATION

There are several factors which affect the propagation of radio waves and need to be considered
when discussing the propagation paths:
Attenuation. Attenuation is the term given to the loss of signal strength in a radio wave as it
travels outward from the transmitter. There are two aspects to attenuation:
Absorption. As the radio wave travels outwards from a transmitter the energy is absorbed and
scattered by the molecules of air and water vapour, dust particles, water droplets, vegetation,
the surface of the earth and the ionosphere. The effect of this absorption, (except ionospheric)
increases as frequency increases and is a very significant factor above about 1000 MHz.
Inverse Square Law. The EM radiation from an aerial spreads out as the surface of a sphere so
the power available decreases with increasing distance from the transmitter. For example, if,
at a certain distance from a transmitter, the field intensity is 4 Wm-2 at double the distance that
energy will be spread over an area of 4 m2 and the field intensity will be 1 Wm-2. That is, power
available is proportional to the inverse of the square of the range.
1m
4W 1m
1W
1W
1W 1W
2m
2m
R
2xR
1
R2
Figure 2.1 Inverse Square Law

Figure2.1
The practical effect of this is that if it is required to double the effective range of a transmitter
then the power would have to be increased by a factor of 4.
19
Chapter 2
Theory
Static Interference. There is a large amount of static electricity generated in the atmosphere
by weather, human activity and geological activity. The effect of static interference is greater
at lower frequencies and at VHF and above the effect of interference is generally negligible.
However, radio waves travelling through the ionosphere will collect interference at all
frequencies. Additionally the circuitry in the receivers and transmitters also produces static
interference. The static, from whatever source, reduces the clarity of communications and the
accuracy of navigation systems. The strength of the required signal compared to the amount of
interference is expressed as a signal to noise ratio (S/N) and for the best clarity or accuracy the
unwanted noise needs to be reduced to the lowest possible levels.
Power. An increase in the power output of a transmitter will increase the range, within the
limits of the inverse square law. As noted above, to double the range of a radio transmitter
would require the power to be increased by a factor of 4.
Receiver Sensitivity. If internal noise in a receiver can be reduced then the receiver will be able
to process weaker signals hence increasing the effective range at which a useable signal can be
received, however, this is an expensive process.
Directivity. If the power output is concentrated into a narrow beam then there will be an increase
in range, or a reduction in power required for a given range. However the signal will only be
usable in the direction of the beam.
PROPAGATION PATHS
There are five propagation paths of which four need to be considered for aviation purposes:
PROPAGATION
NON-IONOSPHERIC
IONOSPHERIC
Surface Wave
20 kHz-50 MHz
(Used 20 kHz-2MHz)
Skywave
20 kHz-50 MHz
(Used 2-30 MHz
Space Wave
>50 MHz
Satellite
(UHF, SHF)
Ducting
<20 kHz
Ionospheric propagation is propagation affected by the properties of the ionosphere. At this stage
it is only necessary to discuss skywave, satellite propagation will be considered in conjunction
with global navigation satellite systems (GNSS) in chapter 19. Knowledge of propagation below
30 kHz is not required.
Non-Ionospheric propagation covers the other propagation paths.
The knowledge of propagation of radio waves in the VLF band is not required for the JAA
examinations as there are no civil aeronautical communication or navigation systems in this
band.
20
Theory
Chapter 2
NON-IONOSPHERIC PROPAGATION
Surface wave. Surface wave propagation exists at frequencies from about 20 kHz to about 50
MHz (from the upper end of VLF to the lower end of VHF). The portion of the wave in contact
with the surface of the earth is retarded causing the wave to bend round the surface of the earth;
a process known as diffraction.
Figure
Wave.
Figure1.7.
2.2 Surface
Surface Wave
The range achievable is dependent on several factors: the frequency, the surface over which
the wave is travelling and the polarisation of the wave. As the frequency increases, surface
attenuation increases and the surface wave range decreases; it is effectively non-existent above
HF. The losses to attenuation by the surface of the earth are greater over land than over sea,
because the sea has good electrical conductivity. Hence greater ranges are attainable over the
sea. A horizontally polarised wave will be attenuated very quickly and give very short ranges;
therefore, vertical polarisation is generally used at these lower frequencies.
10
100
f(Hz)
1
10
100
LAND
SEA
1101001,00010,000
nm
Figure 2.3
This is the primary propagation path used in the LF frequency band and the lower part of the
MF frequency band (ie frequencies of 30 kHz to 2 MHz).
An approximation to the useable range achievable over sea and land for a MF transmission at a
frequency of 300 kHz is given by:
Sea:
Land:
range 3 x Power
range 2 x Power
So, for example, a 300 kHz transmitter with a power output of 10 kW would give a surface wave
range of about 300 nm over the sea and 200 nm over the land.
21
Chapter 2
Theory
Because the surface wave is retarded more over land than over sea there is a change in the
direction the wave takes as it passes from land to sea. The portion of the wave which first passes
over the sea accelerates and the wave bends away from the normal, that is towards the coast.
This is known as coastal refraction and will be looked at in greater detail in ADF.
Figure 2.4 Coastal Refraction
Space wave. The space wave is made up of two paths, a direct wave and a reflected wave.
Figure 1.6(a). Space Wave.

Figure 2.5 Space Wave
At frequencies of VHF and above radio waves start to behave more like visible light and as we
have a visual horizon with light we have a radio horizon with the radio frequencies. So the only
atmospheric propagation at these frequencies is line of sight.
22
Theory
Chapter 2
Figure 1.6(b). Line of Sight.

Figure 2.6 Maximum Theoretical Range
There is some atmospheric refraction which causes the radio waves to bend towards the surface
of the earth increasing the range slightly beyond the geometric horizon. Since the diameter of the
earth is known and the atmospheric refraction can be calculated it is possible to determine the
maximum theoretical range at which a transmission can be received. The amount of refraction
decreases as frequency increases but for practical purposes for the JAA syllabus the line of sight
range can be calculated using the formula:
Range (nm) = 1.23 x (HTX + HRX)
HTX : Transmitter height in feet
HRX : Receiver height in feet
At VHF and above it does not matter how powerful the transmitter is, if the receiver is below the
line of sight range, it will receive nothing.
For example:
What is the maximum range a receiver at 1600 ft can receive VHF transmissions from a transmitter
at 1024 ft?
Range = 1.23 x (1600 + 1024) = 1.23 x (40 + 32) = 88.6 nm
Note 1:

Regardless of the possible propagation paths, if a receiver is in line of sight

with a transmitter, then the space wave will be received.
Note 2:

At the time of writing, the JAA Question Bank uses a constant of 1.25 in line of
sight range calculations, but this will be amended to 1.23 in the new syllabus
(NPA25); these notes reflect the new syllabus and consequently answers to
Examples are worked out using 1.23.
IONOSPHERIC PROPAGATION
Before studying ionospheric propagation it is necessary to know about the processes which
produce the ionisation in the upper atmosphere and the properties of the ionosphere that
produce skywave.
The Ionosphere. The ionosphere extends upwards from an altitude of about 60 km to limits
of the atmosphere (notionally 1500 km). In this part of the atmosphere the pressures are very
low (at 60 km the atmospheric pressure is 0.22 HPa) and hence the gaseous atoms are widely
dispersed. Within this region incoming solar radiation at ultra-violet and shorter wavelengths
interacts with the atoms raising their energy levels and causing electrons to be ejected from
the shells of the atoms. Since an atom is electrically neutral, the result is negatively charged
electrons and positively charged particles known as ions.
23
Chapter 2
Theory
The electrons are continually attempting to reunite with the ions, so the highest levels of
ionisation will be found shortly after midday (about 1400) local time, when there is a balance
between the ionisation and the decay of the ionisation with the electrons rejoining the ions and
the lowest just before sunrise (at the surface). In summer the ionisation levels will be higher
than in winter, and ionisation levels will increase as latitude decreases, again because of the
increased intensity of the solar radiation.
Increased radiation from solar flares is unpredictable but can give rise to exceptionally high
levels of ionisation, which in turn can cause severe disruption of communication and navigation
systems, particularly those which are space based. It is not unusual for communication (and
other) satellites to be shut down during periods of intense solar flare activity to avoid damage.
As the incoming solar energy is absorbed by the gaseous atoms the amount of energy available
to ionise the atoms at lower levels reduces and hence the levels of ionisation increase with
increase in altitude. However, because the normal atmospheric mixing processes associated
with the lower levels of the atmosphere are absent in the higher levels, gravitation and terrestrial
magnetism affect the distribution of gases. This means that the increase in ionisation is not
linear but the ionised particles form into discrete layers.
F LAYER
ELAYER
Km
DLAYER
Figure 2.7 Effect of Ionisation with Height

The ionisation is most intense at the centre of the layers decreasing towards the lower and upper
edges of the layers. The characteristics of these layers vary with the levels of ionisation. The
lowest of these layers occurs at an average altitude of 75 km and is known as the D-region or Dlayer. This is a fairly diffuse area which, for practical purposes, forms at sunrise and disappears
at sunset. The next layer, at an average altitude of 125 km, is present throughout the 24 hours
and is known as the E-layer. The E-layer reduces in altitude at sunrise and increases in altitude
after sunset. The final layer of significance is the F-layer at an average altitude of 225 km. The
F-layer splits into two at sunrise and rejoins at sunset, the F1-layer reducing in altitude at sunrise
and increasing in altitude after sunset. The behaviour of the F2-layer is dependent on time of
year, in summer it increases in altitude and may reach altitudes in excess of 400 km and in
winter it reduces in altitude.
24
Theory
Chapter 2
Figure 2.8 Layers of the Ionosphere

Although, overall the levels of ionisation increase from sunrise to midday local time and then
decrease until sunrise the following morning, the levels are continually fluctuating as the intensity
of high energy radiation from the sun fluctuates. So it would be possible for the ionisation levels
to decrease temporarily during the morning, or increase temporarily during the afternoon.
The structure of the ionosphere gives stable conditions by day and by night. Around dawn
and dusk, however, the ionosphere is in a transitional state, which leads to what can best be
described as electrical turbulence. The result is that around dawn and dusk, radio navigation
and communication systems using the ionosphere are subject to excessive interference and
disruption.
25
Chapter 2
Theory
SKYWAVE
The ionisation levels in the layers increase towards the centre of the layer. This means that as a
radio wave transits a layer it encounters an increasing density of ions as it moves to the centre
of the layer and decreasing density as it moves out of the layer. If the radio waves travel across
the layer at right angles they will be retarded, but will maintain a straight path. However, if the
waves penetrate the layer at an angle they will be refracted away from the normal as they enter,
then back towards the normal as they exit the layer.
Figure 1.10. Critical Angle (HF Band).

Figure 2.9 Skywave Propagation - Critical Angle
The amount of refraction experienced by the radio waves is dependent on both the frequency
and the levels of ionisation. If the radio wave refracts to the (earth) horizontal before it reaches
the centre of the layer then it will continue to refract and will return to the surface of the earth
as skywave; this is total internal refraction at the layer.
Starting from the vertical at the transmitter, with a frequency which penetrates the ionosphere,
as the angle between the vertical and the radio wave increases, an angle will be reached where
total internal refraction occurs and the wave returns to the surface. This is known as the first
returning skywave and the angle (measured from the vertical) at which this occurs is known
as the critical angle. The distance from the transmitter to the point where the first returning
skywave appears at the surface is known as the skip distance. As skywaves occur in the LF, MF
and HF frequency bands there will also be some surface wave present. From the point where
the surface wave is totally attenuated to the point where the first returning skywave appears
there will be no detectable signal, this area is known as dead space.
26
Theory
Chapter 2
Figure 1.11. Dead Space and Skip Distance.
Figure 2.10 Skywave Propagation - Dead Space

The height at which full internal refraction occurs is dependent on frequency, but, as a
generalisation frequencies up to 2 MHz will be refracted at the E-layer and from 2 50 MHz at
the F-layers. Skywave is only likely to occur above 50 MHz when there are abnormal ionospheric
conditions associated with intense sunspot or solar flare activity, therefore, VHF frequencies
used for Navigation systems do not produce skywaves.
Effect of change in ionisation intensity. Since the reason for the refraction is the ionisation of the
upper atmosphere it follows that if ionisation intensity changes, then the amount of refraction of
radio waves will also change. At a given frequency, as ionisation increases the refractive index
and hence the amount of refraction affecting the radio waves will also increase. This means that
refraction will take place at a smaller critical angle and the skip distance and dead space will
decrease. Conversely, a decrease in ionisation will result in an increase in critical angle, skip
distance and dead space.
Figure 2.11 Skywave Propagation - Effect of Increased Ionisation

27
Chapter 2
Theory
Effect of change of frequency. For a given ionisation intensity, the amount of refraction of radio
waves decreases as frequency increases, because as frequency increases the energy contained
in the radio wave increases and therefore refraction decreases. So, as frequency increases, the
critical angle will increase and the skip distance and dead space will also increase. As frequency
increases, the surface wave range will decrease, so there is an increase in dead space caused by
both the increase in skip distance and decrease in surface wave range. Conversely, a decrease in
frequency will give a decrease in critical angle, skip distance and dead space.
Height of the Layers. The skip distance will also be affected by the altitude of the refracting
layers. As the altitude of the layer increases then the skip distance will also increase and greater
ranges will be experienced by refraction at the F-layer than the E-layer.
LF and MF skywave propagation. During the day the D-region absorbs radio energy at
frequencies below about 2 MHz (LF and MF bands). At night the D-region is effectively nonexistent so, at these frequencies, sky waves, refracted at the E-layer are present. This means
the skywaves at LF and MF are not reliable for continuous long-range use and the presence of
skywaves at night at the relatively short ranges associated with these lower frequencies will
cause interference with short range navigation (and broadcasting) systems relying on surface
wave reception. This affects ADF and will be discussed in more detail in Chapter 7.
E LAYER
DLAYER
SkyWave
SurfaceWave
EARTH
DAY
E LAYER
EARTH
NIGHT
Figure 2.12 LF/MF Skywave Propagation
28
Theory
Chapter 2
Achievable ranges. The maximum range for sky wave will be achieved when the path of the
radio wave is tangential at the surface of the earth at both the transmitter and receiver.
A simple calculation shows that the average maximum range for refraction from the E-layer
at 125 km is 1350 nm, and the average maximum range from the F-layer at 225 km is 2200 nm.
These ranges will obviously change as the height of the ionised layers changes.
Multi-hop skywave occurs when the wave is refracted at the ionosphere then the sky wave
is reflected back from the surface of the earth to the ionosphere etc. Multi-hop skywave can
achieve ranges of half the diameter of the earth.
Figure 1.12. Single and Double Reflections.

Figure 2.13 Multi-Hop Skywave Propagation
VLF Propagation. At VLF frequencies, up to about 20 kHz, the wavelength (15 100 km) is of
the same order of magnitude as the altitude of the D-region and E-layer. At these frequencies
the surface of the earth and the lower edge of the ionosphere act as a wave guide, effectively
channelling the radio waves around the earth with very little loss of power, this is known as
duct propagation. Theoretically, at relatively modest power levels a VLF transmission could
circumnavigate the planet. As there are no civilian equipments in the VLF band detailed
knowledge is not required.
29
Chapter 2
Theory
HF COMMUNICATIONS
Over inhabited land areas VHF communications are ideal for all communications between aircraft
and ground. However, until satellite communications are fully implemented, the only means of
communication between aircraft and ground when over the oceans, or other uninhabited areas,
is either surface wave or skywave. To achieve ranges of 2000 nm to 3000 nm using surface wave
would require frequencies at the lower end of LF or the upper end of VLF. The use of these
frequencies for aeronautical communications would require relatively complex equipment with
the associated weight penalty, and they would be more susceptible to static interference than
higher frequencies making them somewhat tedious to use and they would also have very low
data rates. Thus, the only practical means of communication over long ranges is skywave (until
satellite communications are fully implemented).
The maximum usable frequency (MUF) for a given range will be that of the first returning
skywave and this is the ideal frequency for that range because it will have had the shortest path
through the ionosphere, and therefore, will have experienced less attenuation and contain less
static interference. However, since the ionisation intensity fluctuates, a decrease in ionisation
would result in an increase in skip distance and hence loss of signal. So a compromise frequency
is used, known as the optimum working frequency (OWF), which by decades of experimentation
and experience has been determined to be 0.85 times the MUF.
Since ionisation levels are lower by night than by day it follows that the frequency required for
use at a particular range by night will of necessity be less than the frequency required for use by
day. A good rule of thumb is that the frequency required at night is roughly half that required
by day.
Because skip distance increases as frequency increases, the range at which communication is
required will also influence the selection of the frequency to be used. Short ranges will require
lower frequencies and longer ranges will require higher frequency.
30
Theory
Chapter 2
A typical example of the sort of problem that may appear is:

An aircraft on a flight from London, UK to New York, USA is in mid-Atlantic at sunrise.
The pilot is in communication with the UK on a frequency of 12 MHz.
What frequency can the pilot expect to use with the USA?
DAY
NIGHT
SUNRISE
Answer: 6 MHz.
The wave will be refracted half way between the aircraft and the UK, and half way between the
aircraft and the USA. Mid way between the aircraft and the UK it is day, so a relatively high
frequency will be required. Midway between the aircraft and the USA it is night so a relatively
low frequency will be required.
SELCAL
Because the frequencies have transited the ionosphere they will have accumulated a considerable
amount of static interference and, because of the long ranges, signals may be received from more
than one ground station. Pilots are required to maintain a continuous listening watch when
receiving an ATC service, however, these factors combine to make HF frequencies very difficult
and stressful to listen to. To reduce the stress experienced by pilots using HF a selective calling
system (SELCAL) is installed in HF equipment to alert pilots when ATC wish to communicate.
Each radio fitted with SELCAL has a unique code comprising 4 letters (eg ABCD). When the
aircraft is to be flown in an area where HF communications are used, the pilot notifies ATC of
the aircrafts SELCAL code. Then, having made initial contact with ATC and checked that the
SELCAL is serviceable, the pilot can rely on ATC using the SELCAL facility to alert him when
communication is required by ATC, if the pilot wishes to communicate with ATC then he will
just make a call. SELCAL is also available on VHF in some remote areas.
31
Chapter 2
Theory
PROPAGATION SUMMARY
The propagation characteristics of each of the frequency bands are summarised below, where
propagation paths are in brackets this indicates that the path is present but not normally
utilised.

Frequency Band
Propagation Path
VLF
Ducting
LF
Surface Wave
(Skywave)
MF
Surface Wave
(Skywave)
HF
Skywave
(Surface Wave)
VHF
Space Wave
UHF
Space Wave
SHF
Space Wave
EHF
Space Wave
SUPER-REFRACTION
This is a phenomenon which is significant at frequencies above 30 MHz (that is VHF and above).
Radio waves experience greater refraction, that is, they are bent downwards towards the earths
surface more than in normal conditions, giving notable increases in line of sight range to as
much as 40% above the usual. The conditions which give rise to super-refraction are:
Decrease in relative humidity with height

Temperature falling more slowly with height than standard
Fine weather and high pressure systems
Warm air flowing over a cooler surfaces
In extreme cases when there is a low level temperature inversion with a marked decrease in
humidity with increasing height (simply, warm dry air above cool moist air), a low level duct
may be formed which traps radio waves at frequencies above 30 MHz giving extremely long
ranges. This phenomenon is known as duct propagation and can lead to exceptionally long
ranges. When interference is experienced on UK television channels from continental stations,
the reason for this is the forming of such a duct.
This phenomenon is most common where warm desert areas are bordering oceanic areas, eg
the Mediterranean and Caribbean seas. It can also occur in temperate latitudes when high
pressure predominates, particularly in the winter months when the dry descending air in the
high pressure system is heated by the adiabatic process and is warmer than the underlying cool
and most air.
32
Theory
Chapter 2
SUB-REFRACTION
Much rarer than super-refraction, but still of significance in radio propagation, sub-refraction
causes a reduction in the normal refraction giving a decrease in line of sight range by up to 20%.
The conditions which give rise to sub-refraction are:
An increase in relative humidity with increasing height
Temperature decreasing with increasing height at a greater rate than standard
Poor weather with low pressure systems
Cold air flowing over a warm surface
33
Chapter 2
Theory
QUESTIONS
1.
The process which causes the reduction in signal strength as range from a transmitter increases
is known as:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Which of the following will give the greatest surface wave range?
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.

52 nm
80 nm
35 nm
120 nm
The maximum range an aircraft at 2500 ft can communicate with a VHF station at 196 ft is:
a.
b.
c.
d.
6.
2
8
16
4
A 300 kHz transmitter has an output of 1600 watts, the effective range over the sea will be:
a.
b.
c.
d.
5.
243 MHz
500 kHz
2182 khz
15 MHz
It is intended to increase the range of a VHF transmitter from 50 nm to 100 nm.

This will be achieved by increasing the power output by a factor of:
a.
b.
c.
d.
4.
absorption
diffraction
attenuation
ionisation
80 nm
64 nm
52 nm
65 nm
What is the minimum height for an aircraft at a range of 200 nm to be detected by a radar at
1600 ft amsl?
a.
b.
c.
d.
34
25,500 ft
15,000 ft
40,000 ft
57,500 ft
Theory
7.
8.
Chapter 2
Determine which of the following statements concerning atmospheric ionisation are correct.
1.
2.
3.
4.
The highest levels of ionisation will be experienced in low latitudes.

Ionisation levels increase linearly with increasing altitude.
The lowest levels of ionisation occur about midnight.
The E-layer is higher by night than by day because the ionisation levels are lower at
night.
a.
b.
c.
d.
statements 1, 2 and 3 are correct

statements 1, 3 and 4 are correct
statements 2 and 4 are correct
statements 1 and 4 are correct
The average height of the E-layer is and the maximum range for skywave will be
a.
b.
c.
d.
9.
60 km, 1350 nm
125 km, 2200 km
225 km, 2200 km
125 km, 1350 nm
Concerning HF communications, which of the following is correct?

a.
b.
c.
d.
The frequency required in low latitudes is less than the frequency required in high
latitudes.
At night a higher frequency is required than by day.
The frequency required is dependent on time of day but not the season.
The frequency required for short ranges will be less than the frequency required for
long ranges.
35
Chapter 2
Theory
ANSWERS
36
Modulation
Chapter 3
CHAPTER THREE
MODULATION
Contents
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
KEYED MODULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
AMPLITUDE MODULATION (AM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
SINGLE SIDEBAND (SSB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
FREQUENCY MODULATION (FM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
PHASE MODULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Figure 3.4
Comparison of Methods of Modulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
PULSE MODULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
EMISSION DESIGNATORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
First Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
QUESTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
ANSWERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
37
Chapter 3
38
Modulation
Modulation
Chapter 3
INTRODUCTION
Modulation is the name given to the process of adding information to a radio wave or the
formatting of radio waves for other purposes. Of the main forms of modulation, five have
application in aviation:
Keyed Modulation
Amplitude Modulation (AM)
Frequency Modulation (FM)
Phase Modulation
Pulse Modulation
The modulation of a radio frequency is generally associated with the transmission of audio
information, although the transmission of data, including that in satellite navigation systems,
and the determination of bearing in VOR, for example, require modulation for other purposes.
Before an audio signal can be added to a radio wave it must be converted to an electrical signal.
This will be achieved by the use of a microphone, which is quite simply a device that converts
sound waves to an electrical current.
It will be assumed for AM and FM that this conversion has already been accomplished.
KEYED MODULATION
The simplest way to put information onto a carrier wave is to quite simply interrupt the wave to
give short and long bursts of energy.
K
Figure 3.1 Morse K in Keyed Modulation
By arranging the transmissions into short and long periods of carrier wave transmission we can
send information using the Morse code. This is known as telegraphy and until the development
of other forms of modulation was the only means of passing information. Keyed modulation
is still used by some non-directional beacons (NDBs) for identification and will be discussed
further in Chapter 7.
39
Chapter 3
Modulation
AMPLITUDE MODULATION (AM)

In AM the amplitude of the audio frequency (AF) modifies the amplitude of the radio frequency
(RF)
Figure 3.2 Amplitude Modulation

As can be seen from the diagram above, positive amplitude in the AF gives an increase in
amplitude in the RF and negative amplitude in the AF gives a decrease in amplitude in the RF.
The process of combining a radio frequency with a current at audio frequencies is known as
heterodyning. Looking in more detail at the process; the heterodyning process combines the
two frequencies, leaving the RF unchanged but producing new frequencies at the sum and
difference of the RF and AF. For example an audio frequency of 3 kHz is used to amplitude
modulate a radio frequency of 2182 kHz. The RF remains unchanged but the AF is now split
into 2 sidebands extending upwards from 2182.001 kHz to 2185 kHz the upper sideband
(USB) and a lower sideband (LSB) extending downwards from 2181.999 kHz to 2179 kHz. The
spread of frequencies is from 2179 kHz to 2185 kHz giving a bandwidth of 6 kHz, ie double the
audio frequency used.
2185 kHz
(25W)
(100 W)
RF
2182 kHz
2182.001 kHz
(50 W)
AF
(100 W)
3 kHz
2182 kHz
2181.999 kHz
(25 W)
2179 kHz
Table 1 AM Side Band Production

40
Upper Side Band

(USB)
Lower Side Band

(LSB)
Modulation
Chapter 3
As can be seen from the table the power that is in the AF is divided equally between the two
sidebands, furthermore the information in the AF is contained in both sidebands. It should also
be noted that only one third of the signal is carrying the information.
SINGLE SIDEBAND (SSB)

There is redundancy in double sideband transmissions in that the information is contained in
both the upper and lower sidebands. Additionally, the original RF carrier wave having served its
purpose to get the audio information into radio frequencies is now redundant. So it is possible
to remove one of the sidebands and the carrier wave because the remaining sideband contains
all the information. This is known as single sideband (SSB) operation.
2185 kHz
(25W)
(150W)
(100 W)
RF
2182 kHz
AF
Upper Side Band

(USB)
2182.001 kHz
(50 W)
(100 W)
3 kHz
2182 kHz
2181.999 kHz
(25 W)
Lower Side Band

(LSB)
2179 kHz
Table 2
Single Side Band
When using sky wave propagation for communication, the differing refraction occurring
at different frequencies leads to an increase in distortion if the bandwidth is too large. The
ionosphere comprises electrically charged particles which cause high levels of static interference
on radio waves, the use of SSB significantly reduces the effect of this interference. The MF
& HF frequencies used for long range communication are in great demand, hence the use of
SSB transmissions increases the number of channels available. The use of SSB also reduces the
amount of power required. Thus the main advantages of SSB are:
Double the number of channels available with double side band
Better signal/noise ratio (less interference)
Less power required hence lighter equipment
41
Chapter 3
Modulation
FREQUENCY MODULATION (FM)

In FM the amplitude of the AF modifies the frequency of the RF.
Figure 1.17.
The frequency deviation is primarily dependent on the amplitude of the AF; the greater
the amplitude the greater the frequency deviation. The frequency of the AF determines the
rate of change of frequency within the modulated RF. When used for sound broadcasting
the bandwidth permitted by international agreements is 150 kHz, compared to a maximum
bandwidth permitted in AM broadcasting of 9 kHz. Hence FM is generally unsuitable for use
below VHF because of the bandwidth requirement.
For communications the bandwidth can be considerably reduced whilst still maintaining the
integrity of the information, this is known as narrow band FM (NBFM). Typically NBFM systems
have a bandwidth of 8 kHz, which is still greater than the 6 kHz permitted for aeronautical
communications and the 3 kHz used in HF communications. NBFM is not, at present, used in
aviation communications.
42
Modulation
Chapter 3
PHASE MODULATION
In phase modulation the phase of the carrier wave is modified by the input signal. There are
two cases: the first is where the input is an analogue signal when the phase of the carrier wave
is modified by the amplitude of the signal; econdly, with a digital signal it is known as phase
shift keying, the phase change reflects a 0 or 1; eg 0 phase shift indicates a zero and 180 phase
shift represents a 1. (Note: this is the simplest case as multiple data can be represented by using
many degrees of phase shift.)
There are two cases used in navigation systems, MLS and GPS. GPS uses binary phase shift
keying, MLS uses differential phase shift keying.
Amplitude Modulation
Figure 3.4
Frequency Modulation
Phase Modulation
Comparison of Methods of Modulation
PULSE MODULATION
Pulse modulation is used extensively in radar systems and for data exchange in communications
systems.
EMISSION DESIGNATORS
In order to easily identify the characteristics and information provided by electronic signals,
a list of designators has been devised. They comprise 3 alphanumerics, where the first letter
defines the nature of the modulation, the second digit the nature of the signal used for the
modulation and the third letter the type of information carried.
43
44
Frequency modulation
Phase modulation
Sequence of unmodulated pulses
Sequence of pulses modulated in

amplitude
Composite system with one or more

channels containing quantised or digital
information, together with one or more
channels containing analogue information
Two or more channels containing analogue

information
Cases not otherwise covered
Two or more channels containing

quantised or digital information
Data transmission, telemetry,

telecommand
D
Facsimile
Single channel containing analogue

information
Amplitude modulation - Single

sideband suppressed carrier
Cases not otherwise covered
Combinations of the above
Television (video)
Telephony, including sound

broadcasting
Telegraphy for automatic reception
Telegraphy for aural reception
Single channel containing quantised

or digital information with the use of a
modulating sub-carrier, excluding time
division multiplex
Amplitude modulation - Single

sideband, full carrier
Amplitude modulation - Double

sideband
No information transmitted
Single channel containing quantised or

digital information without the use of a
modulating sub-carrier, excluding time
division multiplex
Emissions of an unmodulated carrier
Type of information transmitted

N
Nature of signals modulating the main carrier
Type of modulation of the main carrier
Third Symbol
No modulating signal
Second Symbol
First Symbol
EMISSION CHARACTERISTICS
Chapter 3
Modulation
Modulation
Chapter 3
For example, VHF radio telephony communications have the designation A3E.
Reference to the table gives the following breakdown:
A - Amplitude modulation - Double sideband
3 - Single channel containing analogue information
E - Telephony, including sound broadcasting
This means an RF carrier wave is being amplitude modulated with speech
HF radio telephony communications have the designation J3E, this gives:
J Amplitude modulation single sideband with suppressed carrier
3 - Single channel containing analogue information
E - Telephony, including sound broadcasting
This means an RF carrier wave is being amplitude modulated with speech then the RF carrier
wave is being removed along with one of the sidebands.
It is not necessary to know the details of the table.
Other designators relevant to the equipments discussed in phase 2 are:
ADF
VHF RTF
HF RTF
VOR
ILS
Marker Beacons
DME
MLS
N0NA1A or N0NA2A
A3E
J3E
A9W
A8W
A2A
P0N
N0XG1D
With the exception of ADF it is unlikely that knowledge of these designators will be examined.
45
Chapter 3
Modulation
QUESTIONS
1.
The bandwidth produced when a radio frequency (RF) of 4716 kHz is amplitude modulated
with an audio frequency (AF) of 6 kHz is:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
6 kHz
3 kHz
12 kHz
9 kHz
Which of the following statements concerning AM is correct?

a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
the amplitude of the RF is modified by the frequency of the AF

the amplitude of the RF is modified by the amplitude of the AF
the frequency of the RF is modified by the frequency of the AF
the frequency of the RF is modified by the amplitude of the AF
Which of the following is an advantage of single sideband (SSB) emissions?

a.
b.
c.
d.
4.
More frequencies available

Reduced power requirement
Better signal/noise ratio
All of the above
Which of the following statements concerning FM is correct?

a.
b.
c.
d.
46
the amplitude of the RF is modified by the frequency of the AF

the amplitude of the RF is modified by the amplitude of the AF
the frequency of the RF is modified by the frequency of the AF
the frequency of the RF is modified by the amplitude of the AF
Modulation
Chapter 3
ANSWERS
47
Chapter 3
Modulation
48
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Modulation
Chapter 3
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
49
Chapter 3
Modulation
50
INTENTIONALLY BLANK
Antennae
Chapter 4
CHAPTER FOUR
ANTENNAE
Contents
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
BASIC PRINCIPLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
LOADED ANTENNAE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
AERIAL FEEDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
POLAR DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
OTHER SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
RADAR AERIALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
QUESTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
ANSWERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
51
Chapter 4
52
Antennae
Antennae
Chapter 4
INTRODUCTION
Antennae or aerials are the means by which radio energy is radiated and received. The type of
antenna used will be determined by the function the radio system is required to perform. This
chapter will look at the principles which are common to all antennae and at the specialities
required for particular radio navigation systems.
BASIC PRINCIPLES
There are two basic types of aerial used for receiving and transmitting basic communications,
the half-wave dipole and the Marconi or quarter wave aerial.
Figure 4.1 Half-Wave Diplole

Figure 3.5. Half Wave Dipole
With the dipole aerial the power is fed to the centre of the aerial and radiates in all directions
perpendicular to the aerial. The Marconi aerial is set on, but insulated from, a metal surface
which acts as the second part of a dipole, with the radio energy radiating perpendicular to the
aerial. Because of the better aerodynamic qualities, Marconi aerials are used on aircraft.
Figure 4.2
Marconi Aerial
For an aerial to operate with maximum efficiency it must be the correct length for the wavelength
of the frequency in use. As the names imply the ideal length for an aerial is half or quarter
of the wavelength of the frequency being transmitted. However, whilst we regard the speed
of propagation of electromagnetic energy as being constant, this is only true in a specified
medium. If the energy passes from one medium to another the speed will change. In the case
of electromagnetic energy, the denser the medium the slower the speed. This needs to be taken
into account in the length of aerials.
The speed of electromagnetic energy in metal is approximately 95% of the free space speed, so
our aerial needs to be 95% of half or quarter the wavelength.
53
Chapter 4
Antennae
Example:
What is the optimum length for a Marconi aerial transmitting on a frequency of 125 MHz?
The wavelength is 2.4 m, so 0.95 x = 57 cm
4

LOADED ANTENNAE
The wavelengths of aeronautical VHF radio telephony are 2.19 m to 2.54 m which means that
for maximum efficiency the aircraft (and ATC) aerial must be adjustable between approximately
52 cm and 60 cm. To achieve maximum efficiency aerials would have to be adjustable in length,
which would pose significant technical problems. Furthermore, aircraft aerials are about 20 - 30
cm long, so would operate very inefficiently.
To overcome these problems an aerial loading unit (ALU) is fitted in the circuit between the radio
equipment and the aerial. The ALU samples the signal, then through a series of capacitors and
resistors balances the signal travelling to/from the aerial to effect maximum aerial efficiency.
AERIAL FEEDERS
The means by which energy is carried between the aerial and transmitter or receiver is dependent
on the frequency in use and the power levels. At low and medium frequencies a simple wire
is adequate to carry the signal over reasonable distances with little energy loss. As frequency
increases the power losses increase and into HF and VHF a twin wire feeder is more efficient.
At UHF frequencies, the power losses in these simple feeders becomes unacceptably high and a
coaxial cable is required.
In the upper part of the UHF band and in the SHF and EHF bands the use of dipole or Marconi
aerials is precluded because of the high energy losses and the way the energy is produced. At
these frequencies a waveguide is used to carry the energy to or from the aerial. The waveguide
is a hollow, rectangular metal tube. The internal dimensions of the tube are determined by the
frequency in use, being half the wavelength.
54
Antennae
Chapter 4
POLAR DIAGRAMS
A polar diagram is used to show the radiation or reception pattern of an aerial. It is simply a
line joining all points of equal signal strength and is generally a plan view perpendicular to the
plane of radiation or reception. From here on we will talk about radiation only, but the same
principle applies to reception.
A dipole aerial radiates most energy at right angles to the aerial with signal strength decreasing
towards the ends of the aerial, where there is no radiation. A three dimensional representation
of radiation from such an aerial would be a torus, centred on the centre point of the aerial:
Figure 3.4. Omni Directional

Transmitter Polar Diagram
Figure 4.3 3-D Polar Diagram
Clearly such diagrams would be cumbersome so a plan view of the plane of radiation is used:
Figure 3.4. Omni Directional Transmitter Polar Diagram

Figure 4.4
Plan View Polar Diagram
55
Chapter 4
Antennae
DIRECTIVITY
Many systems require the directional emission or reception of energy, for example; radar,
ILS, MLS and many more. How this directivity is achieved depends on the frequency and
application.
The simplest way to achieve directivity is to add parasitic elements to the aerial. If we place a
metal rod 5% longer than the aerial at a distance of quarter of a wavelength from the aerial and
in the same plane as the aerial, it will act as a reflector.
Figure 4.5
Directivity Using Reflector
This reflector re-radiates the energy 180 out of phase, the resulting polar diagram is shown
above, with no signal behind the reflector and increased signal in front of the aerial.
This process can be taken further by adding other elements in front of the aerial. These elements
are known as directors and are smaller than the aerial itself.
Figure 4.6
Improved Directivity Using Reflector and Directors
All will recognise this as being the type of aerial array used for the reception of television signals.
The directors have the effect of focussing the signal into (or out of) the aerial, giving a stronger
signal than that which would be generated by a simple dipole.
However, directivity comes with its own price. As can be seen from the diagram, we have
produced a strong beam along the plane of the aerial, but have also produced many unwanted
sidelobes which would receive (and transmit) unwanted signals. Signals received in these
sidelobes produce characteristic ghosting on television pictures, usually caused by reflections
from buildings etc. These sidelobes give major problems which have to be addressed in SSR and
ILS, and also produce problems in primary radars.
56
Antennae
Chapter 4
OTHER SYSTEMS
The instrument landing system (ILS) uses an extension of this idea to produce the narrow beams
of energy required to guide aircraft along the runway centreline. The localiser aerial array
which produces this is an array of 16 or 24 aerials placed in line with half wavelength spacing.
There is some modification to the way the signal is fed to the aerials but the end result is that
two narrow beams of energy are produced which are symmetrical, close to the centreline of the
runway:
Figure 4.7 ILS Localiser Polar Diagram
In the automatic
direction finder (ADF) a loop aerial is used.
a) LOOP
b) DIPOLE
NULL
NULL
Figure 4.8
Figure 4.2 Polar Diagrams of Loop and Dipole Aerials
Loop Aerial Figure-of-Eight Polar Diagram
When the loop is aligned with the incoming signal then there is a phase difference between the
signals in each of the vertical elements of the loop and there will be a net flow of current from
the loop. If the loop is placed at right angles to the incoming signal then the induced currents
will be equal and will cancel each other out giving a zero output.
57
Chapter 4
Antennae
The resulting polar diagram will have two distinct nulls which can be used to determine the
direction from which the radio wave is coming. How this principle is utilised will be discussed
in detail in Chapter 7.
RADAR AERIALS
Radar systems operate in the UHF and SHF bands where waveguides are used to carry the
radio energy, and the end of the waveguide is the aerial. Since radar systems are required to be
directional the aerial is placed at the focal point of a parabolic reflector and the energy is then
focussed into a narrow beam.
Figure
3.10.
Antennae
Figure 4.9
Horn
FeedRadar
to Parabolic
Reflector
In principle a very narrow pencil beam should be produced as shown above. However, this
does not happen because the focal point is infinitesimally small compared to the opening of the
waveguide, so the energy actually diverges slightly.
Figure 4.10
Polar Diagram of Parabolic Reflector
Figure 8.10 Typical Radiation Pattern

58
Antennae
Chapter 4
Additionally, this uneven reflection produces sidelobes which contain sufficient energy to give
valid returns outside the main beam.
The width of the lobe is dependent on the cross-section of the waveguide and the diameter of
the reflector. For a parabolic reflector, this relationship is:

70 x
Beamwidth = _______ where D is the diameter of the reflector.
D

It follows from this formula that to achieve a narrow beam requires either a very large reflector
or a very short wavelength, or both. These problems will be discussed further in Chapter 11.
Another type of radar aerial is the phased array or slotted antenna.
Figure 4.11
Phased Array or Slotted Antenna
This is a flat plate with numerous waveguide size slots cut into it. These slots are fed with the
radio energy which forms a narrow beam similar to a parabolic reflector.
Figure 8.9 Airborne Weather Radar

Antenna

Figure 4.12 Polar Diagram of Phased Array/Slotted Antenna
As can be seen from the diagram the beam is much narrower than that from a parabolic reflector,
and with much smaller sidelobes. This means the power requirements for phased arrays is less
Figure
8.9 Airborne
Weather
Radar
than that required for parabolic reflectors. Hence the
advantages
of a slotted
antenna
over the
Antenna
59
Chapter 4
Antennae
parabolic reflector are:
60
Narrow beam
Reduced sidelobes
Less power required for a given range
Narrower pulse
Improved resolution
Antennae
Chapter 4
QUESTIONS
1.
The ideal length for a Marconi aerial for a frequency of 406 MHz is:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
A disadvantage of directivity is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
reduced range
sidelobes
phase distortion
ambiguity
Which of the following is not an advantage of a slotted antenna (phase array)?

a.
b.
c.
d.
4.
36.9 cm
35.1 cm
17.5 cm
18.5 cm
reduced sidelobes
improved resolution
reduced power
directivity
The ideal length of a half wave dipole for a frequency of 75 MHz is:
a.
b.
c.
d.
1.9 m
95 cm
3.8 m
47.5 cm
61
Chapter 4
Antennae
ANSWERS
62
Doppler Radar
Chapter 5
CHAPTER FIVE
DOPPLER RADAR
Contents
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
DOPPLER PRINCIPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
AIRBORNE DOPPLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
JANUS ARRAY SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
QUESTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
ANSWERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
QUESTION PAPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
ANSWERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
63
Chapter 5
64
Doppler Radar
Doppler Radar
Chapter 5
INTRODUCTION
A Doppler Navigation System uses the Doppler principle to measure an aircrafts ground
speed and drift. The Doppler radar functions by continuous measurement of Doppler shift and
converting the measured values to groundspeed and drift angle. In early systems the aircrafts
departure point was loaded into a navigation computer, which then converted the aircrafts
heading and Doppler ground speed/drift inputs into a continuous display of aircraft position;
this was then displayed as latitude and longitude, and/ or as distance to go along track and
position left or right of track, in nautical miles.
A Doppler navigation system:
is completely self-contained and requires no ground based navigation aids.
is usable worldwide.
is most accurate overland.
is less accurate during flight over the sea because the surface winds, tides and currents
move the surface in random directions.
sometimes fails to measure a ground speed and drift during flight over a smooth, glassy
sea.
The latest improved Doppler Navigation Systems combine the inherent accuracy of Doppler
ground speed and drift measurement with information from Decca, Inertial Reference Units,
Loran C, Global Positioning Systems and VOR/DME, in various combinations to suit customer
requirements. These navigational inputs also help to eradicate the errors of the original Doppler
Navigation Systems, caused by inaccurate heading reference and degradation, or loss, of Doppler
ground speed and drift when flying over large expanses of water.
The Doppler principle is also utilized in other navigation systems, such as VOR and VDF, and
some radar equipments.
65
Chapter 5
Doppler Radar
DOPPLER PRINCIPLE
Whenever there is relative motion between a transmitter and receiver a frequency shift (change)
occurs which is proportional to the rate of relative motion. This change in frequency, fD, is
known as the Doppler shift, Doppler effect, or Doppler frequency.
In an airborne Doppler system (Figure 5.1.) the transmitter and receiver are screened from each
other, but share the same aerial. An array of beams are transmitted towards the earths surface
at a depression angle of between 60 and 70 and the receiver measures the frequency shift
in the reflected signal, which is caused by the aircrafts speed along track, ground speed, and
speed across track, (drift).
Figure 2.1.
5.1
Figure
To explain the Doppler principle a separate ground-based transmitter T and receiver R are
considered. (Figure 5.2)
66
Doppler Radar
Chapter 5
Figure 2.2.
Figure 5.2
The stationary transmitter T broadcasts at a carrier frequency of f Hz. The stationary receiver
R receives f waveforms each second at the constant speed of electro-magnetic waves, c m/s.
Thus the received frequency = c/, which is the transmitted frequency; hence no frequency shift
occurs.
Figure 5.3
Figure
2.3.
Figure 5.3 depicts R moving towards stationary T at V ms-1. The speed of the transmission
remains constant at c ms-1; but each transmitted wavelength arrives at moving R at a shorter
time interval. This is perceived as a wavelength reduction.
As c = f
then as appears to decrease f must increase.
This apparent increase in frequency is due solely to the relative motion between T and R.
The difference in transmitted frequency f and received frequency fR is known as the Doppler
Shift fD.
Therefore fD = fR - f
Because there is an apparent change in wave length the relationship can be expressed as:
fD =
Since = c , then fD =
f

Vxf
c
When R is moving away from T then the wavelengths take longer to reach T and they appear
to lengthen; this results in a perceived reduction in received frequency and hence a negative fD.
Figure 5.4 summarises the various transmitter and receiver combinations.
67
Chapter 5
Doppler Radar
= +fd
= +fd
= -fd
= -fd
Figure 5.4
Figure
2.4
68
Doppler Radar
Chapter 5
AIRBORNE DOPPLER
A typical slotted waveguide antenna consists of separate transmitting and receiving arrays
designed to produce one of the common aerial beam configurations (Figure 5.5). This technique
of using opposing beams is called a JANUS array after the Roman god of doorways; he was able
to face both ways simultaneously. A commonly adopted system is the four beam X array.
Each aerial of a particular array transmits at a depression angle, , of between 60 and 70.
(Figure 5.6) This is a compromise. If is too close to 90 the Doppler shift approaches zero; if
is too small the transmissions would strike the surface at a shallow angle, causing the signals
to reflect away from the aircraft, resulting in weak un-measurable Doppler shift returns at the
aircrafts receiver.
Using the four beam Janus array, zero drift and an aircraft traveling forwards: the received
frequency from the two front beams is shifted upwards and that from the two rear beams is
shifted downwards, equally, in proportion to the aircrafts ground speed.
If the aircraft is drifting then there will be a difference in the frequencies received from the
port and starboard beams; this information is electronically converted in modern fixed aerial
equipments to a continuous indication of drift. In earlier mechanical systems, with pitch
stabilized, rotating aerials, the difference in shifts was converted to an electrical signal which
actuated a motor. The motor then rotated the aerial until it was aligned with the aircrafts track;
at this instant the port and starboard shifts were equalized and the drift equaled the difference
between the aircrafts heading and the aerials track alignment.
The higher the Doppler system frequency the more sensitive and efficient it becomes at assessing
the frequency shifts to be converted to ground speed and drift, and the narrower the beam
widths (1 to 5) for a given aerial dimension. An excessive increase in the transmitted frequency
causes absorption and reflections from precipitation. Therefore, the compromise frequencies
allocated are 8,800MHz (8.8 GHz) or 13,300MHz (13.3. GHz), the SHF band.
Janus arrays also reduce errors caused by minor variations in the transmitted frequency; pitch,
roll and vertical speed changes and unlocking during flight over an uneven surface. When a
Doppler system unlocks it reverts to memory and ceases to compute ground speed and drift.
69
Chapter 5
Doppler Radar
Figure 5.5
Figure 2.5
70
Doppler Radar
Chapter 5
JANUS ARRAY SYSTEM

Figure 5.1 illustrates a typical aerial array for a modern 4- Beam Janus system transmitting at
a frequency of 13.325GHz. The depression angle to the center of each beam is 67; the depth
and width of each beam is 5.6 and 11. The quoted accuracy for this system is 0.3% of ground
speed and drift on 95% of occasions.
Figure
Figure 2.6.
5.6
71
Chapter 5
Doppler Radar
Figure 5.7 is the Control Display Unit (CDU) for the above aerial system. The STBY (Standby)
function is selected when the aircraft is close to structures and people. This safeguards the
equipment, prevents damaging the health of people in the radiation path and allows the
equipment to be energized for immediate use when the aircraft is clear.
The SEA indicator illuminates when the aircraft is flying over the sea or large expanses of water.
As stated previously the reflected returns from water are less than those from land due to
spillage of reflected energy from the front of the forward beams and the rear of the rearward
beams. This results in a smaller measured fd spectrum from the four beams, evidenced by a
reduction in the actual ground speed readout. Circuitry within the computer will compensate
for this ground speed reduction and increase the readout for the assessed ground speed loss.
Figure 5.7 Racal RNS 252 Navigation Computer Unit
Figure 2.7. The Racal RNS 252 Navigation Computer Unit.
72
Doppler Radar
Chapter 5
QUESTIONS
The following questions illustrate the Doppler principle:
1 .
A transmitter is moving directly towards a receiver at 250m/sec. The wavelength of the

transmission is 5cm. Calculate the frequency shift in kHz at the receiver.
2.
A receiver is moving directly towards a transmitter at 900kph. The transmission frequency is 6

GHz. Calculate the frequency shift in kHz caused by the relative motion between the transmitter
and receiver.
3.
A stationary transmitter is operating on a wavelength of 3cm. A receiver moving directly away

from the transmitter measures a Doppler shift of 6kHz. Calculate the speed of the receiver away
from the transmitter in m/sec and knots.
4.
An 8800MHz transmitter is moving directly away from a receiver at 291 kt. Calculate:
a.
b.
c.
5.
the speed of relative motion in m/sec

the frequency shift at the receiver in kHz
the frequency received in MHz
Complete the following Doppler shift table which relates to the relative motion between a
transmitter and a receiver:
Transmitted
Wavelength
(cm)
Frequency
Shift
(KHz)
Relative
Speed (ms -1)
Relative
Speed (kt)
300
3.41
450
2.26
314
23
2.3
3.41
7.0
73
Chapter 5
Doppler Radar
ANSWERS
1
5 kHz
5 kHz
180 ms-1, 350 kt
a. 150 ms-1
b. 4.4 kHz
c. 8799.9956 MHz
74
Transmitted
Wavelength
(cm)
Frequency
Shift (KHz)
Relative
Speed (ms -1)
Relative
Speed (kt)
15
300
583
3.41
6.79
231.4
450
2.26
7.15
161.7
314
23
2.3
529
1028
3.41
7.0
238.7
464
Doppler Radar
Chapter 5
QUESTION PAPER
1.
Doppler operates on the principle that ...... between a transmitter and receiver will cause the
received frequency to ...... if the transmitter and receiver are moving ..... .
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
An aeroplane is flying at 486 kt directly towards a beacon transmitting on a frequency of 12

GHz. The change in frequency observed will be:
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
the transmitter and receiver move towards each other

the transmitter moves away from the receiver
the transmitter moves towards the receiver
both transmitter and receiver move away from each other
When an aircraft is flying directly away from a transmitter, transmitting on a frequency of 15

GHz, a frequency shift of 6.0 kHz is measured. The speed of the aircraft is:
a.
b.
c.
d.
5.
10 MHz
6.25 Hz
10 kHz
6.25 kHz
Due to Doppler effect an apparent decrease in the transmitted frequency, which is proportional
to the transmitters velocity, will occur when:
a.
b.
c.
d.
4.
apparent motion, decrease, together

relative motion, decrease, apart
the distance, increase, at the same speed
relative motion, increase, apart
120 kt
222 ms-1
300 kt
222 kt
The change in frequency measured in an aircraft from a radio transmission reflected from the
ground is used to determine:
a.
b.
c.
d.
the drift and groundspeed of the aircraft

the aircrafts track and speed
the across track wind component and heading
track error and groundspeed
75
Chapter 5
Doppler Radar
ANSWERS
76
VHF Direction Finder

(VDF)
Chapter 6
CHAPTER SIX
VHF DIRECTION FINDER (VDF)
Contents
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
SERVICE PROVIDED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
USE OF SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
CLASSIFICATION OF BEARINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
RANGE OF VDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
FACTORS AFFECTING ACCURACY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
VHF EMERGENCY SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
VHF LET DOWN SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
VDF SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
QUESTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
ANSWERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
77

(VDF)
Chapter 6
QDM QDM QDM

OXFORD APPROACH
GOLF DELTA SIERRA
REQUEST QDM
GOLF DELTA SIERRA
QDM
205
GOLF DELTA
SIERRA QDM 205
CLASS BRAVO
025
VHF D/F TRACE

TOWARDS THE
DIRECTION OF
THE
TRANSMITTING
AIRCRAFT
ADCOCK
AERIAL
ATC CATHODE-RAY
VDF DISPLAY
Figure 3.1. Ground Equipment for VHF Direction Finding.
Figure 6.1 Ground Equipment for VHF Direction Finder
78

(VDF)
Chapter 6
INTRODUCTION
Most ground stations in the aeronautical mobile service are equipped to take automatic bearings
of an aircrafts VHF transmissions (118 - 137 Mhz, emission code A3E). The ground installation
comprises a suitable aerial and a CRT display as shown in Figure 3.1. The UHF band is used for
direction finding by the military only at present. Information on stations providing VHF DF is
found in Aerad and UK air pilot.
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The aerial is vertically polarised and has an array of vertical elements arranged in a circle. This
is known as an Adcock aerial (see figure 3.1). The equipment resolves the bearing from the
transmissions received at each aerial in the array. The bearing is then displayed on a cathode ray
tube (CRT). Hence the system is sometimes known as Cathode Ray DF (CRDF). The latest high
resolution equipments use Doppler principles to determine the bearing and the bearings may
be displayed as digital readouts with an accuracy of +/- 0.5 deg. (UHF or VHF).
SERVICE PROVIDED
QDM - Aircrafts Magnetic Heading to steer in zero wind to reach the station; used
mainly for station homing and letdowns.
QDR - Aircrafts Magnetic Bearing from the station; used for en-route navigation.
QTE - Aircrafts True Bearing from the station; used for en-route navigation.
QUJ - Aircrafts True Track to the station; not generally used.
When a pilot wishes to obtain bearing information he calls up on the appropriate VHF RT
channel:
QDM QDM QDM OXFORD APPROACH GBDOF Request QDM GBDOF
USE OF SERVICE
QTE or QDR:
To check true or magnetic tracking from a VDF station.

For en route position lines. Two stations will be required for a position fix.
QDM
To home to a VDF station.

For let down in cloud using published procedures.
ATC can use VDF as means of identifying aircraft in a radar environment.
79

(VDF)
Chapter 6
1 VDF measures the bearing of the

aircraft with reference to True or
Magnetic North at the station.
2 The Reciprocal of QDR = QDM
TRUE
NORTH
MAG
NORTH
3 The Reciprocal of QTE = QUJ

QDR
(110)
4 QDM and QTE are used most

commonly.
VDF
STATION
AIRCRAFT
TRANSMITS
(VHF)
Figure
3.2.
Figure 6.2
MAG
NORTH
TRUE
NORTH
QDR
QTE
VDF
STATION
Figure 6.3 The use of QTE/QDR for Checking Track
Figure 3.3. The use of QTE/QDR for Checking Track.
80
QDM
(290)

(VDF)
Chapter 6
CLASSIFICATION OF BEARINGS
The operator assesses the accuracy of the bearings and passes a classification to the pilot. e.g.
Your true bearing is 060 , class bravo.
VDF bearings are classified as follows:
Class A: accurate to within + 2
Class B: accurate to within + 5
Class C: accurate to within + 10
Class D: accurate to > 10
VDF bearing information will only be given when conditions are satisfactory. Normally no
better than class B bearing will be available.
RANGE OF VDF
As VDF utilises the VHF band (or UHF as required) the range will obey the line of sight
formula. Therefore the higher the transmitters the better the reception range.
Intervening high ground will limit range, especially for low flying aircraft in hilly
terrain.
The power of airborne and ground transmitters will limit ranges.
Gradients of temperature and humidity can give greater than line of sight ranges.
Synchronous transmissions by two or more aircraft will cause momentary errors in the
bearings.
FACTORS AFFECTING ACCURACY
Propagation error and site error caused by the aircrafts transmissions being reflected
from terrain as they travel to the site, or being reflected from buildings at the site.
Aircrafts attitude. The VDF system and VHF communications are vertically polarised.
Therefore, best reception and results will be obtained if the aircraft is flown straight
and level.
Poor accuracy in the overhead of a VDF receiver, particularly with the latest Doppler
systems.
The reception of both direct wave and ground reflected wave can cause signal fading
or loss; this phenomenon is usually short lived. Together with other multi-path signals
this give rise to bearing errors.
81

(VDF)
Chapter 6
VHF EMERGENCY SERVICE

In the UK 16 outstations provide auto-triangulation position-fixing service on the VHF
emergency frequency ( 121.5 Mhz ) and on the UHF emergency frequency (243.0 MHz) to pilots
who are:

in distress
in urgent need of assistance
experiencing difficulties (ie lost)
On VHF this service is available at 3,000 ft and above in the London FIR (2,000 ft and above
in the London area). Elsewhere the auto-triangulation service is not available, however the
D & D cell at SCATCC can manually plot bearings from outstations to fix an aircrafts position.
The UHF service is available on 243.0 MHz throughout the UK for the military.
VHF LET DOWN SERVICE

There are two types of VDF procedure, QDM and QGH. In the QDM the pilot calls for a series
of QDM and uses them to follow the published approach pattern, making his own adjustment
to heading and height.
In the QGH procedure the controller obtains bearings from the aircrafts transmissions,
interprets this information and passes to the pilot headings and heights to fly designed to keep
the aircraft in the published pattern. Normally at civil aerodromes only QDM procedure is
available; however, in some cases, for specific operational reasons, there will be provision for a
QGH procedure.
82

(VDF)
Chapter 6
Figure 6.4. VDF Let-Down Procedure
Figure 3.4. VDF Let-Down Procedure
83

(VDF)
Chapter 6
VDF SUMMARY
Bearings:

QDM - Mag TO station

QDR - Mag FROM station
QTE - True FROM station
Uses:
Check track, Position line, Homing, Let-downs
Class:
A=+2
Principle:
Ground equipment - Adcock aerial, CRT
Range:
Line of sight, Power of transmitters, Intervening high ground,

Atmospheric conditions (ducting)
Accuracy:
Propagation error, site error, Aircraft attitude, Overhead station,

Fading due to multi-path signals
Emergency service:
Position fixing by auto-triangulation
Let-down service:

QDM procedure - pilot interpreted

QGH procedure - controller interpreted
84
B=+5
C = + 10
D = >10

(VDF)
Chapter 6
QUESTIONS
1.
An aircraft has to communicate with a VHF station at a range of 300 nm, if the ground station is
situated 2,500 amsl which of the following is the lowest altitude at which contact is likely to be
made?
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Class B VHF DF bearings are accurate to within:

a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
115nm
400nm
143nm
63.5nm
An aircraft is passed a true bearing from a VDF station of 353. If variation is 8E and the
bearing is classified as B then the:
a.
b.
c.
d.
6.

2 degrees
5 degrees
7.5 degrees
10 degrees
An aircraft at altitude 9,000 feet wishes to communicate with a VHF/DF station that is situated
at 400 feet amsl. What is the maximum range at which contact is likely to be made ?
a.
b.
c.
d.
5.
+ - 1
+ - 5
+ - 2
+ - 10
A VDF QDM given without an accuracy classification may be assumed to be accurate to

within:
a.
b.
c.
d.
4.
190
1,378
36,100
84,100
QDM is 345 +- 5
QDR is 345 +- 2
QTE is 353 +- 5
QUJ is 353 +- 2
An aircraft at 19,000ft wishes to communicate with a VDF station at 1,400ft amsl.

What is the maximum range at which contact is likely ?

a.
175nm
b.
400.0nm
c.
62.5nm
d.
219nm
85

(VDF)
Chapter 6
ANSWERS
86
Automatic Direction Finder

(ADF)
Chapter 7
CHAPTER SEVEN
AUTOMATIC DIRECTION FINDER (ADF)
Contents
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
NON DIRECTIONAL BEACON ( NDB ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
CORRECT NULL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
FREQUENCIES AND TYPES OF NDB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
AIRCRAFT EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
EMISSION CHARACTERISTICS and BEAT FREQUENCY OSCILLATOR (BFO) . . . . 93
PRESENTATION OF INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
USES OF THE NON DIRECTIONAL BEACON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
PLOTTING ADF BEARINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
TRACK MAINTENANCE USING THE RBI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
INBOUND TRACKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
MAINTAINING AN INBOUND TRACK IN A CROSSWIND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
OUTBOUND TRACKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
DRIFT ASSESSMENT AND REGAINING INBOUND TRACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
DRIFT ASSESSMENT AND OUTBOUND TRACK MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . 99
HOLDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
RUNWAY INSTRUMENT APPROACH PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
FACTORS AFFECTING ADF ACCURACY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
FACTORS AFFECTING ADF RANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
ACCURACY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
ADF SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
QUESTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
ANSWERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
87
Chapter 7
88

(ADF)

(ADF)
Chapter 7
INTRODUCTION
Automatic Direction Finder ( ADF) equipment in the aircraft is used in conjunction with a
simple low and medium frequency non-directional beacon (NDB) on the ground to provide
an aid for navigation and for non-precision approaches to airfields. However, it was due to be
phased out in the 2005, but still continues in use. Indeed, many UK aerodromes still have NDB
instrument approach procedures, and it is the only instrument approach procedure available at
some aerodromes.
NON DIRECTIONAL BEACON ( NDB )

The Non Directional Beacon (NDB) is a ground based transmitter which transmits vertically
polarised radio signals, in all directions (hence the name), in the Low Frequency (LF) and
Medium Frequency (MF) bands.
When an aircrafts Automatic Direction Finding (ADF) is tuned to an NDBs frequency and its
callsign identified, the direction of the NDB will be indicated.
A cone of silence exists overhead the NDB transmitter during which the aircraft does not receive
any signals. The diameter of the cone increases with aircraft height.
The ADF measures the bearing of a NDB relative to the fore/aft axis of the aircraft.
If a loop aerial is placed in the plane of the transmitted radio frequency a voltage will be
generated in the vertical elements of the loop because of the phase difference of the wave in each
of the vertical elements. As the loop is rotated the voltage induced will decrease until it becomes
zero when the loop is perpendicular to the radio wave. As the loop continues to rotate a voltage
will be induced in the opposite sense etc.
Figure4.1
7.1 A
A Loop
Loop Aerial
Figure
Aerial.
89

(ADF)
Chapter 7
The polar diagram formed is a figure of eight as shown below (Figure 7.2). It can be seen that
there are two null positions and that by rotating the loop until a null is reached the direction of
the beacon can be determined. This is fine if the approximate direction of the beacon is known,
but if that is not the case then there are two possible choices. Furthermore, if equipment is to
automatically determine position, then with only the single loop it would have an insoluble
problem.
a) LOOP
b) DIPOLE
NULL
NULL
Figure
Loop and
andDipole
DipoleAerials
Aerials
Figure4.2
7.2Polar
PolarDiagrams
Diagrams of
of Loop
To resolve this ambiguity a simple dipole aerial, called a sense aerial, is added. The polar
diagram of the sense aerial is circular. The currents generated are combined electronically as if
the sense aerial was in the middle of the loop aerial (Figure 7.3). The relative signal strengths of
the two signals are shown.
Figure
Figure 4.3
7.3
90

(ADF)
Chapter 7
It is arranged for the field from the sense aerial to be in phase with the one element (left hand
shown in diagram) of the loop aerial (Figure 7.4). The resultant polar diagram is known as a
CARDIOID. The cardioid has a single null which as can be seen is ill-defined and would not in
itself provide an accurate bearing. However, the correct null in the loop aerial can be defined
by introducing a logic circuit which defines the correct null as being that null, in the loop aerial
which, when the loop aerial is rotated clockwise, produces an increase in signal strength in the
cardioid.
Figure
4.4
Figure 7.4
The resultant null with a single cardioid is not precise enough to meet the ICAO accuracy
requirement of +/-5. To improve the accuracy to meet the requirements, the polarity of the
sense aerial is reversed to produce a right hand cardioid. Then by rapidly switching (about 120
Hz) between the two cardioids, the null is more precisely defined and hence the accuracy is
improved.
CORRECT NULL
CORRECT
NULL
Figure
4.5
Figure 7.5
91

(ADF)
Chapter 7
In reality it is not feasible to have a rotating loop outside the aircraft, so the loop is fixed and has
four elements, two aligned with the fore-aft axis of the aircraft with the other two perpendicular
to the fore-aft axis. The electrical fields are transmitted to a similar four elements in a goniometer
reproducing the electro-magnetic field detected by the aerial. The signal from the sense aerial is
also fed to the goniometer where a search coil detects the unambiguous direction. The principle
employed within the goniometer is as described above.
Figure4.6
7.6 A
A Fixed
Fixed Loop
Figure
LoopADF
ADF
FREQUENCIES AND TYPES OF NDB

The allocated frequencies for NDB,s are 190 - 1,750 kHz in the LF and MF bands. Since the mode
of propagation used is surface wave, most NDBs will be found between about 250 and 450
kHz. There are two types of NDB in current use:
Locator (L). These are low powered NDBs used for airfield or runway approach procedures
or are co-located with, and supplement, the outer and middle markers of an ILS system. They
normally have ranges of 10 to 25nm and may only be available during an aerodromes published
hours of operation.
En route NDBs. These have a range of 50nm or more, and where serving oceanic areas may
have ranges of several hundred miles. They are used for homing, holding, en route and airways
navigation.
92

(ADF)
Chapter 7
AIRCRAFT EQUIPMENT
The aircraft equipment comprises:
A loop aerial
A sense aerial
A control unit
A receiver
A display
BFO
FRQ
FLT /
ET
SET
/RST
4
ADF
8
ANT
BFO
Figure4.7.
7.7 Two
Two ADF
ADF Receivers.
Receivers.
Figure
EMISSION CHARACTERISTICS and BEAT FREQUENCY OSCILLATOR (BFO)

The NDBs have a 2 or 3 letter identification and there are two types of emission:
N0NA1A
N0NA2A
The N0N part of the emission is the transmission of an unmodulated carrier wave, which would
not be detectable on a normal receiver, so a BFO is provided on ADF equipment. When selected,
the BFO produces an offset frequency within the receiver which when combined with the
received frequency produces a tone of say 400 or 1,020 Hz.
The A1A part is the emission of an interrupted unmodulated carrier wave which requires the
BFO to be on for aural reception. A2A is the emission of an amplitude modulated signal which
can be heard on a normal receiver.
Hence, when using N0NA1A beacons, the BFO should be selected ON for (manual) tuning,
identification and monitoring. N0NA2A beacons require the BFO ON for (manual) tuning but
OFF for identification and monitoring. (The BFO may be labelled TONE or TONE/VOICE on
some equipments).
93

(ADF)
Chapter 7
PRESENTATION OF INFORMATION
The information may be presented on a relative bearing indicator (RBI) or a radio magnetic
indicator (RMI). In either case the information being presented is relative bearing.
Figure7.8
4.8RBI
RBI
Figure
Figure4.9
7.9 RMI
RMI
Figure
The RBI has a standard compass rose where 360 is aligned with the fore aft axis of the aircraft,
although with some RBIs it is possible to manually set heading to directly read the magnetic
bearing. In the diagram the aircraft is heading 300(M), the RBI is showing a relative bearing
of 136, thus the magnetic bearing is 300+136-360=076. The information from the ADF to
the RMI is still relative, but the RMI compass card is fed with magnetic heading, so the bearing
shown is the magnetic bearing of the NDB.
The needle always points to the beacon (QDM) and the tail of the needle gives the QDR.
USES OF THE NON DIRECTIONAL BEACON
En-route navigational bearings.
Homing to or flying from the NDB when maintaining airway centre-lines.
Holding overhead at an assigned level in a race-track pattern.
Runway instrument approach procedures.
PLOTTING ADF BEARINGS

The plotting of ADF bearings is dealt with in depth in the Navigation General syllabus. At this
stage it is sufficient to remind the reader that the bearing is measured at the aircraft so variation
to convert to a true bearing must be applied at the aircraft. Account will also need to be taken
of the convergency between the aircraft and beacon meridians.
94

(ADF)
Chapter 7
TRACK MAINTENANCE USING THE RBI
An aircraft is required to maintain track(s):
When flying airway centre-line between NDBs.
When holding over an NDB or Locator.
When carrying out a let-down procedure at an airfield based solely upon

NDB(s)/Locator(s) or NDB(s)/Locators combined with other navaids.
When requested by ATC to intercept and maintain a track or airway centre-line.
INBOUND TRACKING
Figure 7.10 shows an aircraft maintaining a track of 077 in zero wind (zero drift). The aircraft is
heading 077 and has a relative bearing of 360.
Figure 4.10
7.10 Homing
Figure
Homing in
in Zero
ZeroDrift.
Drift.
Figure 7.11 shows an aircraft attempting to maintain an inbound track in a crosswind using the
incorrect technique. By not allowing for drift and persisting in maintaining a relative bearing of
360 a curved track is flown.
Figure 7.11 Homing Making No Allowance for Drift.
Figure 4.11. Homing Making No Allowance for Drift.
95

(ADF)
Chapter 7
MAINTAINING AN INBOUND TRACK IN A CROSSWIND

To maintain the required track to an NDB in crosswind conditions using the correct method it is
necessary to allow for the anticipated drift. In Figure 7.12, 20 Starboard drift is anticipated, so
20 is Subtracted from track. The aircraft is heading 060 with a relative bearing of 020.
Figure 7.12
Figure 4.12.
In Figure 7.13, 28 Port drift is anticipated, so this is added (Plus) to the track value. The aircraft
is heading 108 with a relative bearing of 332.
Figure 4.13.
7.13
Figure
96

(ADF)
Chapter 7
OUTBOUND TRACKING
Figure 7.14 shows an aircraft maintaining the required track outbound from an NDB in zero
wind (zero drift) conditions. The aircraft is heading 260 and has a relative bearing of 180.
Figure 7.14
Figure 4.14.
Figure 7.15 shows an aircraft maintaining a track of 100 in crosswind conditions where the drift
is known. 23 of Starboard drift is anticipated, this is Subtracted from the track, therefore the
heading is 077 with a relative bearing of 203 from the NDB.
Figure
Figure 4.15
7.15
In Figure 7.16 20 Port drift is anticipated, this is added (Plus) to track giving an aircraft heading
of 110 with a relative bearing of 160.
Figure 7.16
Figure 4.16
97

(ADF)
Chapter 7
DRIFT ASSESSMENT AND REGAINING INBOUND TRACK
Figure
7.17Assessing
Assessing Drift
Figure
4.17
Drift Inbound
Inbound.
Initially, fly the aircraft on the required track with the beacon dead ahead (000rel.).
Maintain the aircraft heading and watch the relative bearing indicator. If the relative bearing
increases the aircraft is experiencing port drift.
Alter heading, say 30 starboard, to regain track. The relative bearing will become 330 when
track is regained.
Assume a likely drift (say10 port) and calculate a new heading to maintain track. When this
heading has been taken up, the relative bearing will become 350.
If the drift has been correctly assessed this relative bearing will be maintained until overhead the
NDB. If the relative bearing changes however, further heading alterations and a new assessment
of drift will be necessary.
98

(ADF)
Chapter 7
DRIFT ASSESSMENT AND OUTBOUND TRACK MAINTENANCE
Figure4.18
7.18 Drift
DriftAssessment
Assessment Outbound
Figure
Outbound.
In Figure 7.18 it can be seen that with zero drift the RBI indicates 180 relative. With 10 starboard
drift, the relative bearing increases to 190, and with 10 port drift the relative bearing decreases
to 170.To assess drift by this means the aircraft must maintain a steady heading from directly
overhead the beacon.
When the drift has been assessed, alter heading Port or Starboard, by say 30, to regain track,
until the correct relative bearing of 210 or 150 is obtained. The aircraft is now back on track.
The heading must now be altered to take into account the original assessment of drift.
Figure 7.19 Determining Drift and Maintaining Track away from an NDB
Figure
4.19 Determining Drift and Maintaining Track away from an NDB.
99

(ADF)
Chapter 7
HOLDING
THE HOLDING SYSTEM When density of traffic or bad weather delay an aircrafts landing at
an airport, the air traffic controller directs it to a Holding Area. The area, also known as stack,
is organised over a radio beacon where each waiting aircraft flies a special circuit separated
vertically from other aircraft by a minimum of 1,000ft. An aircraft drops to the next level as soon
as it is free of other traffic, until it finally flies from the stack and comes in to land.
FL 90
THE HOLDING SYSTEM
When density of traffic or bad weather

delay an aircrafts landing at an airport,
the air traffic controller directs it to a
Holding Area. The area, also known as
stack, is organised over a radio beacon
where each waiting aircraft flies a special
circuit separated vertically from other
aircraft by a minimum of 1,000ft.
An aircraft drops to the next level
as soon as it is free of other traffic,
until it finally flies from the stack
and comes in to land.
FL 70
FL 50
FL 30
NDB
Figure4.20
7.20 The
The Holding
Holding System.
System
Figure
100

(ADF)
Chapter 7
RUNWAY INSTRUMENT APPROACH PROCEDURES

Most aerodromes have NDB runway instrument approach procedures. The pilot flies the
published procedure in order to position the aircraft in poor weather conditions for a visual
landing. The NDB may also be used in conjunction with other runway approach aids for the
same purpose.
UK AIP
AD 2-EGTK-8-4 (5 Jul 07)
INSTRUMENT APPROACH CHART - ICAO

180
23
22
270
23
360
090
23
MSA 25NM NDB(L) OX
OXFORD/KIDLINGTON
NDB(L)/DME
270
RWY 19
APP
125.325
OXFORD APPROACH
AD ELEVATION
TWR
133.425
OXFORD TOWER
THR ELEVATION
121.950
OXFORD GROUND
OBSTACLE ELEVATION
RAD
124.275
ATIS
136.225
BRIZE RADAR
(ACFT CAT A,B,C)
(926) (ABOVE THR)
TRANSITION ALTITUDE
BEARINGS ARE MAGNETIC
OXFORD ATIS
3000
001 00W
5200N
194
R1
N
HO 51
001 30W
258
1184 AMSL
5200N
CROUGHTON
6400
SFC
VAR 2.6W - 2007
810
QDM 189
2200
NDB(L) OX
HON D25
637
(379)
D6.5
D6.5
550
TC
I-OXF 108.35D
820
(Ch 20Y)
Procedure not available

without DME I-OXF
001 CAT A,B
354 CA
MAX IAS FOR

PROCEDURE
IS 185KT
D129
FL120
SFC
D2
515014N 0011918W
276'
479
461
(221)
(203)
D0.5
159
641
0
55
N
Annual Rate
of Change 0.14E
D4.7
ioxf
5600N
490
646
55
1M
(232)
LHA 2300
IN
3500
R D SFC
N CT
RTO
O
N
E
BRIZ
616
996
(738)
D4
(368)
514957N 0011924W
169
339
IAF
OX 367.5
ox
539
BRIZE
NORTON
561
561
(303)
55
FAIRFORD
119.000
BENSON
120.900
10NM
1184
001 30W
001 00W
837
(926)
RECOMMENDED PROFILE Gradient 5.2%, 320FT/NM

DME I-OXF
ALT(HGT)
1580(1322)
1260(1002)
940(682)
IAF
NDB(L) OX
3500
All aircraft should not descend

below the recommended profile
due to noise abatement
CA
TA
MAPT I-OXF DME 0.5

Climb straight ahead to NDB(L) OX,
on passing NDB(L) OX continue climb
on QDR 169. At I-OXF DME 4 turn
left to NDB(L) OX climbing as necessary
to hold at 2500, or as directed.
,B 0
CA
TC
169
01
354
690(432)
194
1800(1542)
19
2%
(5.
740(482)
DME I-OXF zero ranged to THR RWY 19
Procedure
690(432)
690(432)
690(432)
VM(C)OCA Total Area

(OCH AAL)
800(530)
800(530)
1100(830)
Aircraft Category
OCA
(OCH)
0 D0.5
D2
Rate of
descent
D4.7
D6.5
G/S KT
160
140
120
100
80
FT/MIN
850
750
640
530
430
DIRECT ARRIVAL VIA VOR HON R151

Intercept and follow VOR HON R151 not below MSA. At lead NDB(L) OX QDM 189 (HON DME 25) turn right to establish on extended FAT
(NDB(L) OX QDM 194). When established descend to cross FAF (I-OXF DME 4.7) at 1800(1542), then continue as for main procedure.
NOTE
Aircraft will normally be required to hold not lower than 3500 or equivalent FL.
WARNING
Use of this procedure is subject to ATC Oxford/Kidlington ensuring that Danger Area EG D129 is inactive above 2500.
CHANGE: DME RANGES. PROFILE. RATE OF DESCENT.

AERO INFO DATE 1 MAY 07
AMDT AIRAC 7/07
Civil Aviation Authority
Figure 7.21 Example of an NDB Instrument Approach
101

(ADF)
Chapter 7
FACTORS AFFECTING ADF ACCURACY

Designated Operational Coverage (DOC). The DOC of NDBs is based upon a daytime
protection ratio (signal/noise ratio of 3:1) between wanted and unwanted signals that permits
the required level of bearing accuracy. At ranges greater than those promulgated, bearing errors
will increase. Adverse propagation conditions particularly at night will also increase bearing
errors.
Static Interference. There are two types of static interference that can affect the performance
of ADF:
Precipitation static. Precipitation static is generated by the collision of water droplets and ice
crystals with the aircraft. It causes a reduction in the signal:noise ratio which affects the accuracy
of the bearings and can, in extreme circumstances completely mask the incoming signal. The
indications on the RMI/RBI will be a wandering needle and the audio will have a background
hiss, which is also likely to be present on VHF frequencies.
Thunderstorms. Thunderstorms have very powerful discharges of static electricity across the
electromagnetic spectrum including LF and MF. These discharges cause bearing errors in the
ADF. A static discharge in a cumulonimbus cloud (Cb) will be heard as a loud crackle on the
audio and the needle will move rapidly to point to the Cb. When there are several active cells
close together, it is possible for the needle to point to them for prolonged periods. Care must be
taken in the use of ADF when Cb activity is forecast. It has been said that during Cb activity the
only sensible use of the ADF is to indicate where the active cells are.
Night Effect. By day the D-region absorbs signals in the LF and MF bands. At night the D-region
disappears allowing skywave contamination of the surface wave being used. This arises for two
reasons: phase interference of the skywave with the surface wave because of the different paths
and the induction of currents in the horizontal elements of the loop aerial. The effect is reduced
by the aerial design having very short vertical elements and by screening the aerial above and
below, but the contamination is not eliminated. The effect first becomes significant at 70 - 100nm
from the NDB. The effect is manifest by fading of the audio signal and the needle hunting and
is worst around dawn and dusk, when the ionosphere is in transition.
To minimise the above effects:
Positively identify the NDB callsign.
Continue to check the tuning and the identification.
Avoid use of the equipment within 1 hour of sunrise or sunset.
Use NDBs within their promulgated range which is valid during daytime only.
Treat bearings with caution if the needle wanders and the signal fades.
Cross check NDB bearing information against other navigation aids.
102

(ADF)
Chapter 7
Station Interference. Due to congestion of stations in the LF and MF bands, the possibility of
interference from stations on or near the same frequency exists. This will cause bearing errors.
By day, the use of an NDB within the DOC will normally afford protection from interference.
However, at night, one can expect interference even within the DOC because of skywave
contamination from stations out of range by day. Therefore positive identification of the NDB
at night should always be carried out.
Mountain Effect. Mountainous areas can cause reflections and diffraction of the transmitted
radio waves to produce errors in ADF systems. These errors will increase at low altitude and
can be minimised by flying higher.
Coastal Refraction. Radio waves speed up over water due to the reduced absorption of energy
(attenuation) compared to that which occurs over land. This speeding up causes the wave front
to bend (Refract) away from its normal path and pull it towards the coast. Refraction is negligible
at 90 to the coast but increases as the angle of incidence increases.
For an aircraft flying over the sea the error puts the aircraft position closer to the coast than its
actual position.
The effect can be minimised by:
Using NDBs on or near to the coast.
Flying higher.
Using signals that cross the coast at or near to 90
Quadrantal Error. The theoretical reception polar diagram of the loop aerial is distorted by the
airframe which produces a strong electrical field aligned fore and aft. Incoming NDB signals are
thus refracted towards the fore and aft airframe axis. The maximum refraction occurs in the
quadrants (ie on relative bearings of 045, 135, 225 & 315. Older ADF systems are regularly
swung to assess the value of quadrantal error. In modern aircraft the error is determined by the
manufacturer and corrections are put into the equipment to reduce the effect to a minimum.
Angle of Bank (dip). A loop aerial is designed to use vertically polarised waves for direction
finding. If the incoming wave has any horizontal component of polarisation it will induce
currents in the top and bottom horizontal members of the loop resulting in a circulating current.
This would destroy the nulls of polar diagram ( similar to night effect ) and reduce the accuracy
of the bearings. The angle of bank during a turn causes emfs to be induced in the horizontal
elements of the loop thereby leading to a bearing error which is referred to as dip error. This
error is only present when the aircraft is not in level flight.
Lack of Failure Warning System. False indications due to a failure in the system are not readily
detectable because of the absence of failure warning on most ADF instruments. Particular
care should therefore be exercised in identifying and monitoring the NDB and independent
cross checks made with other navigational aids where possible. It is essential that when using
the ADF as the primary navigation aid, for example for a runway approach procedure, that it is
continuously monitored to detect any failure.
103

(ADF)
Chapter 7
FACTORS AFFECTING ADF RANGE

The major factors which affect the range of NDB/ADF equipment are listed below:
NDB transmission power; the range is proportional to the square of the power output i.e. to
double the NDB range, quadruple the power output of the transmitter.
NDB range is greater over water:

3 x P (W)
over water
2 x P (W)
over land
Note: using ranges calculated by these formulae does not guarantee that the aircraft will be within the
DOC.
The lower the frequency, the greater the surface wave (greater diffraction, lower
attenuation).
All precipitation, including falling snow, reduces the effective range and accuracy of ADF
bearings.
Non A1A NDBs have greater ranges than non A2A. But note that ICAO Annex 10 recommends
the use of N0NA2A for long range beacons.
Receiver quality.
ACCURACY
The accuracy of ADF is +/-5 within the designated operational coverage, by day only. This
refers to the measured bearing and does not include any compass error.
104

(ADF)
Chapter 7
ADF SUMMARY
NDB
Ground transmitter in LF or MF band ( 190 - 1750 kHz )

Types of NDB: Locator (L)

En Route
- airfield let-down (10 - 25 nm)

- Nav-aid (50 nm or more)
3 x P (W)
over water
2 x P (W)
over land
Range (nm)

ADF
Airborne equipment - aerials, receiver, control unit, indicator (RBI / RMI)
Principle of operation (Relative) Bearing by switched cardioids

Frequencies
190 - 1750 kHz (LF & MF)
Emission characteristics

N0NA1A - BFO ON for tuning, identification and monitoring

N0NA2A - BFO ON for tuning, OFF otherwise
Presentation
RBI or RMI
Uses of NDB
Homing, Holding, Approach, En route nav-aid
Errors

Static interference (precipitation and thunderstorms)

Station interference
Night effect
Mountain effect
Coastal refraction
Quadrantal error
Bank angle (dip)
Lack of failure warning
Accuracy
(Day Only)
+/- 5 within the DOC
105
Chapter 7
106

(ADF)

(ADF)
Chapter 7
QUESTIONS
1.
The phenomenon of coastal refraction which affects the accuracy of ADF bearings:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
An aircraft is intending to track from NDB A to NDB B on a track of 050 (T), heading 060 (T).
If the RBI shows the relative bearing of A to be 180 and the relative bearing of B to be 330
then the aircraft is:
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
c.
d.
3
5
6
10
In order to Tune, Identify and Monitor NON A1A NDB emissions the BFO should be used as
follows:

a.
b.
c.
d.
6.
static build up on the airframe and St. Elmos Fire.

the aircrafts major electrical axis, the fuselage, reflecting and re-radiating the incoming
NDB transmissions.
station interference and/or night effect.
NDB signals speeding up and bending as they cross from a land to water propagation
path.
The overall accuracy of ADF bearings by day within the Promulgated Range (DOC) is:
a.
b.
c.
d.
5.
Port of track and nearer A.

Port of track and nearer B.
Starboard of track and nearer A
Starboard of track and nearer B.
ADF Quadrantal Error is caused by:

a.
b.
4.
is most marked at night.

can be minimised by using beacons situated well inland.
can be minimised by taking bearings where the signal crosses the coastline at right
angles.
is most marked one hour before to one hour after sunrise and sunset.
Tune
On
On
On
Off
Identify
On
On
Off
Off
Monitor
Off
On
Off
Off
The magnitude of the error in position lines derived from ADF bearings that are affected by
coastal refraction may be reduced by:
a.
b.
c.
d.
selecting beacons situated well inland.

only using beacons within the designated operational coverage.
choosing NON A2A beacons.
choosing beacons on or near the coast.
107

(ADF)
Chapter 7
7.
8.
An aircraft is tracking away from an NDB on a track of 023(T). If the drift is 8 port and
variation 10 west, which of the RMIs illustrated below shows the correct indications?
The BFO facility on ADF equipment should be used as follows when an NDB having NON A1A
type emission is to be used:
a.
b.
c.
d.
9.
BFO on for tuning and identification but may be turned off for monitoring.
BFO on for tuning but can be turned off for monitoring and identification purpose.
BFO off during tuning, identification and monitoring because this type of emission is
not modulated.
BFO should be switched on for tuning, ident and monitoring.
The Protection Ratio of 3:1 that is provided within the Promulgated range/Designated
Operational Coverage of an NDB by day cannot be guaranteed at night because of:
a.
b.
c.
d.
108
Long range skywave interference from other transmitters.

Skywave signals from the NDB to which you are tuned.
The increased skip distance that occurs at night.
The possibility of sporadic E returns occurring at night.

(ADF)
10.
Chapter 7
An aircraft has an RMI with two needles. Assume that:

i)
ii)
The aircraft is outbound from NDB Y on a track of 126(M) drift is 140 Port.
A position report is required when crossing a QDR of 022 from NDB Z.
Which of the diagrams below represents the RMI at the time of crossing the reporting point?
11.
Each NDB has a range promulgated in the COMM section of the Air Pilot. Within this range
interference from other NDBs should not cause bearing errors in excess of:
a.
b.
c.
d.
day
night
day
night
5
10
6
5
109

(ADF)
Chapter 7
12.
The range promulgated in the Air Pilot and flight guides for all NDBs in the UK is the range:
a.
b.
c.
d.
13.
In order to resolve the 180 directional ambiguity of a directional LOOP aerial its polar diagram
is combined with that of a SENSE aerial ................................ to produce a............... whose single
null ensures the ADF needle moves the shortest distance to indicate the correct................
a
b.
c.
d.
14.
towards
towards
away from
away from
during long winter nights.

when the aircraft is at low altitude.
when the aircraft is at high altitude.
at dusk and dawn.
When the induced signals from the loop and the sense antenna are combined in an ADF receiver,
the resultant polar diagram is:
a.
b.
c.
d.
18.
accelerating
decelerating
accelerating
decelerating
In an ADF system, night effect is most pronounced:

a.
b.
c.
d.
17.
by day only.
by night only.
both day and night.
at dawn and dusk.
The phenomena of coastal refraction affecting ADF bearings is caused by the signal _______
when it reaches the coastline and bending _______ the normal to the coast:
a.
b.
c.
d.
16.
at the aircraft, cardioid, radial.

at the transmitter, limacon, bearing.
at the aircraft, limacon, bearing.
at the aircraft, cardioid, bearing.
The protection ratio afforded to NDBs in the UK within the Promulgated range(DOC) applies:
a.
b.
c.
d.
15.
Within which a protection ratio of 3:1 is guaranteed by day and night.

Up to which bearings can be obtained on 95% of occasions.
Within which bearings obtained by day should be accurate to within 5.
Within which protection from skywave protection is guaranteed.
a limacon
a cardioid
figure of eight shaped
circular
When flying over the sea and using an inland NDB to fix position with a series of position lines,
the plotted position in relation to the aircrafts actual position will be:
a.
b.
c.
d.
110
further from the coast.

closer to the coast.
co-incident.
inaccurate due to the transmitted wave front decelerating.

(ADF)
19.
An aircraft on a heading of 235(M) shows an RMI reading of 090 with respect to an NDB. Any
quadrantal error which is affecting the accuracy of this bearing is likely to be:
a.
b.
c.
d.
20.
a maximum value.
a very small value.
zero, since quadrantal error affects only the RBI.
zero, since quadrantal error affects only the VOR.
The principal propagation path employed in an NDB/ADF system is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
21.
Chapter 7
skywave
surface wave
direct wave
ducted wave
The ADF of an aircraft on a heading of 189(T) will experience the greatest effect due to
Quadrantal Error if the NDB bears:
a.
b.
c.
d.
234(T)
279(T)
225(T)
145(T)
111

(ADF)
Chapter 7
ANSWERS
112
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
VHF Omni-Directional Range

(VOR)
Chapter 8
CHAPTER EIGHT
VHF OMNI-DIRECTIONAL RANGE (VOR)
Contents
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
THE PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
TERMINOLOGY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
TRANSMISSION DETAILS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
MONITORING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
TYPES OF VOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
THE FACTORS AFFECTING OPERATIONAL RANGE OF VOR . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
DESIGNATED OPERATIONAL COVERAGE - (DOC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
FACTORS AFFECTING VOR BEACON ACCURACY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
THE CONE OF AMBIGUITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
DOPPLER VOR (DVOR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
VOR AIRBORNE EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
VOR / ILS DEVIATION INDICATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
RADIO MAGNETIC INDICATOR (RMI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
IN-FLIGHT PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
VOR SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
QUESTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
ANSWERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
113
Chapter 8

(VOR)
Figure 5.1. A Combined VOR / DME.

Figure 8.1 A Combined VOR / DME
114

(VOR)
Chapter 8
INTRODUCTION
The VHF Omni-directional Range (VOR) was adopted as the standard short range navigation
aid in 1960 by ICAO. It produces 360 radials/tracks at 1 spacing which are aligned in relation
to magnetic north at the VOR location. It is practically free from static interference and is not
affected by sky-waves, which enables it to be used day and night. When the VOR frequency
is paired with a co-located Distance Measuring Equipment (DME) an instantaneous range and
bearing (Rho-Theta) fix is obtained. The equipment operates within the frequency range of
108 - 117.95MHz.
VOR has the following uses:
Marking the beginning, the end and centre-line of airways or sections of airways.
As a let-down aid at airfields using published procedures.
As a holding point for aircraft.
As a source of en-route navigational position lines.
OMNI-DIRECTIONAL
SIGNAL
Figure 8.2 A VOR Polar Diagram
Figure 5.2. A VOR Polar Diagram.
THE PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

VOR bearing is obtained by phase comparison:
An aircraft's VOR receiver measures the phase difference (angular difference) between
two signals from the VOR transmitter:
a 30Hz frequency modulated omni-directional, reference signal which

produces constant phase regardless of a receiver's bearing from the VOR, and
a 30Hz amplitude modulated variable phase (directional) signal created by the

rotating transmission pattern (limaon).
The 30Hz FM reference signal is synchronised with the 30 revs/sec rotating directional
AM signal (limaon) such that:
the two 30Hz modulations are in phase to an aircraft's VOR receiver when it is
due magnetic north of the VOR beacon, and
the phase difference measured at any other point will equate to the aircraft's
magnetic bearing from the VOR.
115

(VOR)
Chapter 8
The two 30 Hz signals are modulated differently to prevent inter-action and merging at the
aircrafts receiver. The rotating limaon polar diagram, which provides the directional
information, is created by combining the polar diagrams of the rotating loop and reference
signal. In early VORs the loop rotation was mechanical; modern VORs use electronic circuitry.
Phase Difference 000
N
W
+ -
Figure 8.3 Phase Differences Corresponding to the Cardinal Points
Figure 5.3. Phase Differences Corresponding to the Cardinal Points.

Figure 8.3. shows one revolution of a limaon with phase differences corresponding to four
cardinal points. The blue sine wave is the reference signal. Hence, for example:
A phase diff. of 227 measured at the aircraft = 227 Radial.
A phase diff. of 314 measured at the aircraft = 314 Radial.
Thus a VOR beacon transmits 360 radials continuously. The bearing information is supplied
even during the identification period.
116

(VOR)
Chapter 8
TERMINOLOGY
A Radial (QDR) is a magnetic bearing FROM a VOR beacon.
Figure 5.4. A Radial is a Magnetic Bearing FROM the VOR (i.e. QDR)
Figure 8.4 A Radial is a Magnetic Bearing FROM the VOR (i.e. QDR)
117

(VOR)
Chapter 8
TO
TRANSFER
POINT
0 70
FROM
0 70
114.05
Lydd
LYD 114.05
117.00
VOR 2
MID POINT
Seaford
SFD 117.0
VOR 1
Figure
8.5 Tracking
Tracking Between
Between Two
Figure
5.5.
TwoVORs
VORs.
VOR
Figure 8.6 RMI Usage

Figure
5.6. RMI Usage.
118

(VOR)
Chapter 8
TRANSMISSION DETAILS
VOR beacons operate within the VHF band (30-300MHz) between 108.0 - 117.95 MHz as
follows:
40 channels, 108-112MHz:
This is primarily an ILS band but ICAO has allowed it to be shared with short range
VORs and Terminal VORs (TVOR): 108.0, 108.05, 108.20, 108.25, 108.40, 108.45 ..
111.85 MHz
(VOR frequencies are given even decimal digits)
120 channels, 112 - 117.95:
The emission characteristics are A9W:

A = main carrier amplitude modulated double side-band.
9 = composite system.
W = combination of telemetry, (telephony) and telegraphy.
IDENTIFICATION
UK VORs use 3 letter aural morse sent at approximately 7 groups/minute, at least every 10
seconds. The ident may also be in voice form e.g. This is Miami Omni etc immediately
followed by the morse ident. The voice channel is used to pass airfield information via ATIS.
This information uses AM (amplitude modulation) and is transmitted at the same time as the
bearing information. A continuous tone or a series of dots identifies a TEST VOR (VOT).
MONITORING
All VOR beacons are monitored by an automatic site monitor. The monitor will warn the control
point and remove either the identification and the navigational signals or switch off the beacon
in the event of the following:
Bearing information change exceeding 1.
A reduction of >15% in signal strength, of both or either of the 30Hz modulations, or of

the RF carrier frequency.
A failure of the monitor.
When the main transmitter is switched off the standby transmitter is brought on-line and takes
time to stabilise. During this period the bearing information can be incorrect and no identification
is transmitted until the changeover is completed.
Hence, do not use the facility when no identification is heard. It is vital to monitor a terminal
VOR let down into an airfield. If a VOR is transmitting the identification TST it indicates that
the VOR is on test and the bearing information should not be used.
119

(VOR)
Chapter 8
TYPES OF VOR
BVOR
A broadcast VOR which gives weather and airfield information between beacon
identification.
DVOR
A Doppler VOR - this overcomes siting errors.
TVOR
Terminal VOR which has only low power; and is used at major airfields.
VOT
This is found at certain airfields and broadcasts a fixed omni-directional

signal for a 360 test radial. This is not for navigation use but is used to test an
aircrafts equipment accuracy before IFR flight. More than +/-4 indicates that
equipment needs servicing.
VORTAC
Co-located VOR and TACAN (DME) beacons.
DBVORTAC
Combination
THE FACTORS AFFECTING OPERATIONAL RANGE OF VOR

The higher the transmitter power, the greater the range. Thus en-route VORs with a 200 Watt
transmitter will have about a 200nm range, and a TVOR will normally transmit at 50 Watts. The
transmitter and receiver height will also have an effect on the operational range of VOR as the
transmissions give line of sight ranges, plus a slight increase due to atmospheric refraction. This
can be assessed by using the formula:
Maximum theoretical reception range (nm) = 1.25 x (H1 + H2)

where: H1 =Receiver height in feet amsl, and

H2 = Transmitter height in feet amsl.
Nature of terrain. Uneven terrain, intervening high ground, mountains, man-made structures
etc., cause VOR bearings to be stopped (screened), reflected, or bent (scalloping), all of which
give rise to bearing errors.
Where such bearing errors are known, AIPS will publish details: e.g. Errors up to 5 may be
experienced in sector 315 - 345 to 40 nm.
DESIGNATED OPERATIONAL COVERAGE - (DOC)

To guarantee no co-frequency interference between the 160 frequencies available worldwide, it
would be necessary to separate co-frequency beacons by at least twice their anticipated line of
sight range. E.g. an aircraft at a height of 25,000 and the VOR situated at MSL.
Reception range (nm)

Separation
= 1.25 x 25,000
= 198 nm
= 396 nm
Transmitter power, propagation paths and the degree of co-frequency interference protection
required, necessitate co-frequency beacons to be separated for planning purposes by an extra
100nm to about 500nm. In practice, a beacon is protected as far as is deemed necessary and this
is not always the anticipated line of sight reception range.
120

(VOR)
Chapter 8
In the UK this protection is denoted by a DOC, specified as a range and altitude. e.g a DOC
of 50/25 published in AIPs means that an aircraft should not experience co-frequency
interference within 50nms of a VOR beacon, up to a height of 25,000. The DOC may also vary
by sectors and it is valid day and night. Use of a VOR outside its DOC can lead to navigation
errors. Refer to the latest AIC.
Figure
8.7 Designated
Designated Operational
Figure
5.7.
OperationalCoverage
Coverage.
VOR 1: DOC 50/25 = No interference within 50 NMS range up to 25,000.
VOR 2: DOC 100/50 = No interference within 100 NMS range up to 50,000.
FACTORS AFFECTING VOR BEACON ACCURACY

Site error is caused by uneven terrain such as hills and man-made structures, trees and even
long grass, in the vicinity of the transmitter. The error to radiated bearings is termed VOR
course-displacement error. Ground VOR beacon site error is monitored to 1 accuracy.
Propagation error is caused by the fact that, having left the VOR site with 1 accuracy, the
transmissions are further affected by terrain and distance. At considerable range from the
VOR,
bends or Scalloping can occur. VOR scalloping is defined as an imperfection or deviation in
the received VOR signal. It causes radials to deviate from their standard track and is the result
of reflections from buildings or terrain; it causes the Course Deviation Indicator to slowly or
rapidly shift from side to side.
Airborne equipment errors are caused by aircraft equipment assessing and converting the phase
differences to 1 of bearing ; maximum aircraft equipment error should be + 3.
The above errors are aggregate errors to give a total error of + 5. In addition there is Pilotage
error due to the fact that as an aircraft approaches the VOR the 1 radials get closer together.
121

(VOR)
Chapter 8
THE CONE OF AMBIGUITY

As the VOR is approached, the radials converge and the VOR needle becomes more sensitive.
Near the VOR overhead the needle oscillates rapidly and the OFF flag may appear momentarily;
also the TO/FROM display alternates. This is all caused by the cone where there is no planned
radiation. This is known as the cone of ambiguity or confusion. Once the aircraft has flown
through this cone the readings at the aircraft will stabilise.
Coverage. The VOR shall provide signals to permit satisfactory operation of a typical aircraft
installation at the levels and distances required for operational reasons, and up to a minimum
elevation angle of 40. In practice, modern VOR beacons are capable of providing usable
signals within 60 to 80 above the horizon.
FROM
0 70
Figure
8.8 The
The Cone
Cone of
Figure
5.8.
ofConfusion
Confusion.
DOPPLER VOR (DVOR)

Doppler VORs are second generation VORs. Although their transmission frequencies are the
same, the transmitted bearing accuracy is improved as the transmissions are less sensitive to
site error.
The transmission differences are:
The reference signal is AM.
The variable phase directional signal is FM.
To maintain the phase relationships which exist in conventional VOR transmissions, the
(apparent or simulated) rotation of the directional signal is anti-clockwise. As a result
the same airborne VOR equipment can be used with either CVOR or DVOR beacons.
122

(VOR)
Chapter 8
VOR AIRBORNE EQUIPMENT

There are 3 main components of the VOR equipment in the aircraft, namely:
The aerial. For slower aircraft the aerial is a whip type fitted on the fuselage and for
high speed aircraft it is a blade type or is flush mounted on either side of the vertical
fin.
The receiver. This is a box fitted in the avionics bay.
The indicator. Information derived from the VOR signal received at the aircraft may be
fed to a flight director system or to the more simple displays such as the CDI (course
deviation indicator) or the RMI (radio magnetic indicator). These are described below.
VOR / ILS DEVIATION INDICATOR

As the name implies, this instrument displays VOR or ILS information, and is widely used in
light aircraft. It may be known as a VOR/LOC indicator, particularly if it is a simplified version
having a localiser needle but no glide path needle for use with ILS. The display is also known as
the omni bearing indicator (OBI). In the VOR role, the instrument indicates the displacement of
the aircraft with respect to a bearing (to or from the VOR station) which the pilot has selected on
his Omni Bearing Selector (OBS). See Figure 8.9.
This displacement (or deviation) is presented by a Left / Right needle of the dual role (VOR/
ILS) indicator. Figure 8.10 shows that the displacement of the needle depends on the angular
position of the beacon relative to the selected bearing and is independent of the way the aircraft
is pointing. In other words, for a given position and bearing selection, the heading of the aircraft
does not affect the display on a deviation indicator.
NEEDLE SHOWING 2DOTS (5) DISPLACEMENT FROM

SELECTED BEARING
TO / FROM FLAG
FROM
SELECTED BEARING
080
OMNI BEARING
SELECTOR KNOB
(OBS)
Figure 8.9 VOR / ILS Deviation Indicator
Figure
5.9. VOR / ILS Deviation Indicator.
123

(VOR)
Chapter 8
3
N
4
2
Figure5.10.
8.10 Left
Left // Right
Figure
RightIndications
Indications.
Inspection of Figure 8.10 shows that aircraft at positions 1 and 3 receive a Fly Right indication.
If the aircraft lay exactly on the selected bearing either to or from the station, the needle would
be central.
Aircraft at positions 2 and 4 both receive a Fly Left indication (needle to the left of centre) but
note that the aircraft at position 4 must turn to the right to reduce its displacement from the
selected line. The needle sense is wrong for the aircraft at position 4, and this is generally
undesirable. To keep the needle sense correct when flying a track to or from a VOR station, the
aircrafts heading should be about the same as the track selected on the Omni Bearing Selector
(plus or minus any drift allowance).
As the equipment normally includes an automatic To/From flag (see Figure 8.9) the rule to be
followed to keep the needle sense correct is that:
When inbound to a VOR, select the inbound track on the OBS, so that a TO indication appears.
When outbound from a VOR, select the outbound track on the OBS so that a FROM indication
is seen.
In Figure 8.9, the bearing of 080, which the pilot has selected by turning the OBS knob, is
showing in the OBS window and the To / From flag has automatically flicked to From. These
indications would be obtained by an aircraft in the region of position 4 in Figure 8.10, meaning
that the aircraft (regardless of its heading) is displaced to the right of a magnetic track of 080
from the VOR station. However, for this aircraft the needle sense is wrong because its heading
is near enough the reciprocal of the selected track of 080. To put it another way, the aircraft is
inbound but an outbound track has been selected on the OBS.
124

(VOR)
Chapter 8
The indicator drawn in Figure 8.9 is typical with the azimuth scale having a circle and four dots
on each side of the centre. As the circle itself counts as the first dot this is a five dot display with
each dot indicating approximately a 2 displacement from the selected VOR bearing. Full-scale
deflection therefore represents 10.
(It should be noted that when the instrument is being used in the ILS role, each dot represents
only displacement from the ILS localiser centre line i.e. full-scale deflection represents 2.)
In addition to the Left / Right display, the deviation indicator shows a TO or a FROM flag
depending on whether:
The aircrafts QDM is within about 80 of the bearing selected, in which case To appears
The aircrafts QDR is within about 80 of the bearing selected, in which case From appears
This leaves two sectors about 20 wide in which an indeterminate To/From indication is
obtained.
TO
FROM
TO
080
FROM
080
80
080
80
N
BEACON
80
TO
080
80
TO
FROM
080
FROM
080
Figure 8.11 To / From Indications

Figure
5.11. To / From Indications.
Figure 8.11 depicts the deviation indicator in the various sectors about the VOR beacon. It
should be remembered that the six indications in Fig 5.11 are completely independent of the
aircrafts heading. They depend on the aircrafts bearing from the beacon and on the bearing
which has been selected on the OBS.
125

(VOR)
Chapter 8
If the VOR transmissions are faulty or the aircraft is out of range or the airborne power supply
is inadequate, an OFF flag appears in a slot in the face of the indicator close to the Left / Right
needle.
There are a few other aspects of deviation indicators which are worth mentioning. Firstly, if
the instrument has an ILS glide path needle, this needle will be inoperative, centralised, and
flagged OFF when the indicator is being used to display VOR information. Conversely, when
ILS information is being displayed, the OBS is inoperative and the To/From indication is
meaningless.
RADIO MAGNETIC INDICATOR (RMI)

The RMI provides an alternative means of presenting VOR bearing information and it has been
described at some length in the ADF notes. Briefly, it has a remote-reading compass repeater
card which indicates the aircrafts magnetic heading against a fixed heading index at the top of
the instrument.
A pointer indicates on the compass card the aircrafts QDM to the beacon. (Two needles are
common so that two bearings can be simultaneously displayed). Students for professional
licences should note that before display on the RMI, VOR information must be processed
differently from ADF information. This is because the aircraft receives a magnetic bearing from
the VOR dispensed in the form of a phase difference, whereas the ADF equipment gives a
direct indication of relative bearing.
The VOR QDM derived from the measured phase difference between the reference and variphase signals is converted to a relative bearing for display on the RMI. (This is achieved by
means of a differential synchro which automatically subtracts the aircrafts magnetic heading
from the VOR QDM). The resulting relative bearing positions the RMI needle, the point of
which, however, indicates the original QDM to the VOR because the magnetic heading which
was subtracted is in effect re-applied by the compass repeater card. If the QDM to the VOR
shown on the RMI is to be converted to a True bearing for plotting, the variation at the VOR
station must be applied.
As an example of the above, and with reference to Figure 8.12., suppose the aircraft heading is
040(M) and the measured phase difference is 270. The equipment derives from the latter a QDM
of 090 and subtracts the heading of 040 to give a relative bearing of 050W which positions
the RMI needle 50 clockwise from the heading index. (If there were a difference in variation
between the positions of the aircraft and VOR station, this derived relative bearing would have
a corresponding error but the QDM indicated by the needle would still be correct). Continuing
with the example, the RMI heading index reads 040 and the needle indicates 040 + 050 = 090,
which is the correct QDM to the VOR based on the magnetic meridian at the beacon. Compare
this with the case of an ADF bearing displayed by RMI, where the magnetic bearing indicated is
based on the magnetic variation at the aircraft.
126

(VOR)
Chapter 8
N(M)
HEADING
INDEX
N(M)
040 (M)
050 REL
270 RADIAL
BEACON
090 QDM
(PHASE DIFFERENCE 270)
Figure5.12.
8.12 VOR
VOR QDM
Figure
QDM on
onthe
theRMI
RMI.
One useful aspect of RMI presentation deserves mention. The arrowhead of the needle shows
the QDM of the beacon, so consequently the tail end of this full-diameter pointer indicates
the reciprocal of the QDM, that is, the radial on which the aircraft is positioned. Thus both the
bearing TO and the bearing FROM the station are clearly displayed.
It is worthwhile making a comparison between the RMI and the OBS type deviation indicator.
The RMI has certain disadvantages in that it is a more complex instrument requiring additional
hardware, including a remote-reading magnetic compass and the appropriate power supplies.
It is therefore heavier, occupies more space and is more costly.
In large aircraft these disadvantages are outweighed by the following advantages:
The RMI provides continuous indication of the QDM to a VOR (and the reciprocal of
the QDM, the radial, at the tail of the pointer).
Magnetic heading is also displayed, on the same instrument; a considerable asset when
homing to a VOR or maintaining a track outbound.
The approximate relative bearing of a beacon is immediately apparent, a plan view of

the local navigation situation being presented; this is most useful when flying a holding
procedure.
As the pointer automatically gives a continuous indication of the VOR bearing, the rate
of crossing radials during interception of a radial is easily assessed.
With two-needle RMIs, the bearings of two beacons can be simultaneously displayed
which is particularly useful when flying along an airway using one beacon ahead (or
astern) for track-keeping, and a second beacon off the airway for reporting abeam.
ADF bearings can be displayed on an RMI.

127

(VOR)
Chapter 8
IN-FLIGHT PROCEDURES
Typical uses of VOR by an aircraft equipped with both OBI-type deviation indicator and an RMI
are illustrated in Figure 8.13.
TO
FROM
100
150
10 DRIFT
TO
100
10 DRIFT
Figure5.13
8.13 In-Flight
In-Flight Procedures
Procedures .
Figure
Radial Interceptions
In Figure 8.13. the aircraft is shown intercepting the 280 radial by flying a heading of about
045(M), commencing the turn shortly before making good the radial so as not to over-shoot it.
He intends to turn on to a heading of 090(M) allowing for starboard drift inbound. So the turn
is through 45 taking about 15 seconds. Arrival at the 277 radial should be announced by the
Left / Right indicator showing about 1 dots fly left and the RMI needle pointing a QDM of
097 at which point he would turn onto 090(M).
Inbound Track-keeping
Having intercepted the inbound radial, the pilot maintains his heading (of 090(M) in the Figure
8.13. example) and watches the Left / Right needle. Suppose the needle shows a progressively
increasing displacement left; then the aircraft is moving to the right of the desired inbound
track. The drift allowance is insufficient and a heading of 085 would perhaps be more suitable.
The pilot would probably alter heading 30 port on to
060(M) until the needle centred, indicating the aircraft to be back on track, before trying the
new heading of 085(M) and again watching the needle.
Further alterations of heading may be necessary before the aircraft is settled down on a good
inbound heading with the needle reasonably steady in the central position. It is worth visualising
how the RMI would behave during the homing just described.
After the interception, the heading of 090 would show against the heading index, the
RMI needle indicating 100 (the required QDM to the VOR).
128

(VOR)
Chapter 8
Station Passage
Overhead a VOR there is a cone (or zone) of confusion with a vertical angle of about 60 to 80
(ICAO minimum is 40). This leads to indeterminate indications over the beacon which at high
level extend over a considerable area, for instance out to about 4 nm radius at 30,000 feet.
On the VOR/ILS indicator, the needle swings between hard left and hard right, the OFF flag may
appear temporarily, and the TO/FROM indicator changes to FROM. The RMI needle fluctuates
and then rotates through 180 to indicate the QDM back to the beacon. At low altitude these
station passage indications are rapid; at high altitude they are slow.
Outbound Flight
The aircraft is shown outbound on the 150 radial on the right-hand side of Figure 8.13. The
indications are ideal, the TO/FROM flag showing FROM, and the centralised L
/ R needle showing the aircraft to be on the selected track of 150. The information on the
deviation indicator is confirmed by the RMI needle showing a QDM of 330 back to the beacon.
If these indications were to change, showing a track error developing, the pilot would normally
make a firm heading alteration (typically 30) to regain track before steering a revised outbound
heading appropriate to his revised assessment of drift.
129

(VOR)
Chapter 8
Airfield Approach
Figure
5.148.14
Example
of of
a aVOR
Pattern
Figure
Example
VORDME
DMEApproach
Approach Pattern
130

(VOR)
Chapter 8
VOR SUMMARY
Characteristics:
Magnetic bearings, valid day and night
Frequency:
108 to 117.95 MHz; 160 channels
Uses:
Airways; Airfield let-downs; Holding points; En-route navigation
Principle of Op:
Phase comparison of two 30 Hz signals
Identification:

3 letter aural Morse or Voice every 10 s, continuous tone for VOT (also
ATIS using AM on voice)
Monitoring:

Automatic site monitor +/- 1

Ident suppressed when standby transmitter initially switched on
Types:
CVOR - reference signal is FM; variphase signal is AM

- Limacon polar diagram rotating clockwise

DVOR - more accurate than CVOR due to less site error

- reference signal is AM; variphase signal is FM

- simulated anticlockwise rotation of aerial

TVOR - low power Tx at airfields

VOT

Operational range:

- Test VOR giving 180 radial

- aircraft should have < +/- 4 error
Transmitter power
Line of sight
DOC valid day and night
Accuracy affected by: Site error (less with DVOR)

propagation error

Scalloping (bending due to reflections from terrain)

Airborne equipment error (+/- 3)
Cone of confusion:
OFF flag may appear; TO / FROM display and bearings fluctuate
Airborne equip:

Aerial, Receiver, Display (CDI / RMI)

CDI: 2 per dot; max 10; relationship between indication and
aircraft position
RMI: arrowhead gives QDM; tail gives QDR; Use magnetic variation
at station
In Flight procedures: Radial interceptions; Track keeping; Station passage
131
Chapter 8
132

(VOR)

(VOR)
Chapter 8
QUESTIONS
1.
Assuming the maximum likely error in VOR to be 5.5, what is the maximum distance apart
that beacons can be situated on the centre line of a UK airway in order that an aircraft can
guarantee remaining within the airway boundary?
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
The Designated Operational Coverage quoted for VOR beacons in the COMM section of the Air
Pilot:
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
4.
54.5 nm
109 nm
66 nm
132 nm
Is only applicable by day.

Guarantees a Protection Ratio of at least 3 to 1 by day and night.
Defines the airspace within which an aircraft is assured of protection from interference
from other VORs on the same channel.
Is determined by the type of surface over which the signal will have to travel.
An aircraft is tracking away from a VOR on the 050 radial with 10 starboard drift. An NDB
lies to the east of the VOR. Which of the RMIs illustrated below shows the aircraft when it is
obtaining a relative bearing of 100 from the NDB?
What is the theoretical maximum range that an aircraft at flight level 360 will obtain from a VOR
beacon situated at 900 feet above mean sea level?
a.
b.
c.
d.
274 nms
255 nms
112 nms
224 nms
133

(VOR)
Chapter 8
5.
A Conventional VOR:
a.
b.
c.
d.
6.
The OBS on a deviation indicator is set to 330 and gives a 3 dots fly right demand with FROM
indicated. What is the QDM of the aircraft to the station?
a.
b.
c.
d.
7.
225 nm
256 nm
281 nm
257 nm
Concerning conventional and Doppler VORs (DVOR), which of the following is correct?
a.
b.
c.
d.
10.
3 dots
2 dots
2.5 dots
1.5 dots
What is the theoretical maximum range that an aircraft at flight level 420 will obtain from a
VOR beacon situated at 400 feet above mean sea level?
a.
b.
c.
d.
9.
144
324
336
156
An aircraft is homing towards a VOR which marks the centre line of an airway. The beacon
is 100 nms distant. If the pilot had the airway QDM set on the OBS what deflection of the
deviation indicator would be given if the aircraft was on the boundary of the airway? Assume
that one dot equals 2 degrees.
a.
b.
c.
d.
8.
has an FM reference signal and an AM variable signal

has a 150Hz reference signal and a 90Hz variable signal
has an AM reference signal and a 150 Hz variable signal
has an AM reference signal and an FM variable signal.
There is no way of knowing from the instrumentation display which type is being
used.
The DVOR will always have a D in the ident.
The DVOR has a higher pitch ident than the standard VOR.
The conventional VOR has less site error.
In a Doppler VOR (DVOR) the reference signal is _________, the bearing signal is _________
and the direction of rotation of the bearing signal is _________:
a.
b.
c.
d.
134
AM, FM, anti-clockwise.

AM, FM, clockwise.
FM, AM, anti-clockwise.
FM, AM, clockwise.

(VOR)
11.
An aircraft is attempting to home to a VOR on the 064 radial. The CDI shows 4 dots fly right
with a TO indication. At the same time the co-located DME shows a range of 45 nm. Where is
the aircraft in relation to the required track?
a.
b.
c.
d.
12.
d.
220nm
100nm
235nm
198nm
An aircraft is on the airway boundary range 100 nm from a VOR marking the airway centre line.
Assuming that each dot equates to 2 how many dots deviation will be shown on the deviation
indicator?
a.
b.
c.
d.
15.
The beacon may be used providing that extreme caution is used.

The beacon is undergoing maintenance or calibration and should not be used.
This is a temporary short range transmission and will have approximately half its
normal range.
The beacon is under test and pilots using it should report its accuracy to air traffic
control.
What is the approximate maximum range that an aircraft flying at 25000 would expect to obtain
from a VOR beacon situated 900 above mean sea level?
a.
b.
c.
d.
14.
6 nm right of track
3 nm right of track.
6 nm left of track.
3 nm left of track.
A VOR beacon ceases to transmit its normal identification which is substituted by TST. This
means that:
a.
b.
c.
13.
Chapter 8
3.0 dots
2.5 dots
2.0 dots
1.5 dots
An aircraft is required to intercept and home to a VOR along the 064 Radial. The OBS should be
set to:
a.
b.
c.
d.
064 to get correct needle sense and a TO indication.

244 to get correct needle sense and a TO indication.
064 to get correct needle sense and a FROM indication.
244 to get correct needle sense and a FROM indication.
135

(VOR)
Chapter 8
16.
17.
An aircraft is tracking away from a VOR on the 150 radial with 10 starboard drift. An NDB
lies to the South of the VOR. Which of the RMIs illustrated below shows the aircraft when it is
obtaining a relative bearing of 100 from the NDB?
Assuming the maximum likely error in VOR to be 5, what is the maximum distance apart that
beacons can be situated on the centre line of a UK airway in order that an aircraft can guarantee
remaining within the airway boundary?
a.
b.
c.
d.
18.
60nm
100nm
120nm
150nm
AN aircraft, heading 150, is 100 nm north of a VOR, the pilot intends to home to the VOR on
the 030 radial. The pilot should set .. on the OBS and on reaching the 030 radial should turn
.. onto a heading of .., assuming zero wind.
a)
b)
c)
d)
136
210
030
210
150
left
right
right
left
030
210
210
210

(VOR)
19.
The type of emission radiated by a VOR beacon is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
20.
168nm
188nm
205nm
250nm
An aircraft is attempting to home to a VOR beacon. The pilot has set 329 on the OBS of the
deviation indicator. If the aircraft is situated on the 152 radial then the deviation indicator will
show:
a.
b.
c.
d.
24.
121
295
301
315
What is the theoretical maximum range that a pilot would obtain from a VOR situated 900 feet
above mean sea level in an aircraft flying at 18,000 feet?
a.
b.
c.
d.
23.
274
264
094
084
An aircraft is tracking away from a VOR on a heading of 287M with 14 starboard drift. If
the variation is 6W what is the phase difference between the reference and variable phase
components of the VOR transmission?
a.
b.
c.
d.
22.
A double channel VHF carrier with one channel being amplitude modulated and the
second channel being frequency modulated.
A single channel VHF carrier wave amplitude modulated at 30 Hz with a sub carrier
being frequency modulated at 30 Hz.
A VHF carrier wave with a 90 Hz frequency modulation and a 150 Hz amplitude
modulation.
A VHF pulse modulated emission with a pulse repetition frequency of 30 pps.
An aircraft wishes to track towards a VOR along the 274 radial. If variation is 10 W what
should be set on the OBS?
a.
b.
c.
d.
21.
Chapter 8
one and a half dots fly right.

one and a half dots fly left.
three dots fly right.
three dots fly left.
A VOR receiver in an aircraft measures the phase difference from a DVOR as 220. Which radial
is the aircraft on?
a.
b.
c.
d.
140
040
320
220
137

(VOR)
Chapter 8
25.
The RMI indicates the aircraft magnetic heading. To convert the RMI bearings of NDBs and
VORs to true bearings, the correct combination for the application of magnetic variation is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
26.
b.
c.
d.
that the aircraft is heading 033(M), is on the 310 radial from the VOR, and bears
050(M) from the NDB.
that the aircraft is heading 330(M), is on the 310 radial from the VOR, and bears 050
from the NDB.
The VOR in an aircraft is correctly tuned and set

to define the centre line of an airway within UK
airspace which you intend to fly. The indication
received on the VOR/ILS deviation indicator is
shown below. At the same time the DME gave a
range of 90nm from the facility. At the time of the
observation, the aircrafts radial and distance from
the airway centre-line were:
a.
b.
c.
d.
28.
VOR
aircraft position
beacon position
beacon position
aircraft position
Both the VOR and the ADF in an aircraft are correctly

tuned and identified. The indications from both are
shown on the RMI illustrated. Use the information
to answer the following: The information given on
the RMI indicates:
a.
27.
NDB
beacon position
beacon position
aircraft position
aircraft position
062 radial
074 radial
242 radial
254 radial
9 nm
6 nm
6 nm
9 nm
The normal maximum error which might be expected with a VOR bearing obtained within the
DOC is:
a.
b.
c.
d.
138
plus or minus 1
plus or minus 2
plus or minus 5
plus or minus 10

(VOR)
29.
30.
Chapter 8
An aircraft is tracking away from VOR A on the 310 radial with 8 starboard drift; NDB X
is north of A. Which diagram below illustrates the RMI when the aircraft is on its present
track with a QDR from X of 270?
The VOR indications on an RMI whose deviation is not zero:

a.
b.
c.
d.
are magnetic.
are compass.
are relative.
must have deviation applied before being used.
139

(VOR)
Chapter 8
31.
An aircraft bears 175(M) from a VOR. If the aircraft OBS is set to 002 and its heading is 359(M)
which diagram below represents the aircraft VOR/ILS deviation indicator? (assume 1 dot = 2)
TO
FROM
002
002
b
a
TO
FROM
002
c
140
002
d

(VOR)
Chapter 8
141

(VOR)
Chapter 8
ANSWERS
142
11
21
12
22
13
23
14
24
15
25
16
26
17
27
18
28
19
29
10
20
30
31
Instrument Landing System

(ILS)
Chapter 9
CHAPTER NINE
INSTRUMENT LANDING SYSTEM (ILS)
Contents
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
ILS COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
ILS FREQUENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
DME PAIRED WITH ILS CHANNELS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
ILS IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
MARKER BEACONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
GROUND MONITORING OF ILS TRANSMISSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
ILS COVERAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
ILS PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
ILS PRESENTATION AND INTERPRETATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
ILS CATEGORIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
ERRORS AND ACCURACY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
FACTORS AFFECTING RANGE AND ACCURACY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
ILS APPROACH CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
ILS SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
QUESTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
ANSWERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
143
Chapter 9
144

(ILS)

(ILS)
Chapter 9
INTRODUCTION
The Instrument Landing System (ILS) has been in existence for over 40 years but it is today still
the most accurate approach and landing aid that is used regularly by the airliners. The system
provides pilots with an accurate means of carrying out an instrument approach to a runway,
giving guidance both in the horizontal and the vertical planes. It even enables aircraft to carry
out automatic landings. ILS is a precision approach system because it gives guidance in both the
horizontal and the vertical plane.
ILS provides the pilot with visual instructions in the cockpit to enable him to fly the aircraft down
a predetermined glidepath and extended runway centre-line (localiser) to his Decision Height
(DH). At Decision Height the pilot decides to land (if he has the required visual references and
sufficient room to manoeuvre the aircraft for a safe touchdown) or he goes around (overshoots)
and carries out the published missed approach procedure.
Figure 9.1 The Instrument Landing System (ILS)
145

(ILS)
Chapter 9
ILS COMPONENTS
The system requires a suitable ground installation and airborne equipment. The ground
installation has three distinct components as shown in Figure 9.1, namely localiser, glide path
and marker beacons; in some installations a back course may also be available.
The Localiser (LLZ) transmits in the VHF band and is located about 300m from the upwind
end of the runway.
The glide path (GP) transmitter operates in the UHF band, and is frequency paired with the
localiser. It is located 300m in from the threshold and about 200m from the runway edge abeam
the touchdown point.
Marker beacons transmit at 75 MHZ in the VHF band. These include the outer marker (OM), the
middle marker (MM) and possibly an inner marker (IM). They are provided to enable the pilot
to cross check the aircrafts height against ranges and timing to the runway threshold.
Back Course approaches are allowed in some countries. This enables aircraft to make a nonprecision approach on the back beam of the localiser transmitter.
Some ILS installations also have a co-located low powered NDB, called a locator (L), at the site
of the OM beacon.
Distance Measuring Equipment (DME) that is frequency paired with the ILS frequencies
are now increasingly provided to supplement or replace the range information provided
by marker beacons.
ILS FREQUENCIES
Localiser. The Localiser operates in the VHF band between 108 and 111.975MHz to provide
40 channels. e.g.108.1 108.15; 108.3 108.35; 108.5 108.55 -111.95 Mhz. This part of the frequency
band is shared with VOR: the ILS frequencies have an odd number in the first decimal digit.
Glidepath. The Glidepath operates in the UHF band between 329.15 and 335MHz to provide
40 complementary channels. e.g. 329.15, 329.3, 329.45, 329.6 - 335MHZ.
Markers. All markers transmit at 75 MHz. There is no interference problem as the radiation
pattern is a narrow fan-shaped vertical beam.
Frequency Pairing. The GP frequency is paired with the localiser and selection of the frequency
is automatic. The Localiser and Glide Path transmissions are frequency paired in accordance
with the list published at ICAO e.g. 108.1MHz is paired with 334.7MHz. and 111.95MHz is
paired with 330.95MHZ. The advantages of this are:
One switch activates both receivers - this reduces the pilots workload.
Frequency selection is made easier and quicker as there is only one to consider.
The potential for a wrong frequency selection is reduced.
Only one identifier is needed.
146

(ILS)
Chapter 9
DME PAIRED WITH ILS CHANNELS

A DME that is frequency paired with an ILS supplements or replaces the range information
from markers/locators.
The DME ranges are zero referenced to the ILS runway threshold.
The DME is protected only within the ILS localiser service area up to 25,000 feet. When necessary
and notified, the DME is also used for published 'SIDs' and 'STARs' . In such cases the DME
coverage is increased. The use of a DME outside the stated limits may give rise to errors.
ILS IDENTIFICATION
Separate identification is unnecessary for ILS localiser and glidepath transmissions as the
localiser and glidepath frequencies are paired. The selection of the localiser VHF frequency
automatically energises the glide path receiver circuits.
The Ident on the localiser transmission is a 2 or 3 letter morse signal at 7 groups/min. The first
letter is usually I.
The Identification is automatically suppressed if the ILS becomes unserviceable or is withdrawn.
When an ILS is undergoing maintenance, or is radiating for test purposes only, the identification
coding will either be removed completely or replaced by a continuous tone. Under these
conditions no attempt should be made to use the ILS as completely erroneous indications may
be received.
Additionally, in some instances, because of an unserviceable Glide Path, the ILS may be
radiating for localiser approaches only, in which case the identification coding will be radiating.
In this case ATC will warn all users of this fact and no attempt should be made to use the Glide
Path.
MARKER BEACONS
Two markers are required for each installation and a third may be added if considered necessary
at a particular site.
When a marker is used in conjunction with the back course of a localiser, it should have an
identification signal that is clearly distinguishable from the front course markers.
The radiation patterns for ILS marker beacons is vertical and appears lens shaped or bone
shaped in plan view. Figures 9.2a and 9.2b show the horizontal and vertical profiles of ILS
marker beacons. The signal is only received if the aircraft is flying within the fan; it is not a
directional aid. Reception is indicated by synchronous aural identifiers and lights as shown in
the following table.
147

(ILS)
Chapter 9
Figure 9.2a Marker Beacon Radiation Patterns
Figure 9.2b The Outer Marker and the Middle Marker.
Z markers have cylindrical vertical radiation patterns. They are used to mark airway reporting
points or co-located with an NDB. Due to the cone of silence directly above an NDB, either Z
markers or fan shaped markers provide an indication when the aircraft is overhead.
148

(ILS)
Chapter 9
GROUND MONITORING OF ILS TRANSMISSIONS

Both the localiser and the glide path are automatically monitored by equipment located in an
area of guaranteed reception. This equipment will act when:
the localiser at the reference datum shifts from the runway centre-line by more than 35'
for Cat I, 25' for cat II or 20' for cat III;
the Glide path angle changes more than 0.075 x basic glide path angle;
there is a power reduction in output of more than 50% from any transmitter.
The monitoring unit will provide warning to a control point and cause any of the following to
occur before a stand-by transmitter is activated:
Cessation of all radiation.

Removal of identification and navigational components of the carrier.
Cat II or III ILS may permit operation to the lower categories I or II.
ILS COVERAGE
Localiser. The localiser coverage sector extends from the transmitter to distances of:

25 nm (46.3km) within plus or minus 10 from the centre-line;

17 nm (31.5km) between 10 and 35 from the centre-line;
10 nm (18.5km) outside 35 if coverage is provided.
These limits may be reduced to 18 nm within 10 sector and 10 nm within the remainder of the
coverage when alternative navigational facilities provide satisfactory coverage within the
intermediate approach area.
Glide path. The glide path coverage extends from the transmitter to a distance of at least:
10 nm (18.5km) in sectors of 8 in azimuth on each side of the centre-line.
The vertical coverage is provided from 0.45 up to 1.75 above the horizontal where is the
promulgated glide path angle. The lower limit may be reduced to 0.3 if required to safeguard
the promulgated glide path intercept procedure.
ILS coverage is illustrated in Figures 6.3a, 6.3b and 6.3c.
Figure 9.3a
Localiser Coverage
149

(ILS)
Chapter 9
Figure 9.3c Glide Path Vertical Coverage
ILS PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION

The Localiser
The localiser antenna produces two overlapping lobes along the runway approach direction
(QDM) as shown in Figure 9.4. The lobes are transmitted on a single VHF ILS frequency. In
order that an aircrafts ILS receiver can distinguish between the lobes:

the right hand lobe (the blue sector) has a 150Hz modulation
the left hand lobe (the yellow sector) has a 90Hz modulation
The depth of modulation increases away from the centre-line i.e. the amplitude of the modulating
signal increases away from the centre-line. An aircraft approaching the runway centre line from
the right will receive more of the 150 Hz signal than the 90 Hz modulation. This difference in
depth of modulation (DDM) relates to the angular displacement of the aircraft from the centreline; it energises the vertical needle of the ILS indicator. i.e. Go Left.
Similarly an aircraft approaching the runway centre line from the left will receive more of the
90Hz signal than the 150 Hz modulation; the DDM energises the vertical needle. i.e. Go Right.
A DDM of zero indicates a balance between modulations, a zero needle-deflection and hence
the runway centre line.
Back-course ILS
There is a mirror image behind the localiser aerial so ILS indications are received on aircraft
equipment. Back-course ILS is used in some countries but is not permitted in the United
Kingdom. Ignore any back-course indications in the United Kingdom. The back-course ILS has
the following disadvantages:
150
The glidepath indications are incorrect (they would, if used guide the aircraft to the
wrong end of the runway.
The CDI needle (localiser) is sense reversed. (Flying to R/W).
There are no range-check markers.

(ILS)
Chapter 9
Figure 9.4 Localiser Radiation Pattern
151

(ILS)
Chapter 9
Figure 9.5 Glide Path Radiation Pattern.

Glideslope
The glideslope UHF transmitter is located to one side of the runway approximately 200m from
the runway edge, 300m upwind of the threshold.
The same principle is used as for the localiser, but a UHF carrier wave is used and the lobes are
in the vertical plane. The upper lobe (large lobe) has a 90Hz modulation, and the bottom lobe
(small lobe) has a 150 Hz modulation. The glide path, usually 3
(ICAO require glide path angle between 2 and 4, is defined where the DDM of the overlapping
lobes is zero and the ILS indicators glide path needle will indicate zero deviation. The radiation
pattern is shown in Figure 9.5.
False Glideslope(s)
These are defined as the paths of points, in the vertical plane, containing the runway centre-line
at which the DDM is zero; other than that path of points forming the ILS glide path. The twin
lobes are repeated due to:
Metallic structures situated at the transmission point, and ground reflections.
The height and propagation characteristics of the aerial.
The first false glideslope occurs at approximately twice the glide path angle, 6 above ground for
a standard 3 glide path. False glideslopes always occur above the true glideslope and should
not constitute a danger but pilots should be aware of their presence.
Normal flying practice is to establish on the localiser and intercept the glideslope from below.
However at airfields such as London Heathrow a continuous descent approach is used in which
the aircraft are positioned by ground radar to capture the glideslope from above. It is advisable
to always confirm the aircraft height in relation to distance to go by reference to DME, markers,
locators etc.
152

(ILS)
Chapter 9
ILS Reference Datum Point

The ILS reference datum point is a point at a specified height (around 50 feet) located vertically
above the intersection of the runway centre-line and threshold, through which the downward
extended portion of the ILS glidepath extends. This value is to be found in the remarks column
for the particular airfield in the UK AIP, AD section.
Visual Glide Path Indicators
The approach light systems such as PAPIs give a visual indication of the glide path to the runway
that would be the same as that for the ILS so that during the final phase of the approach the pilot
should get similar indications of glide path from both systems. However the visual indications
are designed for a mean eye height (meht) of the pilot and they would therefore vary slightly
since the pilots position will vary depending upon the size of the aircraft.
ILS PRESENTATION AND INTERPRETATION

Indicators. Localiser and glide path information can be displayed:
on a Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) or
on the Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI).
Interpretation of a CDI display is shown in Figure 9.6. The HSI display is shown at Figure 9.7.
The main difference to note is that on the HSI there is a course selector which should be set on
the QDM of the runway. The deviation indications then appear in the correct sense.
Figure 9.6 ILS Course Deviation Indicator
153

(ILS)
Chapter 9
Figure 9.7 A Typical HSI
Localiser Indications
Front course approach indications for fly left and right are shown in Figure 6.7. Full scale
deflection of the needle indicates that the aircraft is 2.5 or more left or right of the centre-line
i.e. the sensitivity is 0.5 per dot.
Back beam Approach.
Where a localiser is designed to radiate back-course information it can:
give Azimuth guidance on overshoot from main precision approach runway, when the
CDI or HSI needle should be obeyed, or
give back course approach to the reciprocal of the main precision approach runway. In
this case the CDI needle will give reverse indications whereas an HSI will give correct
indications provided that the front course QDM has been selected.
154

(ILS)
Chapter 9
Figure 9.8 Localiser

Glide Path Indications
The glide path indication for fly up or fly down is shown in ?Figure 9.9. Full scaledeflection
indicates that the aircraft is 0.7 or more above or below the glide path. The sensitivity is 0.14
per dot. Note that the maximum safe deviation below the glideslope is half full-scale deflection
i.e. 2.5 dots fly up.
Figure 9.9 Glide Path
155

(ILS)
Chapter 9
ILS CATEGORIES
ILS Facility Performance CATEGORIES (Ground Installation)
Category I A Category I ILS is one which provides guidance information from the coverage
limit of the ILS to the point at which the localiser course line intersects the ILS glidepath at a
height of 200 ft (60 m) or less above the horizontal plane containing the threshold.
Category II An ILS which provides guidance information from the coverage limit of the ILS to
the point at which the localiser course line intersects the ILS g/path at a height of 50ft (15 m) or
less above the horizontal plane containing the threshold.
Category III An ILS, which with the aid of ancillary equipment where necessary, provides
guidance information from coverage limit of the facility to, and along, the runway surface.
Operational Performance Categories
The improvement in the ground installations allows guidance down to the surface of a runway
and requires a corresponding improvement in the airborne equipment. An aircraft may be
certified to operate to one of the following classifications:
Category 1
a DH not lower than 60m (200) and

a Runway Visual Range (RVR) not less than 550m.
Category 2
A precision instrument approach and landing with:
a DH lower than 30m (100), or no DH; and

a RVR not less than 200m.
Category 3B
A precision Instrument Approach and landing with
a DH lower than 60m (200) but not lower than 30m (100) and
a RVR not less than 300m.
Category 3A
An Instrument Approach and landing with :
A precision instrument approach and landing with:
a DH lower than 15m (50), or no DH; and

a RVR less than 200m but not less than 75m.
Category 3C
No DH and no RVR limitations.
The acceptance of Category 2 or 3 operations will depend on whether the following criteria are
met:
156
the aeroplane has suitable flight characteristics.

the aeroplane will be operated by a qualified crew in conformity with laid down procedures.
the aerodrome is suitably equipped and maintained.
it can be shown that the required safety level can be maintained.

(ILS)
Chapter 9
ERRORS AND ACCURACY

The Instrument Landing System has several limitations in that indications can be affected by:
beam bends caused by atmospheric conditions
scalloping caused by reflections which results in rapid fluctuations of the needles on

the CDI/HIS which are impossible to follow; and
beam noise generated by the transmitter or due to interference.
The pilot must be alert to the existence of potential problems and constantly cross check the
information which is being received.
To minimise interference to the ILS transmissions, the rate of landings has to be kept
relatively low, and also vehicle and aircraft movement must be restricted on the ground,
especially during low visibility procedures.
Pilots serviceability checks of the localiser and glide path may be checked by:
ensuring the warning flags are not visible.
the pilot monitoring the identification signals. Cessation of the Ident means
that the ILS is unserviceable and the procedure must be discontinued
immediately.
FACTORS AFFECTING RANGE AND ACCURACY

ILS Multipath Interference Due to Large Reflecting Objects
Multi-path interference to ILS signals is dependent upon antenna characteristics plus any large
reflecting objects, vehicles and fixed structures within the radiated signal coverage. Moving
objects can degrade the directional signals to an unacceptable extent.
In order to protect the ILS signals from interference, protected areas are defined:
ILS Critical Area. This is an area of defined dimensions about the localiser and glide
path antennas where vehicles and aircraft are excluded during all ILS operations. It
is protected because the presence of vehicles and/or aircraft inside its boundaries will
cause unacceptable disturbance to the ILS signal-in-space.
ILS Sensitive Area. This extends beyond the critical area and is where parking or movement of vehicles and aircraft is controlled to prevent the possibility of unacceptable
interference to the ILS signal during low visibility ILS operations. The dimensions of
this area depend upon the object creating the disturbance.
Holding points. Protection of ILS signals during Category II and III operations may
dictate that pre-take-off holding points are more distant from the runway than holding
positions used in good weather. Such holding positions will be appropriately marked
and will display signs Category II/III Hold; there may also be a bar of red stop lights.
Weather. Snow and heavy rain attenuates the ILS signals thereby reducing the range and
degrading the accuracy.
157

(ILS)
Chapter 9
FM Broadcasts. FM transmitters have wide bandwidths and it is possible for such stations
transmitting on frequencies just below 108 MHz to produce frequencies that overspill into the
radio navigation band (108 to 117.975 MHz ) thereby causing interference with the ILS signals.
ILS APPROACH CHART

An Instrument Approach Chart for an ILS Approach is shown in Figure 9.10. The instrument
approach can be divided into the following 3 segments:

Initial approach - procedure up to the IAF (initial approach fix)
Intermediate - procedure between IAF and FAF (final approach fix)
final approach - procedure after FAF.
An aircraft should be at or above certain altitudes depending upon the sector from which it is
approaching. These are known as sector safety altitudes (SSA) and are denoted in some form on
the chart (circular in top left on this one).
Landing minima relates to the pilots decision height (DH) and the RVR. Before commencing
the approach the pilot would normally be advised by ATC to check his landing minima.
158

(ILS)
Chapter 9
Figure 9.10 ILS Approach to Runway 27 at East Midlands Airport

159

(ILS)
Chapter 9
ILS CALCULATIONS
When flying an ILS approach it would be sensible to predict the rate of descent required on
approaching the glide path, and prudent to have a check on height when established on the
glidepath. These can be simply achieved by using the 1:60 rule.
Example: An aircraft is at 4 nm from touchdown flying a 3 glidepath at a groundspeed of 150
kt. Determine the height the aircraft should be and the rate of descent required.
To determine height by the 1:60 rule:
Height =

Glidepath Angle x Range

x 6076 ft
60
This can be simplified to:

Height = Glidepath Angle x Range x 100
This gives: Height = 3 x 4 x 100 = 1200 ft

The trigonometric solution, using accurate values gives a height of 1274 feet, so the use of the
simple 1:60 formula does underestimate the height. However, we are using this as a check for
gross errors.
To determine the rate of descent (ROD) required, using the 1:60 rule:
Find the change of height per nm and then multiply that by the speed in nm/minute:
For a 3 glidepath:
ROD =
Glidepath Angle x 1
Groundspeed
x 6076 x
60
60

= 3 x 100 x

Groundspeed
60
= 5 x Groundspeed
feet per minute
feet per minute
feet per minute
Hence, for the example the ROD required will be 750 feet per minute (fpm).
As with the height this is an approximation and will slightly underestimate the actual ROD,
which works out trigonometrically as 796 fpm.
Note: This is only valid for a 3 glidepath. For any other glidepath angle, calculate for a 3 glidepath then
divide by 3 and multiply by the glidepath angle (or calculate on your Navigation Computer).
160

(ILS)
Chapter 9
ILS SUMMARY
Components and frequencies:
Localiser
VHF - 108 to 111.975 MHz (40 channels). Aerial at upwind end.
Glide path
UHF - frequency paired. Aerial abeam touchdown.
Markers
VHF - 75 MHz. Fan shaped vertical radiation. OM, MM and IM.
Back beam
From localiser. Non-precision approach.
Locator
Low power NDB at OM.
DME
Freq paired. Possibly in place of markers. Zero-referenced to threshold.
Ident:
2 or 3 letters, 7 groups/min. Suppressed when ILS u/s. Continuous tone during

maintenance
Markers
OM:

MM

IM
blue 2 dashes/s
400 Hz
6.5 - 11.1 km
orange 3 characters per second, alternate dots and dashes
1300 Hz
1050m
white 6 dots/s
3000 Hz
75 - 450m
Ground monitoring

Localiser within 35 (Cat I) at ref datum. GP within 0.075 .

Power within 50%
Otherwise: Cease radiation, remove ident or lower category
ILS Coverage LLZ:

GP:
25nm 10, 17nm 35

10nm 8, 0.45 to 1.75 x glidepath angle.
Principle of Operation:
Localiser
LH lobe - 90 Hz, RH lobe -150 Hz; DoM increases away from c/l DDM is zero
on c/l
Back course
If approved use for non-precision approach. Reverse readings on CDI. HSI can
operate in correct sense if front course QDM set
Glide path

Upper lobe - 90 Hz, lower lobe - 150 Hz. DoM increases away from
DDM is zero on
False GP
at multiples of glidepath angle. Be aware.
Ref datum
height of GP over threshold
PAPIs
same angle as but meht is higher than ref datum
Indicators

CDI:
HSI:
GP:
0.5/dot; max 2.5 . Reverse indication on back course

set course selector to front QDM for correct indications
0.14/dot; max 0.7. max safe dev - 2.5 dots fly up (0.35)
161

(ILS)
Chapter 9
ILS Categories:
I
II
III/IIIA
< 200
< 50
DH
200
100
RVR
550m
300m
Ground:
Operational:
Errors:

IIIB
< 100 (if any) < 50 (if any)

200m
75m
IIIC
0
0
beam bends, scalloping, beam noise;

restricted vehicle movements during low vis ops;
check failure flags;
monitor ident
Range and Accuracy: Critical area - aircraft and vehicles excluded for all ILS ops;

Sensitive area - excluded area during low vis ops;

Cat II/III holds;

Weather; FM broadcasts.
Approach segments:

162
Initial, intermediate and final;

SSAs;
landing minima - DH and RVR.

(ILS)
Chapter 9
QUESTIONS
1.
The coverage of an ILS localiser extends to _________either side of the on course line out to a
range of .. nm.
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
The upper and lower limits of an ILS glide path transmitter having a 3.5 glide slope are:
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
DOWN and LEFT.

UP and LEFT
UP and RIGHT.
DOWN and RIGHT.
In elevation the upper and lower limits of an ILS glide path transmitter having a 3.0 degree
glide slope are:
a.
b.
c.
d.
7.
continuous low pitched dashes with synchronised blue light.

continuous high pitched dots with synchronised amber light.
alternating medium pitch dots and dashes with amber light.
one letter in Morse with synchronised white light.
An aircraft carrying out an ILS approach is receiving stronger 150 Hz signals than 90 Hz signals.
The correct actions to be taken to place the aircraft on the centreline and on the glidepath are to
fly:
a.
b.
c.
d.
6.
6 degrees
5.35 degrees
normal glide slope times 1.75
normal glide slope times 0.70
The visual and aural indications obtained when overflying an ILS middle marker are:
a.
b.
c.
d.
5.
6.125 - 1.575
7.700 - 1.225
5.250 - 1.350
3.850 - 3.150
The minimum angle at which a false glide path is likely to be encountered on a 3glidepath is:
a.
b.
c.
d.
4.
10, 35
35, 10
35, 17
25, 25
0.35
3.000
5.25
10.0
0.70
at least 6
1.35
35.0
A category 2 ILS installation encountered in the UK :

a.
b.
c.
d.
provides accurate guidance down to 50 above the horizontal plane containing the
runway threshold.
has a steep glide path, normally 7.5.
provides accurate guidance down to the runway and along the runway after landing.
has a false glide path that is exactly twice the true glide path angle.
163

(ILS)
Chapter 9
8.
Which of these ILS indicators shows an aircraft on final approach left of the centre line and at
maximum safe deviation below the glide path ?
9.
An aircraft tracking to intercept the ILS localiser inbound on the approach side but outside the
published coverage angle:
a.
b.
c.
d.
10.
The outer marker of an ILS installation has a visual identification of:

a.
b.
c.
d.
11.
alternating dots and dashes on a blue light.

continuous dots at a rate of 3 per second, blue light.
continuous dashes at a rate of 2 per second, amber light.
continuous dashes at a rate of 2 per second, blue light.
The specified maximum safe fly up indication on a 5 dot CDI is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
12.
will receive false on-course or reverse sense signals.

will not normally receive signals.
will receive signals without coding.
can expect signals to give correct indications.
half full scale needle deflection above the centre line.

2.5 dots fly up.
just before full scale deflection.
1.3 dots fly up.
An aircraft is attempting to use an ILS approach outside the coverage sectors of an ICAO
standard system:
a.
b.
c.
d.
164
From the glideslope needle the captain may be receiving false course and reverse sense
indications and from the localiser needle intermittent and incorrect indications.
The aircrafts receiver is not detecting any transmissions and the ILS needle OFF flags
are visible.
From the localiser needle the captain may be receiving false course and intermittent
indications and from the glideslope needle reverse sense and incorrect indications.
From the localiser needle the captain may be receiving false course and reverse sense
indications and from the glideslope needle intermittent and incorrect indications.

(ILS)
13.
The coverage of the ILS glideslope in azimuth is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
14.
Chapter 9
8 out to 10nm
10 out to 8nm
12 out to 17nm
35 out to 25nm
An aircrafts Instrument Landing System glideslope and localiser receivers are receiving
predominant 90Hz modulated signals. If the aircraft is within the coverage of the ILS, QDM of
264, it is:
a.
b.
c.
d.
north of the localiser and below the glideslope.

south of the localiser and above the glideslope.
north of the localiser and above the glideslope.
south of the localiser and below the glideslope.
165

(ILS)
Chapter 9
ANSWERS
166
10
11
12
13
14
Microwave Landing System

(MLS)
Chapter 10
CHAPTER TEN
MICROWAVE LANDING SYSTEM (MLS)
Contents
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
ILS DISADVANTAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
THE MLS SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
AIRBORNE EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
QUESTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
ANSWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
167
Chapter 10
168

(MLS)

(MLS)
Chapter 10
INTRODUCTION
The Microwave Landing System (MLS) was designed to replace ILS with an advanced precision
approach system that would overcome the disadvantages of ILS and also provide greater
flexibility to its users. However, there are few MLS installations in use at present and they are
likely to co-exist with ILS for a long time.
MLS is a precision approach and landing system that provides position information and various
ground to air data. The position information is provided in a wide coverage sector and is
determined by an azimuth angle measurement, an elevation measurement and a range
measurement.
ILS DISADVANTAGES
ILS has the following disadvantages:
There are only 40 channels available worldwide.
The azimuth and glideslope beams are fixed and narrow. As a result, aircraft have to be
sequenced and adequately separated which causes landing delays.
There are no special procedures available for slower aircraft, helicopters, and Short
Take Off and Landing (STOL) aircraft.
ILS cannot be sited in hilly areas and it requires large expanses of flat, cleared land to
minimise interference with the localiser and glideslope beams.
Vehicles, taxying aircraft, low-flying aircraft and buildings have to be kept well away
from the transmission sites to minimise localiser and glideslope course deviations
(bending of the beams).
THE MLS SYSTEM

The Microwave Landing System (MLS) has the following features:
There are 200 channels available worldwide.
The azimuth coverage is at least 40 of the runway on-course line (QDM) and glideslopes from .9 to 20 can be selected. The usable range is 20-30 nm from the MLS site;
20nm in the UK.
There is no problem with back-course transmissions; a secondary system is provided to

give overshoot and departure guidance 20 of runway direction up to 15 in elevation
to a range of 10 nm and a height of 10,000 ft.
It operates in the SHF band, 5031 - 5090 MHZ. This enables it to be sited in hilly areas
without having to level the site. Course deviation errors (bending) of the localiser and
glidepath caused by aircraft, vehicles and buildings are no longer a problem because
the MLS scanning beam can be interrupted and therefore avoids the reflections.
169

(MLS)
Chapter 10
Because of its increased azimuth and elevation coverage aircraft can choose their own
approaches. This will increase runway utilisation and be beneficial to helicopters and
STOL aircraft.
The MLS has a built-in DME.
MLS is compatible with conventional localiser and glidepath instruments, EFIS, autopilot systems and area navigation equipment.
MLS gives positive automatic landing indications plus definite and continuous on/off
flag indications for the localiser and glideslope needles.
The identification prefix for the MLS is an M followed by two letters.
The aim is for all MLS equipped aircraft to operate to CAT III criteria. Figures 10.1, 10.2
and 10.3 below show some of these features.
20,000 ft
ELEVATION
20
20
40
40
20
30 nm
30
nm
AZIMUTH
Figure 10.1 MLS Coverage
Figure
7.1. MLS Coverage.
170

(MLS)
Chapter 10
Figure 10.2 Approach Coverage Volume
Figure 7.2. Approach Coverage Volume.
Channel number,
selectable 500 - 699
Approach azimuth (direction)

relative to runway centreline.
Required
glideslope
AZ
MODE SELECTOR.
AUTO: Glideslope and azimuth
dictated according to
selected channel.
MAN: Preferred G/S and AZ
selections on a given
channel may be made.
G/S
CHAN
DISPLAY SELECT
PUSHBUTTON.
Calls up AZ, G/S or CHAN
legend, values of which
are then selected on the
ANGLE/CHANNEL
SELECTOR
ANGLE/CHANNEL
SELECTOR.
Two concentric selectors for
AZ, G/S, CHAN selection
according to mode on
DISPLAY SELECT
PUSHBUTTON.
Figure 10.3 Typical MLS Flight Deck Control Panel
Figure 7.3. Typical MLS Flight Deck Control Panel.

171

(MLS)
Chapter 10
MLS employs the principle of Time Division Multiplexing (TDM) (see Figure 10.5) whereby
only one frequency is used on a channel but the transmissions from the various angle and data
ground equipments are synchronised to assure interference free operations on the common
radio frequency.
Azimuth location. Time referenced scanning beam (TRSB) is utilised in azimuth and
elevation as follows: the aircraft computes its azimuth position in relation to the runway centre-line by measuring the time interval in microseconds between the reception
the to and fro scanning beams.
The beam starts the to sweep at one extremity of its total scan and travels at a uniform
speed to the other extremity. It then starts its fro scan back to its start position. The
time interval between the reception of the to and fro pulses is proportional to the
angular position of the aircraft in relation to the runway on-course line.
The pilot can choose to fly the runway on-course line (QDM) or an approach path
which he selects as a pre-determined number of degrees the runway direction. (See
Figure 10.4).
Glideslope location. Another beam scans up and down at a uniform speed within its
elevation limits. The aircrafts position in relation to its selected glideslope angle is thus
calculated in the same manner by measuring the time difference between the reception
of the pulses from the up and down sweep. The transmissions from the two beams and
the transmissions from the other components of the MLS system are transmitted at different intervals i.e. it uses time multiplexing.
Other components of the system are:
Flare. Although the standard has been developed to provide for flare
elevation, this function is not intended for future implementation
Back azimuth. Gives overshoot and departure guidance 20 of runway

direction up to 15 in elevation.
DME Range along the MLS course is provided not by markers but by a
DME. For Cat II and III approaches a precision DME (DME/P) that is accurate
to within 100 feet must be available.
Transmission of auxillary data. This consists of:
172
>
>
>
>
station identification
system condition
runway condition
weather information

(MLS)
Chapter 10
-40
-40
FRO
SCAN
BEAM
TO
SCAN
BEAM
RUNWAY CENTRE LINE
RUNWAY CENTRE LINE
+40
+40
TIME
MEASUREMENT
THRESHOLD
Secs
RECEIVED
SIGNALS
STRENGTH
TO SCAN
BEGINS
TIME DIFFERENCE MEASUREMENT IS

DIRECTLY RELATED TO "
FRO SCAN
ENDS
Figure 10.4
Figure
7.4.
173

(MLS)
Chapter 10
Figure 10.5 TRSB Component Site
Figure 7.5. TRSB Component Site
174

(MLS)
Chapter 10
AIRBORNE EQUIPMENT
The airborne equipment is designed to continuously display the position of the aircraft in relation
to the preselected course and glide path along with distance information during approach as
well as during departure.
Display
The display consists of two cross bars similar to an ILS display except that the indications are
given relative to the selective course. It is possible to program the computer to give segmented
approaches and curved approaches for which a DME-P must be installed on the ground.
Control Unit
In order to receive ILS, MLS and GPS transmissions, aircraft are equipped with multi-mode
receivers and a combined control unit for ease of use by the flight crew. An example of such a
control unit is shown at Figure 10.6.
ILS FREQ
CRS
108.10
001
PREV
TST
NEXT
ENT
AUTO
MANUAL
Figure7.6.
10.6MMR
MMRControl
ControlPanel
Panel.
Figure
QUESTION
1.
The coverage of the Micro-wave Landing System in the UK extends to ______nm up to a height
of ______and ______degrees either side of the on course line.
a)
b)
c)
d)
20nm;
35nm;
35nm;
17nm;
20,000ft;
5,000ft;
5,000ft;
2,000ft;
40 degrees.
40 degrees.
20 degrees.
35 degrees.
175

(MLS)
Chapter 10
ANSWER
1
176
Radar Principles
Chapter 11
CHAPTER ELEVEN
RADAR PRINCIPLES
Contents
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
TYPES OF PULSED RADARS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
RADAR APPLICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
RADAR FREQUENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
PULSE TECHNIQUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
DISTANCE MEASUREMENT - ECHO PRINCIPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
THEORETICAL MAXIMUM RANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
PRIMARY RADARS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
THE RANGE OF PRIMARY RADAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
RADAR MEASUREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
RADAR RESOLUTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
MOVING TARGET INDICATION (MTI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
RADAR ANTENNAE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
QUESTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
ANSWERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
177
Chapter 11
178
Radar Principles
Radar Principles
Chapter 11
INTRODUCTION
Radar stands for RAdio Detection And Ranging and was developed prior to World War II.
It was used both on the ground as well as in the air by the military. Originally it used pulses
for its operation but subsequently continuous wave techniques were also developed for other
functions such as the radio altimeter, because CW radars have no minimum range limitation.
Today radar is also extremely important in civil aviation. It is used by ground based radars in
the control, separation and navigation of aircraft as well as in airborne systems for weather
warning and navigation.
Radar is the Transmission of Electromagnetic Radio Energy

and the Detection of some of the
back at the point of Transmission
Figure 11.1
Figure 8.1
TYPES OF PULSED RADARS

A Primary Radar uses pulses of radio energy reflected from a target i.e. it uses one frequency
throughout.
A Secondary Radar transmits pulses on one frequency, but receives on a different frequency
i.e. the object transmits its own energy. It is a system utilising an interrogator and transponder;
the transponder can be located in the aircraft or on the ground.
179
Chapter 11
Radar Principles
RADAR APPLICATIONS
Radar has a wide range of applications as follows:
Air Traffic Control uses radar to:
monitor aircraft in relation to each other whilst they are flying on airways, in control
zones or in the airfield vicinity, and to vector the aircraft if necessary.
provide radar talk-down to a given runway: (Surveillance Radar Approach (SRA) or a

military Precision Approach Radar (PAR))
control and monitor aircraft on ILS let-downs, or during airfield instrument approaches.
provide information regarding weather e.g. storm clouds.
Air/Ground navigational systems use radar:
Secondary Surveillance Radar provides ATC with information regarding an aircrafts

callsign, altitude, speed, track history, destination and type of emergency when appropriate.
Distance Measuring Equipment (DME) provides a pilot with very accurate slant ranges from a ground based receiver/transmitter known as a transponder.
Doppler Radar. This is a self-contained airborne system, needing no ground based

equipment, which provides a pilot with a continuous indication of the aircrafts drift
and groundspeed.
Airborne Weather Radar (AWR) is used to:
depict the range and bearing of clouds.
indicate areas of the heaviest precipitation and associated turbulence.
calculate the height of cloud.
ground map.
180
Radar Principles
Chapter 11
RADAR FREQUENCIES
Radar systems are in the VHF and above frequency bands because:
these frequencies are free from external noise/static and ionospheric scatter.
the shorter wavelengths produce narrow, efficient beams for target discrimination and
bearing measurement.
the shorter wavelengths can produce shorter pulses.
efficient reflection from an object depends upon its size in relation to the wavelength;
shorter wavelengths are reflected more efficiently.
PULSE TECHNIQUE
Primary, secondary, and Doppler radar systems use the pulse technique which is the transmission
of radio energy in very short bursts. Each burst of energy is in a pulse form of a pre-determined
shape. The duration of the pulse is equal to the pulse length or width. Although a pulse is of
short width (time) it can contain many cycles.
TIME
PULSE
WIDTH
TIME
PULSE
RECURRENCE
PULSE RECURRENCE INTERVAL(PRI)

or
PULSE RECURRENCE PERIOD(PRP)
Figure 11.2 Pulse Technique
Figure 8.2. Pulse Technique.

Pulse Recurrence Interval (PRI) is the time interval between two pulses. It is also known as the
Pulse Recurrence Period (PRP)
Pulse Recurrence Frequency (PRF) is the number of pulses transmitted in one second (PPS).
It is also known as the Pulse Recurrence Rate (PRR).
Example. If the PRF is 250 PPS what is the PRI of the transmission?
PRI = 1 / 250 s
PRI = 1,000,000 / 250 s = 4000 s
181
Chapter 11
Radar Principles
DISTANCE MEASUREMENT - ECHO PRINCIPLE
Figure 11.3
Figure 8.3.
The distance to an object is found by timing the interval between instant of the pulses
transmission and its return as an echo; this is shown in Figure 11.3.
For example, if the echo (the time between transmission and reception) is 500s then:
Distance
= 300,000,000

75,000 m
Distance

162,000 500
1,000,000 2
40.5 nm
500
1,000,000 2
= 75 km
or
c = 300,000,000 m/sec or 162,000 nm/s)

Other methods of calculating the range are:

Range = 500 x 300 = 75km.

Range = 500 x 300
2
2 x 1852
A radar mile (one nm out and back) = 12.34 s.

Range = 500

12.36
182
40.5 nm
= 40.5 nm
Radar Principles
Chapter 11
THEORETICAL MAXIMUM RANGE

Relationship to PRF
Maximum theoretical range is determined by the PRF i.e. the number of pulses transmitted in
one second (pps) Each pulse must be allowed to travel to the most distant object planned before
the next pulse is transmitted; to do otherwise makes it impossible to relate a particular echo to
a particular pulse. The maximum range is therefore related to the PRF such that the greater the
range required, the lower the PRF used.
Examples
1.
We wish a radar to measure a range of up to 187 km. What should the PRF (PRR) be?
2.
What is the maximum PRR for a radar required to measure up to 200 nm?
3.
Maximum range for a radar is to be 170 km. What is the maximum PRR?
4.

An AWR has a 400 pps PRR. Calculate the maximum range in nautical miles for this
equipment.
Answers
1.
The pulse must travel 374 km (2 x 187) before the next pulse transmission.
The time for the journey, T = D/S = 374,000 / 300,000,000 seconds

= 0.0012466 s
i.e.
= 1246 s
PRI = 1246 s.
Thus the second pulse can only leave 1,246 s after the first.
PRF (pps) = 1/ PRI = 1/ 1,246 s = 1,000,000 / 1246 = 802 pps
Alternately we can say that PRF = 300,000,000 / 374,000 = 802 pps
2.
405 pps
3.
882 pps
4.
203 nm
Practical Range
The practical range for the radar is less than the maximum theoretical range because the trace
on the CRT (cathode ray tube) needs a period of time to return to the point of origin. This period
is called the fly-back or dead time. During this period returning echoes cannot be displayed
thereby reducing the range achievable for a given PRF.
183
Chapter 11
Radar Principles
PRIMARY RADARS
The pulses are concentrated into the beam dimensions designed for the particular radar. The
beam uses the echo principle to determine range and the searchlight principle to indicate
bearing or height. Figure 11.4 shows the Plan Position Indicator (PPI) display and Figure 11.5
shows the ATC radar antennae. The long structures at the top of the primary radar antennae are
the secondary radar antennae.
The transmitter and receiver share the same antenna. The receiver is energised to accept echoes
from objects in the pulses path as soon as the transmitter pulse exits the antenna. The reflected
pulses are very weak due to the double journey.
The shape and size of the radar antennae determines the size of the main and side lobes as well
as the width of the radar beam generated by the system. The larger the aerial, the narrower will
be the beam.
Figure
11.4 A
PPIADisplay
of Primary
Raw Radar
Figure
8.4.
PPI Display
of Primary
Raw Radar.
Figure 11.5 Typical Radar Antennae
Figure 8.5. Typical Radar Antennae.

184
Radar Principles
Chapter 11
THE RANGE OF PRIMARY RADAR

Maximum Range
The range of a primary radar depends upon the strength of the returning pulses that determines
the quality of the target depiction on the PPI. The range is affected by several factors:
Transmission power. A radar signal attenuates with increasing distance from the transmitter. As the signal has to travel out and back the power/range relationship is:
Power available is proportional to the fourth power of range which means that the
power has increased by a factor of 16 to double the range
Characteristics of reflecting objects. Metals are more efficient than wood at reflecting
the transmitted signal and the size and shape of the detected object make a considerable difference to the effective range. The aspect of the object also affects the range; for
instance, a manoeuvring aircraft presents various aspects which can affect the polarisation of reflected waves. The side of the fuselage has a better aspect than the nose of the
aircraft.
Aircraft height and the height of the radar head. Radar transmissions, because of their
frequency bands, travel in straight lines and give line of sight ranges, plus a little extra
due to atmospheric refraction. Thus the curvature of the earth causes much of the surface to be in shadow. Therefore, higher flying aircraft are more likely to be detected because they are above that shadow. Intervening high ground also will screen low flying
aircraft from detection. The higher the radar head can be positioned, the greater that
radars range and the less effect intervening high ground will have on stopping signals
and reducing its range. The following formula can be used to calculate the maximum
theoretical radar range:
Max. Theoretical range (nm) = 1.25 x ( HTX + HRX )
HTX = Height of radar station in feet amsl;
HRX = height of target in feet amsl.
Wavelength and Attenuation by Raindrops
100
80
60
40
20
0
0.03
0.1
0.3
10
(cm) LOGARITHMIC SCALE

Figure 11.6 Attenuation by Raindrops
Figure 8.6. Attenuation by Raindrops.

185
Chapter 11
Radar Principles
It can be seen from Figure 11.6 that energy is absorbed and scattered by raindrops;
the total effect depends upon the size of the water droplets and the transmitted
wavelengths. At wavelengths longer than 10cm the attenuation is negligible. If the
wavelength is between 10cm and 4cm the attenuation is significant only in tropical
rain. However, with wavelengths less than 4cm, attenuation is significant in rain in
the temperate latitudes. One conclusion is that wavelengths less than 3cm should not
be used for long range systems. Airfield Surface Movement Indicator (ASMI) radars
operate at 1.75 to 2cm wavelengths. Airborne Weather Radars (AWR) and Precision
Approach Radars (PAR) use 3cm wavelengths. Surveillance radars (ground) use 10, 23
or 50cm wavelengths.
Atmospheric conditions. Certain atmospheric conditions can actually increase the

range of radar pulses by refracting the waves which would normally travel in straight
lines. This is called super refraction and it gives radar ranges beyond normal line
of sight i.e. it gives over the horizon radar capability by causing the radio waves to
refract downwards towards the Earths surface. Such conditions occur when there is
a temperature inversion and a decrease in humidity with height. On the other hand,
atmospheric conditions can also cause sub-refraction in which the theoretical range of
the radar is reduced by causing the waves to refract upwards away from the surface.
+
TIME
PULSE
WIDTH
TIME
W = PULSE WIDTH
RADIO WAVES TRAVEL 300,000,000 M/SEC
IN 1 SEC THEY TRAVEL 300 METRES
Figure 11.7 Pulse Width Decides Minimum Range

Figure
8.7. Pulse Width Decides Minimum Range.
Restoration Time is a design factor that affects the time taken for a receiver to recover to normal
after transmission has occurred.
Pulse width determines the minimum range. With reference to Figure 11.7., it can be shown
that a pulse 1 sec wide would extend 300 metres. Thus an object at 150 metres reflecting this
pulse would cause it to arrive back at the receiver as its tail was leaving the transmitter.
Any object closer than 150 metres would reflect a pulse that could not be received as the
transmitter would still be transmitting. Furthermore, two objects in line 150 metres or less apart
would appear as a single return. As a result, if short range operation is required for target
resolution and accuracy, short pulses are used. e.g. 0.1s.
Note: 1or 2s are used for medium range radars and about 5s for long range radar.
186
Radar Principles
Chapter 11
Question
A surface movement radar is required to measure down to 500m. Calculate the

maximum pulse width in micro-seconds.
Answer
3.3s
RADAR MEASUREMENTS
Bearing. Bearing measurement is obtained by using the search light principle. Radio pulses
are concentrated into very narrow beams which are produced by shortening the wavelength
or increasing the aerial size and in advanced systems this is done electronically. The beam is
rotated at a constant speed. The PPI display is synchronised with the antenna rotation. The
direction of an object is the direction of the beam, measured from a fixed datum, at the time
when the echo is received.
Range. This has already been discussed earlier.
Harmonisation. In order that bearing and range information can be determined from the radar
system it is necessary to harmonise the rotary speed of the antenna, the pulse duration or width,
the pulse repetition frequency, focusing and transmission power.
RADAR RESOLUTION
The image painted on a PPI display from a point target will not be a single point but will appear
as a rectangle, known as the radar resolution rectangle i.e. the target appears to be stretched
both radially and in azimuth. The dimensions of the rectangle depend upon the pulse length,
the beam width and the spot size.
The radial resolution is dependent upon half the pulse length. For example, a pulse length of
1s would stretch the target by 150 metres (distance that an electromagnetic wave travels in 0.5
s). If two targets happen to be within the 150 m they will be illuminated simultaneously by the
pulse and return only a single echo to the receiver.
The azimuth resolution is dependent upon the full beam width. Therefore a 3 beamwidth at a
range of 120 km would stretch the target in azimuth by 6 km (using the 1 in 60 rule).
It follows therefore that in order to resolve adjacent targets the radar should have short pulse
lengths and narrow beam widths. However shortening the pulse length reduces the time the
target is illuminated by the pulse and reduces the chance of a good return being received. Beam
widths can only be narrowed by increasing the size of the antenna.
The spot size and the target size also increase the size of the echo displayed on the PPI screen.
187
Chapter 11
Radar Principles
MOVING TARGET INDICATION (MTI)

Surveillance radar equipment incorporates circuitry designed to eliminate returns from
stationary objects such as hills or buildings which would give returns that would mask the
weaker returns from aircraft. By erasing the permanent echoes the radar is able to display only
the moving targets such as aircraft.
It is possible for a radar receiver on MTI to produce false targets as a result of second trace
returns i.e. a return of the preceding pulse from a target beyond the maximum range selected,
appearing during the period of the next pulse as a moving target within the selected range. In
order to overcome this problem, MTI radars remove second trace returns by changing the PRI
between consecutive pulses, a technique known as jittering the PRF.
RADAR ANTENNAE
The microwave horn, parabolic reflector and slotted planar array (or flat plate antenna) shown
in Figures 11.8 and 11.9 are popular antennae which are used extensively in radar and satellite
systems. Microwave horns are very often used as feeds for large parabolic reflectors. Both the
parabolic reflector and the flat plate antennae generate main lobes as well as side lobes. Most
radars will incorporate circuits for side lobe suppression so that echoes from the side lobes do
not interfere with the main pulse returns. Figure 11.10 shows a radiation pattern with the main
and side lobes of a parabolic reflector. The slotted planar array produces a narrower beam with
much smaller side lobes hence reducing the power required and improving the resolution.
Figure 11.8 Radar Antennae
Figure 8.8. Radar Antennae
188
Radar Principles
Chapter 11
Figure 11.9 Airborne Weather Radar Antenna
Figure 8.9 Airborne Weather Radar

Antenna
189
Chapter 11
190
Radar Principles
Radar Principles
Chapter 11
QUESTIONS
1.
The factor which determines the maximum range of a radar is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
The main advantage of continuous wave radars is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
139 km
258 km
278 km
516 km
A radar is required to have a maximum range of 100 nm. What is the maximum PRF that will
achieve this?
a.
b.
c.
d.
7.
2
4
8
16
The time between the transmission of a pulse and the reception of the echo from a target is 1720
microseconds. What is the range of the target?
a.
b.
c.
d.
6.
324 nm
300 nm
162 nm
600 nm
To double the range of a primary radar would require the power to be increased by a factor of:
a.
b.
c.
d.
5.
No maximum range limitation

Better range resolution
No minimum range limitation
Better range resolution
If the PRF of a primary radar is 500 pulses per second, the maximum range will be:
a.
b.
c.
d.
4.
pulse repetition rate

pulse width
power
beamwidth
1620 pulses per second (pps)

1234 pps
617 pps
810 pss
If the PRI of a radar is 2100 microseconds, the maximum range of the radar is:
a.
b.
c.
d.
170 nm
315 nm
340 nm
630 nm
191
Chapter 11
8.
Radar Principles
To improve the resolution of a radar display requires:

a.
b.
c.
d.
9.
An advantage of a phased array (slotted antenna. is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
10.
using a different frequency for transmission and reception

jittering the PRF
making regular changes in pulsewidth
limiting the power output of the radar
A radar is designed to have a maximum range of 12 km. The maximum PRF that would permit
this is:
a.
b.
c.
d.
14.
pulse repetition interval

transmitter power
pulse width
pulse repetition frequency
The use of Doppler techniques to discriminate between aircraft and fixed objects results in
second trace returns being generated. These are removed by:
a.
b.
c.
d.
13.
73 nm
270 nm
135 nm
146 nm
The factor which limits the minimum detection range of a radar is:
a.
b.
c.
d.
12.
better resolution
less power required
reduced sidelobes and clutter
all of the above
An echo is received from a target 900 microseconds after the pulse was transmitted. The range
to the target is:
a.
b.
c.
d.
11.
a narrow pulse width and a narrow beam width

a high frequency and a large reflector
a wide beamwidth and a wide pulse width
a low frequency and a narrow pulse width
25000 pps
6700 pps
12500 pps
13400 pps
The bearing of a primary radar is measured by:

a.
b.
c.
d.
192
phase comparison
searchlight principle
lobe comparison
DF techniques
Radar Principles
Chapter 11
193
Chapter 11
Radar Principles
ANSWERS
194
10
11
12
13
14
Ground Radar
Chapter 12
CHAPTER TWELVE
GROUND RADAR
Contents
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
AREA SURVEILLANCE RADARS (ASR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
TERMINAL SURVEILLANCE AREA RADARS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
AERODROME SURVEILLANCE APPROACH RADARS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
RADAR VECTORING TO ILS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
SURVEILLANCE RADAR APPROACH (SRA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
HIGH RESOLUTION SURVEILLANCE RADAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
PRECISION APPROACH RADAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
USE OF QFE / QNH APPROACH AND LANDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
AIRPORT SURFACE MOVEMENT RADAR (ASMR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
CHARACTERISTICS OF CONTEMPORARY RADARS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
QUESTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
ANSWERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
195
Chapter 12
196
Ground Radar
Ground Radar
Chapter 12
INTRODUCTION
Air Traffic Control services use Ground radars extensively to serve a large number of
requirements and users. They employ both Primary radar and Secondary radar techniques.
Primary radar systems used by ATC include :
Area Surveillance Radar (ASR)
Terminal Area Surveillance Radar (TAR)
Aerodrome Surveillance Radar
Precision Approach Radar (PAR )
Airport Surface Movement RAdar (ASMR)
AREA SURVEILLANCE RADARS (ASR)

These are long range radars (200 to 300nm) used for airway surveillance to provide range and
bearing of aircraft. (Additional information is provided by Secondary Surveillance Radar - SSR).
Figures 12.1 and 12.2 show the locations and coverage of the London ACC and Scottish ACC
radars and Figure 12.3 shows the UK Airways structure.
Courtesy of Airbus Industrie
Figure 12.1 Coverage of LACC Radars

Figure 9.1. Coverage of LACC Radars.
Courtesy of Airbus Industrie
Figure 12.2 Coverage of SACC Radars

Figure 9.2. Coverage of SACC Radars.
197
Chapter 12
Ground Radar
Figure 9.3.
12.3 Airways
Airwaysin
inUK
UK Airspace.
Airspace
Figure
For the long range radars the wavelengths and pulse lengths are relatively long (10 to 50 cm and
2 to 4s respectively). The longer pulse length ensures that the target is illuminated for sufficient
time to give a good return. The PRF and antenna rotation rate (scan rate) are low - 300 to 400 pps
and 5 to 6 rpm respectively. This ensures that the next pulse is not transmitted until the first one
has had sufficient time to return from the long range target.
TERMINAL SURVEILLANCE AREA RADARS

These are medium range radars, up to 75nm, used for controlling traffic in TMAs. (Additional
information is provided by Secondary Surveillance Radar - SSR).
Typical wavelengths are 10cm, 23cm and 50cm with pulse widths 1 to 3s.
In the UK horizontal radar separation minima may be reduced to 3nm (5.6km) within 40nm (or
in certain circumstances 60nm) of the radar head and below FL 245 where the procedure has
been officially approved.
198
Ground Radar
Chapter 12
AERODROME SURVEILLANCE APPROACH RADARS

These are short range radars providing positional information up to 25nm. Their wavelengths
are 3cm or 10cm with pulse widths of .5 to 1s. They provide:
Positional information and control of aircraft in the aerodrome vicinity, Approach

Radar (RAD)
Radar Vectoring to the ILS
Surveillance Radar Approach (SRA)
RADAR VECTORING TO ILS
Figure9.4.
12.4 Radar
Radar Vectoring
Figure
VectoringtotoILS
ILS
An aircraft being positioned for final approach will be given a heading to close with the localiser
at a range of at least 5nm from the runway threshold and at a level below the glide-path.
199
Chapter 12
Ground Radar
SURVEILLANCE RADAR APPROACH (SRA)

1850ft
1550ft
1250ft
950ft
650ft
350ft
50ft
0nm
300ft
1nm
2nm
3nm
4nm
5nm
6nm
Figure 12.5 SRA Approach

Figure
9.5. SRA Approach
Whilst the pilot flies the radar approach the controller passes him:
tracking instructions in the form of turns to make and headings to fly:

Turn right 5 degrees - Heading 265
descent instructions in the form of advisory heights for range:

Range 5miles - height should be 1550
The descent slope is usually 3 - approximately 300ft/nm
The heights are worked backwards from 50ft above the threshold which is the reference point.
The heights are usually based upon QFE.
A non-high resolution Surveillance Radar Approach shall be terminated 2nm before

touchdown except where a termination range of 1nm has been specially approved.
200
Ground Radar
Chapter 12
HIGH RESOLUTION SURVEILLANCE RADAR

Certain approved Surveillance Radar Equipment (SRE) can provide final approach guidance of
better quality. The approval of High Resolution SRE procedures is based upon an operational
and technical evaluation of the equipment. In all cases:
There is a continuous talkdown from 4nm with ranges and advisory heights being
given every .5nm.
The approach controller providing final approach guidance is allocated full time to the
task.
The accuracy, resolution, antenna rotation rate, low level cover and extent of permanent
echoes are assessed as capable of giving a high probability of a successful approach
with a termination range of .5nm or less.
PRECISION APPROACH RADAR

The PAR is a runway approach aid available only at military airfields. It transmits on
a frequency of 10GHz ( 3cm) and provides the controller with very accurate azimuth and
elevation information (i.e. an electronic glide-path) on two screens positioned one on top of
the other; the glide-path is normally a standard 3. The system therefore has two antennae. A
pilot is talked down by the controller to his Decision Height. This procedure has now been
withdrawn from most UK civil aerodromes and is only available at certain military airfields.
Figure 12.6 shows the PAR procedure. When the pilot has been handed over to the PAR
controller and established radio contact, he will be told not to acknowledge any further
instructions and to check that his landing gear is down and locked. Thereafter the controller
maintains a continuous flow of instructions to the pilot e.g. You are 3nm, slightly above the
glideslope, increase your rate of descent; turn left 3, heading 272. Ranges are usually given
every mile until 4nm to go; thereafter at every nm. From 2nm ranges are given every nm.
The talkdown terminates at nm, or less.
The PAR display screen has two separate parts indicating the position of the aircraft both in
relation to the centre-line as well as in relation to the glide-path as shown in Figure 12.7.
201
Chapter 12
Ground Radar
TOUCHDOWN
POINT
Identify established by turn, which

in this exmple is also heading for
point A
Aircraft Homing to
the Airfield
MILE
From this point
ranges passed
every mile
Advice on approach
to the Decision
Height
2 MILES
On this leg information
relevant to the procedure
is given to or obtained
from the pilot. The
sequence is optional but
is to include or update as
required the following
items :
Altimeter setting, cockpit
checks, Positioning
instructions, weather
information, Airfield
information, Radio
frequency information
10
2 MILES
Final cockpit
checks between
approx 3 and 2
miles
5 MILES
Normal start of
descent
Check gear down
and locked
7 MILES
Handover to final
controller
8 MILES
BASE LEG
(QDM + 90)
10 MILES
NOTE : The 10-Mile distance can be varied to suit the aircraft type and adjacent traffic
patterns
Figure9.6.
12.6 The
ThePAR
PAR Approach.
Approach
Figure
202
Ground Radar
Chapter 12
1
ELEVATION OF AIRCRAFT
3 4 5 6 7 8 910
2
5 4
5
4
3
2
1
1512 10 9 8 7
0 3
4
3
2
1
0 7
-1
-2
-3
-4
-5 6
AZIMUTH POSITION OF AIRCRAFT

Figure 9.7.
12.7 The
The PAR
PAR Display
Figure
Display
USE OF QFE / QNH APPROACH AND LANDING

When an aircraft descends from a Flight Level to an altitude, preparatory to commencing
approach for landing, the aerodrome QNH will be set following the final Flight Level vacating
report. Thereafter, the pilot will continue to fly on the aerodrome QNH until established on final
approach when QFE or any other desired setting may be used.
Except at certain military aerodromes (see note below), ATC will assume that an aircraft is
using QFE on final approach when carrying out a radar approach and any heights passed
by the radar controller will be related to the QFE datum. It should be noted that the Obstacle
Clearance Height is always given with reference to the aerodrome or threshold elevation.
Note: At USAF operated aerodromes QFE is not used. All procedures below the Transition Altitude will
be based upon aerodrome QNH, and all vertical displacements given as altitudes. Aerodrome QFE will be
available on request.
203
Chapter 12
Ground Radar
AIRPORT SURFACE MOVEMENT RADAR (ASMR)

This is also known as AIRFIELD SURFACE MOVEMENT INDICATOR (ASMI) and is installed
at major airfields to provide a very accurate radar display (in all weathers and conditions of
visibility) of the aerodrome infrastructure, (taxi-ways, runways, aprons etc.), vehicular traffic
and aircraft that are stationary, taxi-ing, landing or taking -off.
ASMI radar is designed to provide a detailed, bright and flicker-free display of all aircraft
and vehicles on runways and taxi-ways so that Air Traffic Control Officers can be certain that
runways are clear of traffic before landings or take-offs, and to enable them to ensure the safe
and orderly movement of traffic on taxi-ways. Processing can remove selected fixed features
leaving targets on runways and taxi-ways, etc., clearly visible. This is shown in Figures 12.8 and
12.9; the aircraft taking-off is a DC9.
The very high definition required by these radars is achieved by designing a radar with:
a very narrow beam in the order of 0.2 to 1.
a scanner rotation rate of 60rpm.
a PRF in the order of 4,000 to 20,000pps.
pulse widths in the order of .03 sec.
frequencies of 15 to 17 GHz (SHF), 2 to 1.76cm wavelengths.
ranges of 2.5 to 6nm in light precipitation.
The frequencies required for ASMI result in the transmissions being increasingly attenuated and
absorbed as the intensity of precipitation increases. This has the effect of reducing the radars
range, but this is not a significant problem as the radars are only required to cover the environs
of the airfield. The EHF band is not suitable for an ASMI radar as the degree of attenuation in
most types of precipitation reduces its effective operational range and capabilities.
Figure12.8.
9.8. ASMI
Figure
ASMI with
withfixed
fixedfeatures.
features

204
Figure
12.9
ASMI
Figure
9.9Processed
Processed
ASMI
with
DC9
taking
off.
with
DC9
taking
off.
Ground Radar
Chapter 12
CHARACTERISTICS OF CONTEMPORARY RADARS

The following table compares the major properties of primary radars such as SRE, PAR and
ASMI. Particular note should be taken of the differences between ASMI radars and SREs .
When comparing the beam widths of SSRs (2.3 to 4.8) and SREs (1.1 to 1.7) it is apparent that
the SREs provide better bearing resolution and target discrimination, whereas the wider SSR
beam provides the identity for a particular primary radar response.
205
23cm
1.8cm
2.5kw
30kw
SRE
ASMI
SSR
PAR
SSR
Thomson
CSF
LP23K
Thomson
CSF
ASTRE
Thomsom
CSF
Thomson
CSF
TRS2310
Marconi
Messenger
0.5kw
up to
2.0kw
30kw
23cm
SRE
Thomson
CSF
TR23MR
3cm
10 cm
500 kw
SRE
Thomson
CSF
TA10M
WAVE
LENGTH
PEAK
POWER
TYPE
TITLE
4.8
or
2.3
.33
1.1
1.7
1.5
BEAM
WIDTH
(
(
2.45
AZ1.1
EL .6
(
( (
120nm
220nm
6nm
1.5s
3s
.04s
.5s
60nm
0.8s
up to
250nm
200 + nm
RANGE
(APPROX)
PULSE
LENGTH
10000
340
500
1000
PRF PPS
As for
assoc
PRI SRE
120
As for
assoc
SRE
60
5/6
variable
6 to 15
15
SCAN
RATE
Monopulse adaptable Mode S
Mechanical aerial scanning Scan

coverage 10 in elevation and
20 azimuth
Adaptable to monopulse or
Mode S operation
Inverted cosec aerial.

TV router display
Klystron Tx
Klystron Tx
Magnetron Tx
MISCELLANEOUS
INFORMATION
206
(
CHARACTERISTICS OF CONTEMPORARY RADAR EQUIPMENTS
Chapter 12
Ground Radar
Ground Radar
Chapter 12
QUESTIONS
1.
A primary radar has a pulse repetition frequency of 275 pps. The time interval between the
leading edges of successive pulses is:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
A primary radar system has a pulse repetition frequency of 450 pps. Ignoring pulse width and
flyback at the CRT, the maximum range of the radar would be:
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
SHF;
SHF;
EHF;
EHF;
60RPM
200RPM
100RPM
10RPM
When carrying out a precision radar approach, talkdown normally ceases at _______ nm from
touchdown:
a.
b.
c.
d.
6.
Regional QNH
QFE
QFF
Airfield QNH
The frequency band and rate of scan of Airfield Surface Movement radars are:
a.
b.
c.
d.
5.
333 nm
180 nm
666 nm
360 nm
When flying a Precision Approach Radar in the UK, vertical displacement is based upon:
a.
b.
c.
d.
4.
3.64 milliseconds.
36.4 milliseconds.
3.64 microseconds.
36.4 microseconds.
0.5 nm
2 nm
3 nm
5 nm
A ground based radar with a scanner rotation of 60rpm, a beam width in the order of .5 and a
PRF of 10000pps would be:
a.
b.
c.
d.
an Airfield Surface Movement Indicator with a theoretical range of 8nm.

a Precision Approach Radar.
an Airfield Surface Movement Indicator with a theoretical range of 16nm.
a high resolution Surveillance Approach Radar.
207
Chapter 12
7.
Ground Radar
The SHF band has been selected for Airfield Surface Movement Indicator (ASMI) radars in
preference to the EHF band because:
a.
b.
c.
d.
208
the EHF band causes unacceptable radiation hazards to personnel.

the attenuation caused by precipitation is greater in the EHF band and reduces the
radars effective range and usefulness.
the EHF band is not suitable for the provision of the very narrow beams needed for an
ASMI radar.
target discrimination using the SHF band is better.
Ground Radar
Chapter 12
209
Chapter 12
Ground Radar
ANSWERS
210
Airborne Weather Radar
Chapter 13
CHAPTER THIRTEEN
AIRBORNE WEATHER RADAR
Contents
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
COMPONENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
AWR FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
WEATHER DEPICTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
MONOCHROME CONTROL UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
FUNCTION SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
MAPPING OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
PLOTTING A NAVIGATION FIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
WEATHER OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
COLOUR AWR CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
CALCULATING APPROXIMATE CLOUD HEIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
AWR SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
QUESTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
ANSWERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
211
Chapter 13
212
Chapter 13
INTRODUCTION
Airborne weather radar (AWR) is used to provide pilots with information regarding weather
ahead as well as navigation. Unlike most other systems, it requires interpretation by the pilot
and its use is enhanced by the skill of the user.
The radar information can be displayed on a dedicated unit or shown (on modern aircraft) in
combination with the aircraft route on the EFIS navigation display (ND).
Information on cloud formations or terrain features is displayed on the indicators screen as a
range from the aircraft and a bearing relative to its heading. The presentation can be monochrome
or, on modern systems, in the colours green, yellow, red and/or magenta. In the weather mode
the colours represent the increasing variations in rainfall rate from light to very strong returns;
magenta usually indicates the presence of turbulence associated with intense rainfall. For
ground mapping green indicates light ground returns, yellow medium ground returns and red
heavy ground returns.
COMPONENT PARTS
The airborne equipment comprises:
Transmitter/receiver. (Figure 13.1)
Antenna, which is stabilised in pitch and roll. (Figure 13.1)
Indicator. (Figures 13.1, 13.2, 13.3 and 13.4)
Control unit. (Figure 13.1 and 13.5)
AWR FUNCTIONS
The main functions of an AWR are to:
detect the size of water droplets and hence deduce where the areas of turbulence are
within the cloud
determine the height of cloud tops by tilting the radar beam up or down
map the terrain below the aircraft to provide navigational information and high ground
avoidance
provide a position fix (range and bearing) from a prominent feature
213
Chapter 13
ANTENNA
INT
OFF
GAIN
TGT ALERT
STAB
AZ MK
TILT
SCAN
-15
0
PRE
SET
OFF
ON OFF
ON OFF
ON OFF
ON
15
WEATHER RADAR DIGITAL INDICATOR
WEATHER RADAR
RECEIVER/TRANSMITTER
Figure10.1.
13.1 AWR
AWR Components
Figure
Components.
214
Chapter 13
Figure 13.2 Monochrome Cloud Display And Avoidance Courses

Figure
10.2. Monochrome Cloud Display And Avoidance Courses.
Figure10.3.
13.3 Colour
Colour Weather
Figure
WeatherDisplay
Display.
215
Chapter 13
Figure10.4.
13.4 Terrain
Terrain Mapping
Figure
MappingDisplay
Display.
PLASTECK
LIGHTING
SYSTEM
POWER
SWITCH
OFF
POWER
MARKER
BRILLIANCE
PLASTECK
LIGHTING
SYSTEM
UP
15
TILT
10
ON
STAB
OFF
MARK
BRILL
STANDBY
20
WEA.
CONTRAST
MAN
5
50
15
DOWN
150
CONT
MAP
10
MAN GAIN
TIMEBASE
RANGE
SWITCH
CONTRAST
CONTROL
MANUAL
GAIN
CONTROL
Figure10.5.
13.5 Control
Figure
ControlUnit
Unit.
216
FUNCTION
SWITCH
Chapter 13
Primary Radar
AWR is a primary radar and both of its functions, weather detection and ground mapping, use
the echo principle to depict range and the searchlight principle to depict relative bearing of
the targets. For this purpose range lines and azimuth marker lines are available (see Figure
13.10). It should be noted that the range of ground targets obtained from the display will be the
slant range and the Pythagoras formula should be used to calculate the ground range.
Antenna
The radar beam is produced by a suitable antenna in the nose of the aircraft. The antenna shape
can be parabolic or a flat plate which produce both a conical or pencil-shaped beam as well as
a fan-shaped or cosecant square beam. The type of radiation pattern will depend upon the use;
the pencil beam is used for weather and longer range ( > 60 nm) mapping while the fan-shaped
beam is used for short range mapping. It is usually necessary to tilt the antenna down when
using the radar in the mapping mode. The radar antenna is attitude-stabilised in relation to the
horizontal plane using the aircrafts attitude reference system otherwise the presentation would
become lopsided during manoeuvres.
Radar Beam
The pencil beam used for weather depiction has a width of between 3 and 5. The width of the
radar beam can be calculated using the formula:
Beam width (degrees) = 70 x wavelength / antenna diameter.
Example:
Calculate the beam width of a 3 cm radar using a 45 cm diameter antenna.
Answer: Beam width = 70 x 3 / 45 = 4.7

The beamwidth must be as narrow as possible for efficient target resolution. For example, two
clouds at say 100nm might appear as one large return until, at a closer range, they are shown
correctly in Figure 13.6, as separate entities.
A narrower beam would give better definition but would require a larger antenna which becomes
impractical in an aircraft. Therefore, in order to produce the narrower beams it is essential to use
shorter wavelengths.
217
Chapter 13
Figure
13.6 Effect
Effect of
Figure
10.6.
OfBeam
BeamWidth
Width.
Radar Frequency
The optimum radar frequency is one that has a wavelength comparable to the size of the objects
which we wish to detect, namely the large water droplets and wet hail which in turn are
associated with severe turbulence; these droplets are about 3 cm across.
The typical frequency adopted by most commercial systems is 9375 MHz, +/- 30 MHz as it
produces the best returns from the large water droplets and wet hail found in convective clouds.
With this frequency it is also possible to produce narrow efficient beams. The wavelength, is:

300
m = 3.2 cm
9375
A frequency higher than 9375 MHz would produce returns from smaller droplets and cause
unnecessary clutter whereas a lower frequency would fail to produce sufficient returns to
highlight the area of turbulence.
Beam Coverage
Using the above wavelength of 3.2 cm the following beam widths and coverage are obtained:
Scanner Diameter
30 (76cm)
18 (46cm)
12 (30.5cm)
Beam Width

3
5
7
Coverage at 100nm
32, 000
53, 000
74, 000
Figure 13.7. shows the coverage for a 3 beam increases at various ranges. The area illuminated
by the beam increased with range.
218
Chapter 13
Figure 13.7 Radar Beam Coverage At Varying Ranges

Figure
10.7. Radar Beam Coverage At Varying Ranges.
Water and Ice in the Radome
Some of the energy of the radar waves is absorbed by water and ice as happens in a microwave
oven. If there is water in the antenna radome or ice on the outside of it, the energy absorbed will
cause the water to evaporate and the ice to melt. This means that less energy is transmitted in the
forward direction resulting in weaker returns and a degradation of performance.
WEATHER DEPICTION
The equipment is designed to detect those clouds which are likely to produce turbulence, to
highlight the areas where the turbulence is severest and to indicate safe routes to avoid them,
where possible.
The size and concentration of water droplets in clouds is an indication of the presence of
turbulence (but not of clear air turbulence - CAT). The shorter the distance, in continuous rainfall,
between light and strong returns, the steeper the rainfall gradient and the greater likelihood of
turbulence. Figure 13.8 depicts the reflective levels of different precipitation types. For a given
transmission power a 3 cm wavelength will give the best returns from large water droplets.
Wavelengths of 10 cm and above produce few weather returns.
219
Chapter 13
Figure 13.8 Reflective Levels
Figure 10.8. Reflective Levels.
In colour weather radar systems the weather targets are colour-coded according to the intensity
of the rainfall as follows:
BLACK
GREEN
YELLOW
RED
MAGENTA
Very light or no returns

Light returns
Medium returns
Strong returns
Turbulence
Less than 0.7mm/hr.

0.7 - 4mm/hr.
4 - 12mm/hr.
Greater than 12mm/hr.
Due to rainfall intensity.
On colour systems without Magenta the RED areas may have a CYCLIC function, which causes
them to alternate RED/BLACK in order to draw the pilots attention.
The areas of greatest potential turbulence occur where the colour zones are closest together i.e.
the steepest rainfall gradient. Also turbulence is associated with the following shapes on the
display as shown in Figure 13.9 : U-shapes, Fingers, Scalloped edges and Hooks. These are
areas to avoid.
220
Chapter 13
Figure
13.9a
U-Shape
indicating
Hail Activity
Figure
10.9a.
U-Shape
indicating
Hail
Activity.
Figure
13.9b10.9b.
Finger
indicating
Hail Activity
Figure
Finger
indicating
Hail
Activity.
Figure10.9c.
13.9c Scalloped
Figure
ScallopedEdge
Edgeindicating
indicating
Hail
Activity
Hail Activity.
Figure 10.9d.
13.9d Hook
Figure
Hookindicating
indicatingHail
Hail Activity
Activity.
221
Chapter 13
MONOCHROME CONTROL UNIT

Figure 13.10 illustrates a basic control unit for a monochrome AWR with range scales 20, 50
and 150 nm; its various functions are described below.
Figure10.10.
13.10 Control
Figure
ControlUnit
Unit.
Power Switch
In the ON position the system is energised and the aerial is automatically stabilised in PITCH
and ROLL. A lopsided or asymmetric display probably indicates that the stabilisation has
failed. Switching to the STAB OFF position will lock the scanner to the pitch and roll axes of
the aircraft.
Range Switch
The STANDBY position is to hold the equipment in readiness during periods when the AWR
is not required. Selection of a range position energises the transmitter. Whilst on the ground
the STANDBY position must be maintained until it is certain that personnel and any reflecting
objects, such as hangars, are not in the radars transmitting sector. The radiation can damage
health and the reflections from adjacent structures can damage the equipment. Selection of the
MAPPING beam produces the same hazards. In poor weather conditions switch from STANDBY
to the 0 - 20nm scale as soon as the aircraft is clear of personnel and buildings and check the
weather conditions in the take-off direction. The maximum practical range for weather and for
navigation is in the region of 150 nm.
Tilt Control
This control enables the radar beam to be tilted from the horizontal within 15 UP (+) and
15 DOWN (-). In the horizontal plane the antenna sweeps up to 90 either side of the nose
though a sector of 60 on each side is generally sufficient for the role of weather depiction and
navigation. (See Figure 13.11).
For ground mapping the beam has to be tilted down. In order to observe cloud formations it is
raised to reduce ground returns. It should be noted that due to the curvature of the Earth the tilt
should be higher when the selected range increases or when the aircraft descends to a lower
altitude. Equally, the tilt setting should be lower when the selected range decreases or when the
aircraft climbs to a higher altitude. This can be seen in Figure 13.12.
222
Chapter 13
Figure10.11.
13.11 Projected
Projected Radar
Figure
RadarBeam
Beamand
andTilt
TiltAngle
Angle.
FUNCTION SWITCH
MAP
In the MAP position the radar produces a mapping beam. In order to obtain an even presentation
of surface features, the transmitted power is progressively reduced as distance decreases so that
the power directed to the closest object is minimum. This reduction in power with decreasing
range is a function of the cosecant of the depression angle - hence the name cosecant beam;
another description is fan-shaped beam. Its dimensions are 85 deep in the vertical plane and
3.5 in azimuth. Signal amplification is adjustable via the adjacent MANUAL GAIN knob.
The minimum (15nm) and maximum (60 to 70nm) mapping ranges depend upon the aircrafts
height and type of terrain. To map beyond 70nm the conical pencil beam should be used by
selecting the MANUAL position; this enables the gain to be adjusted, for ground mapping. See
Figure 13.12.
Figure 13.12 AWR Beam Shapes
Figure 10.12. AWR Beam Shapes.

223
Chapter 13
MAN
This is used for cloud detection and mapping between about 70 and 150nm and selects the
conical pencil shaped beam; MANUAL GAIN for signal amplification is operative with this
selection.
WEA
This selects the conical pencil beam (Figure 13.11.) and is the usual position for observing cloud
formations; MANUAL GAIN control is now INOPERATIVE. Instead a facility called Swept
Gain, Sensitive Time Control or Automatic Gain Control (AGC) is automatically available.
This system of circuits decreases the gain for echoes received from the ever decreasing ranges
of clouds. It operates up to about 25nm and ensures that the intensity (brilliance) of display
of a particular cloud is independent of range. Thus a small cloud at 5nm does not give an
increasingly stronger return than a larger and more dangerous cloud at 20nm; all clouds up to
about 25nm are thus compared on equal terms.
CONT
Figure 13.13. is a cloud formation presentation with CONT (CONTOUR) selected for a black and
white display; the black holes indicate dangerous areas of concentrated rainfall and potential
turbulence. Figure 13.14. shows the same cloud formation with CONT deselected. The position,
therefore, is used to indicate storm intensity, turbulence and areas to avoid.
The degree of danger depends upon the steepness of the rainfall gradient. Therefore, the
narrower the paint surrounding a black hole, the greater the danger from turbulence; hooks,
scalloped edges, finger protrusions and U-shapes are also indicators of potential areas of severe
turbulence. The Swept Gain facility (or automatic gain control) is also in operation in the CONT
position and ensures that a displays intensity does not vary as range decreases.
Figure 10.13. Typical Cloud Display With

Contour On.
Contour On.
Figure
13.1310.13.
TypicalTypical
Cloud Display
With Contour
Figure
Cloud Display
With On
Figure
13.1410.14.
TypicalTypical
Cloud Display
With Contour
Figure
Cloud Display
With Off
224
Figure 10.14. Typical

ContourCloud
Off. Display With
Contour Off.
Chapter 13
MAPPING OPERATION
For the basic monochrome AWR with a maximum range of 150nm, the cosecant (fan-shape)
beam is used for mapping up to about 70nm by selecting MAP. To map beyond 70 nm, the
pencil beam is used by selecting the MAN position; both have manual gain control in order to
improve the radar information obtainable from the presentation.
Adjust the downward tilt for the best target presentation. Little energy reflects from a calm
sea, fine sand, and flat terrain. Therefore coastlines, built up areas, skyscrapers, bridges and
power stations etc. will give very bright returns. Ice has jagged edges which reflect but snow is
a poor reflector and masks ground features. Flight over high ground can produce a false image
of a series of lakes due to the radar shadow caused by the mountains/hills. (Figure 13.15).
Hill shadow (may give a false impression of water)
Hill shadow (may give a false

impression of water)
Figure 13.15 Hill Shadow
Figure 10.15. Hill Shadow.
225
Chapter 13
PLOTTING A NAVIGATION FIX

The range of a ground feature will be its slant range. For example a feature almost immediately
below the aircraft (i.e. ground range approximately 0nm) will appear on the screen at a range
approximately equivalent to the aircrafts height. The Pythagoras theorem is therefore needed
to convert slant ranges to approximate ground distances. A fix may be obtained by plotting a
QTE and range from a prominent terrain feature. (Figure 13.16.)
Figure 13.16 0 - 25 Scale
Figure 10.16. 0 - 25 Scale.

An aircraft at 42,560ft is heading 216 (M); variation is 17E
Calculate the QTE and range to be plotted from the centre of the island as shown on the AWR
screen.
True heading
True bearing TO island
QTE to plot
Ground Range (nm)

=
=
=
=
=
216 - 17 =
199 - 30 =
169 + 180 =
(S - H ) =
11 nm
199
169
349
169 - 49) = 120
[ S = slant range (nm) and H = height (nm) ]
WEATHER OPERATION
Avoiding Thunderstorms
Select maximum range to detect weather formations in good time and adjust the TILT to remove
ground returns. If the storm system is extensive make an early track adjustment, in consultation
with ATC, to avoid it. If this is not possible, as the clouds get nearer select the lower ranges
and CONT and determine the best track to avoid potential turbulence. Ensure that short term
alterations of heading steer the aircraft away from the worst areas and not deeper into them. To
achieve this, constant switching between short, medium and longer ranges is necessary in order
to maintain a complete picture of the storm system.
Shadow Area
There is also the danger of not being able to map the area behind heavy rain where no radar
waves will penetrate; this will leave a shadow area which may contain severe weather.
226
Chapter 13
Height of Storm Cloud

The height of a storm cloud can be ascertained by adjusting the tilt until the radar returns
from it just disappear. The height of the top of the cloud can be calculated by using the 1 in 60
rule as shown in appendix A.
It is also worth noting that a thunderstorm may not be detected if the tilt setting is set at too
high an angle.
Height Ring
With the older AWR systems where the conical beam is produced by a dish antenna there is
always some vertical overspill of energy which is reflected back to the aircraft and appears as a
height ring, which roughly indicates the aircrafts height. It also indicates that the equipment
is serviceable when there is no weather ahead.
COLOUR AWR CONTROLS

The controls for a colour AWR would be similar to that for the monochrome unit in terms of
range, tilt and gain but may have the following additional features such as Wx, Wx + T,
Wx(var). These are for Weather, Weather plus Turbulence and Weather with variable gain
control. Other sets may have WxA control which stands for Weather Alert and would give a
flashing display of the areas associated with turbulence. There may also be available a Contour
Intensity control to enable adjustment of the display for optimum presentation. The latest AWR
controls are activated by push ON/OFF switches located around the colour screen and include:
Test
This displays the colour pattern for pre-flight
serviceability check.
Figure 13.17
Typical Radar System Test
Pattern for PP1 Indicators
Figure 10.17. Typical Radar System Test Pattern for
Hold
PP1 Indicators.
This allows the display to be frozen so that storm movements can be assessed. When a storm
is located, at say 100nm, HOLD is selected and a constant heading maintained. HOLD and WX
then appear alternately on the screen. After two or three minutes deselect the HOLD facility;
this brings back the current display and the storm position is seen to move from its held position
to its actual position, thereby indicating its movement relative to the aircraft.
Tgt Alert
This operates in conjunction with the WEA facility and alerts a pilot of a storm return of contour
strength. When TGT ALERT is selected and no contouring clouds are present the screen shows a
yellow T in a red square, (screen top right). If a contouring cloud is detected within 60 to 160nm
and +/- 15 of heading, the yellow symbol TGT, in a red square, flashes on and off once a second
instead of the T.
Fault
This is controlled by a fault monitoring circuit and FAULT flashes on the screen if there is a
power or transmitter failure.
227
Chapter 13
CALCULATING APPROXIMATE CLOUD HEIGHT
Figure 13.18 Finding Cloud Height using 1 in 60 rule

Figure
10.18 Finding Cloud Height using 1 in 60 rule.
To determine the altitude of the cloud tops, move the tilt until the returns from the clouds just
disappear from the screen. The lower edge of the beam is now just clear of the tops of the cloud.
Note the TILT angle and the range of the cloud.
Example: Determine the altitude of the cloud tops given: range 45nm, tilt angle 3.5,
beamwidth 5 and aircraft at FL350.
The angle measured from the horizontal which gives the cloud tops is along the lower edge of
the beam, the TILT gives the centre of the beam, so the angle required is:
TILT

BEAMWIDTH
2
Using the 1:60 rule to find the height of the cloud tops above the aircraft:
Height = TILT BEAMWIDTH

2

Range
60
x 6076 feet
Range
x 100 feet
This can be simplified to:
Height = TILT BEAMWIDTH

2

The height (above the aircraft) is: (3.5 5/2 ) x 45 x 100 = 4,500 feet
Giving an altitude of the cloud tops of 39,500 ft
Note: using the formula as given and taking UPTILT as positive and DOWNTILT as negative will yield
either a positive or negative number which when applied to the altitude of the aircraft will give the correct
altitude of the cloud tops.
228
Chapter 13
AWR SUMMARY
Components
Tx / Rx, antenna, indicator, control unit.
Functions
Turbulence, navigation
Principle of
Opereation

Echo for range, sweep for relative bearing.

Pencil beam for weather and long range (>60nm) mapping.
Cosecant beam for short range. Antenna attitude stabilised.
Beam width dependent on antenna size.
Beam width = 70 x / diameter.
Effect of beamwidth on resolution.
Frequency of 9375 MHz best for large water droplets / hail
Weather

Turbulence where rainfall gradient is steepest

Few returns from wavelength of >10 cm
Colours in order: black, green, yellow, red, magenta
Beware Us, fingers, scallops and hooks
Mono Control Unit

Power/Stab On
Stab Off
Range
Tilt
MAP
MAN
WEA
CONT
Mapping
Tilt down for best target presentation. Beware hill shadows.
Navigation
QTE from prominent feature. Use slant range when near (< 3 x Ht )
Weather Operation

Adjust tilt for best weather picture.

Too high tilt will miss TS
Beware shadow area.
Colour AWR
Use of controls - Wx, Wx+ T, Wx(Var), WxA, Hold, Tgt Alert
- antenna attitude stabilised in pitch and roll

- antenna locked to aircraft axes
- Standby, selections up to about 150 nm
- 15. Tilt up for increased range or lower altitude.
- fan shaped beam. Use up to 60nm
- Manual gain with pencil beam to map > 60nm
- Pencil beam with AGC
- Black holes indicate turbulence.
229
Chapter 13
230
Chapter 13
QUESTIONS
1.
A frequency used by airborne weather radar is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
An airborne weather radar is required to detect targets up to a maximum range of 200 nm.
Ignoring pulse length and flyback in the CRT calculate the maximum PRR.
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
8800 MHz
9.375 MHz
9375 MHz
9375 Mhz
in
SHF
UHF
SHF
SHF
10nm
10nm
8nm
8nm
030 (T)
075 (T)
075 (T)
255 (T)
The correct sequence of colours of a colour Airborne Weather Radar as returns get stronger is:
a.
b.
c.
d.
7.
primary
secondary
secondary
primary
of radar operating on a frequency of
A prominent island is identified on the 30 right bearing line and the 10 nm range marker of an
airborne weather radar. If the heading is 045 (T) and the aircraft is at FL360 what range and
bearing should be plotted in order to obtain a fix?
a.
b.
c.
d.
6.
20 to 25
60 to 70
100 to 150
150 to 200
Airborne Weather Radar is an example

the
band.
a.
b.
c.
d.
5.
405 pps
810 pps
1500 pps
750 pps
Using airborne weather radar the weather beam should be used in preference to the fan shaped
beam for mapping in excess of _______ nm:
a.
b.
c.
d.
4.
8800 MHz
9.375 GHz
93.75 Ghz
1213 Mhz
red
yellow
green
red
yellow
green
yellow
green
green.
red.
red.
yellow.
A false indication of water may be given by the AWR display when:

a.
b.
c.
d.
flying over land with the Land/Sea switch in the Sea position.
flying over mountainous terrain.
there is cloud and precipitation between the aircraft and a cloud target.
attempting to use the mapping beam for mapping in excess of 50 nm.
231
Chapter 13
8.
An aircraft heading 017 (T) has a small island showing on the AWR at 45nm range on the 60
left azimuth line. To obtain a fix from this information you should plot:
a.
b.
c.
d.
9.
An aircraft heading 137 (M) has a small island showing on the AWR at 45nm range on the 30
left azimuth line. Local variation is 12 W. To obtain a fix from this information you should
plot:
a.
b.
c.
d.
10.
a pencil/weather beam from 70 nm to 150 nm.

a cosecant/fan shaped beam which is effective to 150 nm.
a pencil/weather beam with a maximum range of 70 nm.
a cosecant/ fan shaped beam effective 50 nm to 70 nm.
An Airborne Weather Radar system uses a frequency of 9 GHz because:

a.
b.
c.
d.
13.
8800 MHz because gives the best returns from all types of precipitation
13300 MHz
9375 MHz because it gives the best returns from rainfall associated with Cb
9.375 GHz because this frequency is best for detecting aircraft in flight.
The mapping mode of Airborne Weather Radar utilises:

a.
b.
c.
d.
12.
Range 45 nm and QTE 095 from the centre of the island.

Airborne weather radar operates on a frequency of:

a.
b.
c.
d.
11.
range 45nm and QTE 060 from the centre of the island.
it has a short wavelength so producing higher frequency returns.

the short wavelength allows signals to be reflected from cloud water droplets of all
sizes.
the wavelength is such that reflections are obtained only from the larger water
droplets.
the frequency penetrates clouds quite easily enabling good mapping of ground features
in the mapping mode.
The antenna of an Airborne Weather Radar is stabilised:

a.
b.
c.
d.
232
in pitch, roll and yaw.

in pitch and roll.
in pitch and roll whether the stabilisation is on or off.
in pitch and roll but only when 0 tilt has been selected.
14.
The centre of a small island is identified at the intersection of the 60 left bearing line and
15nm range arc of an airborne weather radar. If the aircrafts heading and height are 035 (M)
and 42,500ft what QTE and range should be plotted in order to obtain a fix from the island?
(variation is 20W)
a.
b.
c.
d.
15.
175
135
135
155
15nm
15nm
13nm
14nm
The colours used to denote variations in rainfall rate on an Airborne Weather Radar screen
are........... for very light or no returns, ............... for light returns,........... for medium returns and
............ for strong returns.
a.
b.
c.
d.
16.
Chapter 13
black, yellow, green, magenta.

black, green, yellow, magenta
grey, green, yellow, red.
black, green, yellow, red.
The radar in an aircraft at FL370 detects a cloud at 60 nm. The cloud disappears when the tilt
is selected to 2 UP. If the beamwidth of the radar is 6, at what altitude are the tops of the
clouds?
a.
b.
c.
d.
6,000 ft
31,000 ft
43,000 ft
49,000 ft
233
Chapter 13
ANSWERS
234
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Secondary Surveillance Radar

(SSR)
Chapter 14
CHAPTER FOURTEEN
SECONDARY SURVEILLANCE RADAR (SSR)
Contents
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
ADVANTAGES OF SSR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
SSR DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
SSR FREQUENCIES AND TRANSMISSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
MODE C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
SSR OPERATING PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
SPECIAL CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
DISADVANTAGES OF SSR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
MODE S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
BENEFITS OF MODE S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
APPENDIX 11 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
LEVELS OF MODE S TRANSPONDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
DOWNLINK AIRCRAFT PARAMETERS (DAPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
FUTURE EXPANSION OF MODE S SURVEILLANCE SERVICES . . . . . . . . . . . 246
SSR SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
QUESTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
ANSWERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
235
Chapter 14
236

(SSR)

(SSR)
Chapter 14
INTRODUCTION
Primary radar relies on the reception of a reflected pulse i.e. the echo of the transmitted pulse.
Secondary radar, on the other hand, receives pulses transmitted by the target in response to
interrogation pulses. Secondary surveillance radar (SSR) is one type of secondary radar system;
DME is another such system that be discussed in chapter 16.
Both Primary and Secondary Surveillance radars are used to track the progress of an aircraft.
Primary radar provides better bearing and range information of an aircraft than SSR but its
biggest disadvantage is the lack of positive, individual aircraft identification; this is required for
adequate safe control by ATC, particularly in crowded airspace. Primary radars also require
higher transmitter power outputs for the two-way journey of the single pulses.
SSR requires an aircraft to be fitted with a transmitter/receiver, called a transponder. The pilot
will set a four-figure code allocated by ATC and the transponder will transmit information
automatically, in pulse coded form, when it is interrogated by the ground station called the
interrogator. The transmissions are therefore only one way from transmitter to receiver.
ADVANTAGES OF SSR
SSR has the following advantages over primary radar:
requires much less transmitting power to provide coverage up to 200 to 250nm.
is not dependent on an aircrafts echoing area or aspect.
gives clutter free responses as it is does not rely on returning reflected pulses.
positively identifies an aircrafts primary response by displaying its code and call sign
alongside.
indicates an aircrafts track history, speed, altitude and destination.
can indicate on a controllers screen that an aircraft has an emergency, has lost radio
communications or is being hi-jacked.
Thus when SSR is used in conjunction with primary radar, the advantages of both systems are
realised. The two radars are therefore usually co-located as shown in Figures 14.1 and 14.2.
SSR DISPLAY
The SSR information is displayed in combination with the primary radar information on the
same screen as shown in Figure 14.3. This includes the callsign or flight number, pressure
altitude or flight level, ground speed and destination.
237

(SSR)
Chapter 14
Figure 14.1
SSR aerial mounted on top of a 23cm Primary Radar aerial.
Figure 11.1. SSR aerial mounted on top of a 23cm

Primary Radar aerial.
Figure 14.2 Primary and Secondary Radar used for ATC
Figure 11.2. Primary and Secondary Radar used for ATC.

238

(SSR)
Chapter 14
Figure
11.3.
PositionsofofAircraft
Aircraftininthe
the
London
TMA.
Figure
14.3AARadar
RadarDisplay
Display Showing
Showing Positions
London
TMA
239

(SSR)
Chapter 14
SSR FREQUENCIES AND TRANSMISSIONS
Figure
11.4.
theUHF
UHF
Band.
Figure
14.4 SSR
SSR operates
operates ininthe
Band
The ground station transmits/ interrogates on 1030MHz and receives on 1090MHz. The
aircraft receives on 1030MHz and transmits/transponds on 1090MHz. The SSR ground antenna
transmits a narrow beam in the horizontal plane while the aircraft transmits omni-directionally
i.e. the radiation pattern is circular around the aircraft.
MODES
The aircraft is interrogated from the ground station by a pre-determined series of pulses on
the carrier frequency of 1030MHz; its transponder then transmits a coded reply on a carrier
frequency of 1090MHz. The two main modes of operation are:
Mode A - an interrogation to identify an aircraft
Mode C - an interrogation to obtain an automatic height read-out of an aircraft.
To differentiate between
transmitted.
the interrogations three pulses (P1, P2 and P3) are always
The spacing between P1 and P2 is fixed at 2sec. The spacing between P1 and P3 is 8sec for
a Mode A and 21sec for a Mode C interrogation.
240

(SSR)
Chapter 14
P1
P3
P2
2s
Mode
determined by
spacing
Figure 14.5 Modes
Figure 11.5. Modes.
C1 A1 C2
A2 C4 A4
B1 D1 B2 D2 B4 D4
1.45
s
20.3 s
4.35 s
Figure 14.6 SSR Reply Pulse Patterns
Figure 11.6. SSR Reply Pulse Patterns.

The aircraft transponder will reply correctly to a Mode A or C interrogation provided the pilot
has correctly selected the mode and code allocated by ATC. On receiving a valid interrogation,
the aircraft transponder transmits two framing pulses, F1 and F2, 20.3sec apart. Between the
framing pulses there are 12 usable information pulses (pulse X is for Mode B which is at present
unused). A pulse can be transmitted or not, i.e. there are 212 = 4096 possible combinations of
pulses or codes which are numbered 0000 to 7777; the figures 8 and 9 are not available.
A further pulse called the Special Position Identification (SPI) pulse may be transmitted together
with the information pulses when the Ident button on the pilots transponder is pressed,
usually at ATCs request. This pulse is after the last framing pulse and will be automatically
and continuously transmitted for about 20 seconds. It produces a distinctive display so that a
controller can pick out a particular aircraft by asking the pilot to Squawk Ident.
241

(SSR)
Chapter 14
Figure 14.7 Transponder Controls and Indicators
Figure 11.7. Transponder Controls and Indicators.
MODE C
When the aircraft receives a Mode C interrogation the transponder will produce an ICAO
determined code that corresponds to its height, referenced to 1013.2mb, regardless of the
pressure setting on the altimeter and the code selected on the transponder. The mode C code
is determined by an encoder which is mechanically actuated by the altimeters aneroid capsule
and is thus totally independent of the altimeters pressure setting.
The system provides Automatic Altitude Telemetering up to 128,000ft, with an output change
(based upon 50ft increments or decrements) every 100ft and provides the controller with the
aircrafts Flight Level or Altitude e.g. If an aircraft is flying at an allocated level of FL65, then
065 will be displayed on the screen. If the aircraft now drifts downwards, as it passes from 6450ft
to 6445ft the coded transmission changes and results in 064 being indicated at the controllers
consol.
SSR OPERATING PROCEDURE

Pilots shall:
if proceeding from an area where a specific code has been assigned to the aircraft by an
ATS Unit, maintain that code setting unless otherwise instructed
select or reselect codes, or switch off the equipment when airborne only when instructed by an ATS Unit
acknowledge code setting instructions by reading back the code to be set
select Mode C simultaneously with Mode A unless otherwise instructed by an ATS

unit
when reporting vertical levels under routine procedures or when requested by ATC,
read the current altimeter reading to the nearest 100ft. This is to assist in the verification of Mode C data transmitted by the aircraft.
Note 1: If, on verification, there is a difference of more than 300ft between the level readout and
the reported level, the pilot will normally be instructed to switch off Mode C. If independent
switching of Mode C is not possible the pilot will be instructed to select Code 0000 to indicate transponder
malfunction. (Note: this is the ICAO specification)
Note 2: A standard of 200ft is applied in the UK and other countries.
242

(SSR)
Chapter 14
SPECIAL CODES
Special Purpose Codes
Some codes are reserved internationally for special purposes and should be selected as
follows:
7700 To indicate an emergency condition, this code should be selected as soon as is

practicable after declaring an emergency situation, and having due regard for the overriding importance of controlling the aircraft and containing the emergency. However,
if the aircraft is already transmitting a discrete code and receiving an air traffic service,
that code may be retained at the discretion of either the pilot or controller.
7600
7500 To indicate unlawful interference with the planned operation of the flight, unless circumstances warrant the operation of code 7700.
2000 To provide recognition of an aircraft which has not received any instructions
from ATC units to operate the transponder e.g when entering the United Kingdom
airspace from an adjacent region where the operation of transponders has not been
required.
To indicate a radio failure.
Conspicuity Code in the UK

When operating at and above FL100 pilots shall select code 7000 and Mode C except:
when given a different setting by an ATS unit
when circumstances require the use of one of the special purpose codes.
When operating below FL100 pilots should select code 7000 and Mode C except as above.
MODE C should be operated with all of the above codes.
DISADVANTAGES OF SSR
Air Traffic Services in Europe have increased their reliance on SSR (which provides data on
an aircrafts position, identification, altitude, speed and track) but the existing civil Mode A
(identification) and Mode C (altitude reporting) system is reaching the limits of its operational
capability. It has the following disadvantages:
Garbling
This is caused by overlapping replies from two or more transponders on nearly the same
bearing from the ground station and within a distance of 1.7 nm from each other measured on
a line from the antenna. [The reply pulses from the aircraft are transmitted over a period of 20.3
s which relates to a distance of just under 1.7 nm in terms of radar miles.]
Fruiting
This is interference at one interrogator caused by replies from a transponder responding to
interrogations from another.
Availability of codes
Only 4096 identification codes are available in Mode A.
243

(SSR)
Chapter 14
MODE S
Mode S is being introduced in order to overcome the limitations of the present modes A and
C. S stands for Selective addressing. The new system has to be compatible with the existing
modes A and C so that it can be used to supplement the present system.
The main features of the new mode S are:
Availability of codes
The aircraft address code will be made up of a 24 bit code. This means that the system will have
over 16,700,000 discrete codes available for allocation to individual aircraft on a permanent basis.
The code will be incorporated into the aircraft at manufacture and remain with it throughout
its life.
Data link
The system will be supported by a ground data network and will have the ability to handle
uplink/downlink data messages over the horizon. Mode S can provide ground-to- air, air-toground and air-to-air data exchange using communications protocols.
Reduction of Voice Communications
It is intended that the majority of the present RTF messages will be exchanged via the data
link. Messages to and from an aircraft will be exchanged via the aircrafts CDU resulting in a
reduction in voice communications.
Height Readout
This will be in 25ft increments and more data on an aircrafts present and intended performance
will be available to the ground controllers.
Interrogation Modes
Mode S operates in the following modes:
All Call - to elicit replies for acquisition of mode S transponders.
Broadcast - to transmit information to all mode S transponders (no replies are elicited).
Selective - for surveillance of, and communication with, individual mode S transponders. For each interrogation, a reply is elicited only from the transponder uniquely addressed by the interrogation.
Intermode - mode A/C/S All Call would be used to elicit replies for surveillance
of mode A/C transponders and for the acquisition of mode S transponders.
244

(SSR)
Chapter 14
BENEFITS OF MODE S
Unambiguous Aircraft Identification
This will be achieved as each aircraft will be assigned a unique address from one of almost 17
million which together with automatic flight identity reporting allows unambiguous aircraft
identification. This unique address in each interrogation and reply also permits the inclusion
of data link messages to or from a particular aircraft i.e. selective calling will be possible in
addition to All Call messages.
Improved Integrity of Surveillance Data
The superior resolution ability of Mode S plus selective interrogation will:
eliminate synchronous garble.

resolve the effects of over interrogation.
simplify aircraft identification in the case of radar reflections.
Improved Air Picture Tracking and Situation Awareness

The radar controller will be presented with a better current air picture and improved horizontal
and vertical tracking due to unambiguous aircraft identification, enhanced tracking techniques
and the increased downlink data from the aircraft.
Alleviation of Modes A/C Code Shortage
The current shortage of SSR codes in the EUR region will be eliminated by the unique aircraft
address ability of Mode S.
Reduction of R/T Workload
Due to the progressive introduction of Mode S, R/T between a controller and an aircraft will be
reduced; e.g. code verification procedures will not be required.
Improvements to Short Term Conflict Alert (STCA)
The ability of Mode S to eliminate synchronous garbling, to produce a more stable speed
vector and to acquire aircraft altitude reporting in 25ft increments (if supported by compatible
barometric avionics) will improve safety.
In addition, access to the downlinked aircrafts
vertical rate will produce early, accurate knowledge of aircraft manoeuvres.
Note: Whilst the ground system will benefit from altitude reporting in 25ft intervals there is no intention
to change the existing practice of displaying altitude information to the controller in 100ft increments.
245

(SSR)
Chapter 14
APPENDIX 11 A
[NOT STATED IN JAA OBJECTIVES]
LEVELS OF MODE S TRANSPONDERS

ICAO Aeronautical Telecommunications, Vol. IV, Annex 10 stipulates that Mode S transponders
shall conform to one of four levels of capability:
Level 1 This is the basic transponder and permits surveillance based on Mode A/C as well as
on Mode S. With a Mode S aircraft address it comprises the minimum features for compatible
operation with Mode S interrogators. It has no data link capability and will not be used by
international air traffic.
Level 2 This has the same capabilities as Level 1 and permits standard length data link
communication from ground to air and air to ground. It includes automatic aircraft identification
reporting. This is the minimum level permitted for international flights.
Level 3 This has the same capabilities as Level 2 but permits extended data link communications
from the ground to the aircraft.
Level 4 This has the same capabilities as Level 3 but allows extended data link communications
from the aircraft to the ground.
DOWNLINK AIRCRAFT PARAMETERS (DAPS)

Basic Functionality
Automatic reporting of Flight Identity (callsign used in flight).

Transponder Capability Report.
Altitude reporting in 25ft intervals (subject to aircraft availability).
Flight Status (airborne/on the ground).
Enhanced Functionality
Magnetic heading.
Speed (IAS/TAS/Mach No).
Roll Angle (system acquisition of start and stop of turn).
Track Angle rate (system acquisition of start and stop of turn).
Vertical Rate (barometric rate of climb/descent or, preferably baro-inertial).
True Track Angle/Ground Speed.
FUTURE EXPANSION OF MODE S SURVEILLANCE SERVICES

When technical and institutional issues have been resolved the down linking of an aircrafts
intentions are recommended for inclusion:
246
Selected Flight Level/Altitude.

Selected Magnetic Heading.
Selected course.
Selected IAS/Mach No.

(SSR)
Chapter 14
SSR SUMMARY
SSR

Frequencies

Requires Transponder in aircraft and Interrogator at ground station.

Advantages over primary radar.
Aerial on top of primary radar.
Displays callsign, pressure altitude or FL, groundspeed, destination.
Ground station transmits narrow beam at 1030 MHz and receives at
1090 MHz.
Aircraft receives at 1030 MHz and transmits omni- directionally at 1090
MHz. (in the UHF band).
Modes/Replies
Mode A
For identity (8 s interrogation pulse spacing) 12 reply pulses give

4096 combinations (20.6 s spacing between framing pulses). Extra
pulse (SPI) for squawk Ident (for 20 s)
Mode C
For automatic pressure-altitude (21 s interrogation spacing).

Transmitted and displayed every 100ft ( 50ft from given level) Switch
off if difference > 300ft (200ft UK)
Special codes

7700 - emergency,
7600 - radio failure,
7500 hijacking
2000 - when no instructions given,
7000 - conspicuity code in UK.
Disadvantages

Garbling - overlapping replies if aircraft <1.7nm apart of SSR

Fruiting - interference caused by replies to other interrogation.
Limited codes (4096), Ghosts, Shielding.
Mode S Features

Selective addressing. Nearly 17 million codes from 24-bit address.

Data link air-to-ground, ground-to-air, air-to-air.
Height readout in increments of 25ft
.
Interrogation modes

All Call - mode S

Broadcast (no reply)
Selective calling (unique aircraft address)
Intermode - A/C/S All call
Benefits of mode S

Unambiguous aircraft identification.

Improved surveillance (eliminates garble, resolves over- interrogation
and reflections).
Improved situation awareness for radar controller.
No code shortage.
Reduced R/T.
Improved short term conflict alert.
247
Chapter 14
248

(SSR)

(SSR)
Chapter 14
QUESTIONS
1.
The special SSR codes are as follows: emergency ______, radio failure _______, entering UK
airspace _______, unlawful interference with the conduct of the flight ________.
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
c.
d.
primary
primary
secondary
secondary
pulse
pulse
FM
pulse
SHF
UHF
SHF
UHF
it causes a momentary distinctive display to appear on the controllers screen.

an identification pulse is automatically and continuously transmitted for 20 seconds,
4.35 sec before the last framing pulse.
4.35 sec after the last framing pulse.
4.35 sec after the last framing pulse.
100 ft
300 ft
50 ft
300 ft
Regional QNH
1013 HPa
1013 HPa
Regional QNH
The SSR code which is appropriate for a UK FIR (inbound. crossing, where no other
squawk has been allocated is:
a.
b.
c.
d.
6.
7500.
2000.
7700.
7700.
When using SSR the ground controller will ask the pilot to cancel mode C if there is a discrepancy
of more than ______ feet between the altitude detected by the radar from the reply pulses and
the altitude reported by the pilot read from an altitude with the subscale set to _______:
a.
b.
c.
d.
5.
2000;
7500;
2000;
2000;
If the SSR transponder IDENT button is pressed

a.
b.
4.
7600;
7600;
7500;
7600;
Secondary Surveillance Radar is a form of ________ radar with type emissions operating in
the _________ band.
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
7700;
7700;
7600;
7500;
7500
7600
7700
2000
Secondary radars require:

a.
b.
c.
d.
a target which will respond to the interrogation, and this target will always be an
aircraft.
a target which will respond to the interrogation, and this target will always be ground
based.
a target which will respond to the interrogation, and this target may be either an aircraft
or a ground based transponder.
a quiescent target.
249

(SSR)
Chapter 14
ANSWERS
250
Traffic Collision and Avoidance System

(TCAS)
Chapter 15
CHAPTER FIFTEEN
TRAFFIC COLLISION and AVOIDANCE SYSTEM (TCAS)
Contents
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
TCAS I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
TCAS II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
PRINCIPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
AIRCRAFT EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
SYSTEM INTERCONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
SYNTHETIC VOICE PRIORITISATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
TRAFFIC ADVISORIES (TAs) RESOLUTION ADVISORIES (RAs). . . . . . . . . . . 257
PROXIMATE TRAFFIC/OTHER TRAFFIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
DATA TAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
OFF SCALE TRAFFIC ADVISORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
TCAS DISPLAYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
COMBINED TCAS AND SSR CONTROL PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
TCAS TRAFFIC ADVISORIES ON ELECTRONIC VSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
TCAS PREVENTATIVE RESOLUTION ADVISORIES ON ELECTRONIC VSI . . . . 262
TCAS CORRECTIVE RESOLUTION ADVISORY ON ELECTRONIC VSI . . . . . . . 263
TCAS TEST FORMAT ON ELECTRONIC VSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
NO BEARING ADVISORIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
ACTION TO BE TAKEN ON RECEIVING TAs AND RAs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
STANDARD R/T PHRASEOLOGY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
QUESTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
ANSWERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
251
Chapter 15
252

(TCAS)

(TCAS)
Chapter 15
INTRODUCTION
Todays higher traffic densities and greater speed differences have generated a need for an
Airborne Collision Avoidance System. Although ICAO named it ACAS it is usually known as
Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance System (TCAS). The system is designed to provide an
additional margin of safety and keep commercial aircraft clear of conflict, independently of Air
Traffic Control. An aircraft must carry a transponder and have the facility to interrogate other
aircraft transponders. Of the four proposed systems, TCAS I, II, III and IV, TCAS I and II fulfill
present and future requirements. Aircraft built to carry more than 30 passengers must have an
approved system for flight in the USA.
TCAS I
TCAS I is a first generation collision avoidance system and simply warns the crew of other
traffic in the vicinity of their aircraft. It will detect and display range and approximate relative
bearing. If the TCAS display aircraft and the intruder are carrying Mode C relative altitude
will also be displayed. It encourages flight crew to look for the conflicting traffic by generating
visual and aural warnings - TRAFFIC ADVISORIES (TAs):
Traffic, Traffic
It does not give any resolution advisory information. i.e a course of action to follow. The
FAA requires smaller aircraft, with 30 or fewer seats, to carry TCAS I.
TCAS II
TCAS II detects intruders in the TCAS aircrafts vicinity, assesses the collision risk and presents
warnings to the crew in the form of TAs and Resolution Advisories (RAs) e.g.:
Climb Increase Climb Descend Increase Descent Monitor Vertical Speed
Thus, RAs offer manoeuvring advice in the vertical plane to resolve conflict. If your aircraft
and the intruder both have Mode S data-link transponders the system will co-ordinate the RAs
to provide complimentary vertical avoidance instructions. The rest of this chapter deals with
TCAS II only and discusses both visual and audible TAs and RAs in detail.
PRINCIPLE
TCAS II operates on the secondary radar principle using the normal SSR frequencies of
1030MHz and 1090MHz, but in an air to air role. Using this principle the TCAS system creates
two protective three dimensional bubbles around the TCAS equipped aircraft (Figure 15.1.)
253

(TCAS)
Chapter 15
RA
TA
Figure 15.1
Figure
4.1.
AIRCRAFT EQUIPMENT
For aircraft to be visible to a TCAS equipped aircraft they must have a minimum of A Mode
A Transponder. If the transponder is switched off, or is unserviceable, the intruding aircraft
are invisible to the TCAS equipment and a collision risk exists. Mode A transponders transmit
no height information and therefore the information available to the TCAS equipment is two
dimensional only and therefore can only give TAs.
Mode C Transponder equipped intruders broadcast height information to the TCAS
equipment and the system becomes three dimensional and can now give both TAs and RAs.
Mode S Transponder TCAS equipped intruders as well as broadcasting height information
allow a discrete data link to be established between them. This data link will allow avoidance
manoeuvres to be mutually resolved.
OPERATION
The range of an intruder is determined by measuring the time lapse between transmission of
an interrogation and receiving the response. (Radar Principle). The bearing of an intruder is
determined by a directional antenna (Figure 4.2). Because of the wavelengths involved and the
necessarily small size of the antennas bearing resolution is the least accurate parameter. TCAS
never offers collision avoidance commands in the horizontal plane; only in the form of climb or
descend.
The relative height of an intruder is found by comparing its Mode C height with the TCAS
equipped aircrafts height.
254

(TCAS)
Chapter 15
Figure
Determination.
Figure4.2.
15.2TCAS
TCASBearing
Bearing Determination
SYSTEM INTERCONNECTIONS
Figure 15.3 shows a TCAS installation in a Commuter/Feeder airliner. The heart of the system is
the TCAS receiver-transmitter-computer unit controlled by a combined ATC/SSR/TCAS control
panel. The TCAS displays in this installation are a dedicated TCAS Plan Position Indicator
(PPI), and the red and green sectors on the Vertical Speed Tape of the Primary Flight Display
(PFD) Electronic Attitude Director Indicator (EADI). A synthetic voice issues TCAS commands
over the intercom system.
The TCAS upper and lower antennas are directional while the Mode S antennas are omnidirectional.
The TCAS also has feeds from the Radio Altimeter to modify the RAs received when in close
proximity to the ground i.e. there are no instructions given at all when the aircraft is below 400ft
agl, no descent RAs are given below 1000 ft agl and no increase rate of descent commands below
1400 ft agl. The system will also take aircraft configuration / performance into consideration
when deciding an avoiding action. When the aircraft has gear and / or flap deployed its climb
performance will be poor so TCAS will avoid giving climbing demands for a RA.
255

(TCAS)
Chapter 15
Figure
Installation.
Figure4.3.
15.3 TCAS
TCAS Aircraft Installation
SYNTHETIC VOICE PRIORITISATION
Modern aircraft use a synthetic voice to give warning advice to the crew. The voice is used for
various systems including Windshear detection, Ground Proximity Warnings, including height
call outs, and TCAS. The synthetic voice is prioritised as follows:
1. Stall Identification/Stall Prevention. (Stick Shake/Stick Push). The synthetic voice is inhibited
during stick shake/stick push operation.
2. Windshear. The detection of performance decreasing windshear takes first priority with the
synthetic voice, inhibiting both GPWS and TCAS warnings.
3. Ground Proximity Warning System (GPWS). Detection of approach to terrain takes priority
over TCAS announcements.
256

(TCAS)
Chapter 15
TRAFFIC ADVISORIES (TAs) RESOLUTION ADVISORIES (RAs).

Depending upon the setting of the TCAS function switch on the control panel, the equipment
level of intruder aircraft and the phase of flight of the TCAS aircraft, TCAS will generate the
following.
Traffic Advisories (TAs) exist when an intruder penetrates the outer bubble caution
area and is between 45 and 35 seconds from the collision area. TAs appear as solid
amber circles on the TCAS display and are accompanied by the synthetic voice saying
Traffic, Traffic. This is a potential collision threat.
Resolution Advisories (RAs) exist when an intruder penetrates the inner bubble
warning area and is between 30 and 20 seconds from the collision area. RAs appear
as solid red rectangles on the TCAS display accompanied by various synthetic voice
warnings. RAs indicate a serious collision threat.
Figure
4.4.
Figure 15.4
Resolution Advisories come in two forms:
Preventative Advisories are situations where no collision risk exists unless a change
of level is initiated by either aircraft. The synthetic voice advisory is Monitor Vertical
Speed
Corrective Advisories are situations where a collision risk exists and a manoeuvre is
necessary to avert it. The synthetic voice produces the appropriate command.
Figure 15.5 shows examples of Preventative and Corrective RAs displayed on the Vertical Speed
tape of the Primary Flight Display.
257

(TCAS)
Chapter 15
Figure
4.5.
Resolution
Advisories.
Figure
15.5Corrective
Correctiveand
andPreventative
Preventative Resolution
Advisories.
PROXIMATE TRAFFIC/OTHER TRAFFIC
See Figures 15.6, 15.7 and 15.7a
Proximate Traffic appears as a solid cyan diamond and represents transponder equipped
aircraft within range of the display and within +/- 1200 feet relative height. TCAS does
not consider this traffic a threat and displays it to improve crew situational awareness.
Other Traffic appears as hollow cyan diamonds which represent transponder equipped
aircraft within range of the display and within +/- 2700 feet relative height (+/- 8700
dependant on position of ABOVE and BELOW switch). Again it is displayed to improve
situational awareness.
The predicted flight paths of Proximate and Other Traffic do not penetrate the Collision Area of
the TCAS aircraft.
258

(TCAS)
Chapter 15
DATA TAG
The traffic symbols may also have an associated altitude TAG which shows relative altitude in
hundreds of feet, to indicate whether an intruder is climbing, flying level or descending:
A + sign and number above the symbol means an intruder is above the aircraft.
A trend arrow or appears alongside the symbol when the intruders vertical rate is 500 feet
per minute or greater.
No altitude number or trend arrow will appear beside an intruder that is non altitude reporting.
If TCAS II direction finding techniques fail to locate the azimuth of another aircraft a no bearing
message appears on the screen.
OFF SCALE TRAFFIC ADVISORY

When TCAS is tracking an intruder that is outside the selected display range, but has entered
the caution or warning areas, one-half of the appropriate symbol will appear at the appropriate
bearing at the edge of the display area. The symbol will appear in its proper colour and have its
data tag displayed providing there is room. See Figure 15.10.
TCAS DISPLAYS
TCAS range and bearing information can appear on a variety of displays:
Dedicated Plan Position Indicator
SELECTED RANGE
DISPLAY
RELATIVE
ATTITUDE
TD FAIL FLAG,
COULD SHOW
TCAS OFF
INTRUDER
SYMBOL
VERTICAL
DIRECTION ARROW
(SHOWS RATE IS
GREATER THAN 500
ft/min.)
2 NM
RANGE RING
OWN AIRCRAFT
SYMBOL
OFF SCALE
MESSAGE
TA ONLY
MESSAGE
NO BEARING
INTRUDER
Figure
Figure4.6.
15.6 TCAS
TCAS PPI.
PPI
259

(TCAS)
Chapter 15
Electronic Vertical Speed Indicator
RESOLUTION
ADVISORY(SOLID
RED SQUARE)
TRAFFIC ADVISORY
(AMBER
PROXIMATE
TRAFFIC (CYAN)
Figure 4.7 Electronic VSI.
Figure 4.7. Electronic VSI.

Superimposed on Navigation Display of EFIS equipped aircraft
Figure
NavigationDisplay
Display in
Mode
Showing
TCAS.
Figure
4.7a4.7a.
Navigation
inMAP
MAP
Mode
Showing
TCAS
260

(TCAS)
Chapter 15
COMBINED TCAS AND SSR CONTROL PANEL

The control panel is produced in various forms but all perform the same functions.
Figure 4.8 ATC Transponder/TCAS Control Panel
Figure 4.8. ATC Transponder/TCAS Control Panel.

The TCAS controls are as follows:
Function Switch
Standby - warm-up power is applied to the system, but it is not operational.
On - the transponder only is operational.
TA - the transponder and TCAS are now operational but only Traffic Advisories are
generated. TA ONLY will be indicated on the TCAS display.
RA/TA - the transponder and TCAS are operational and both Resolution Advisories
and Traffic Advisories are generated.
TEST - pressing the centre TEST button on the function switch initiates a full Built - in Test Equipment (BITE) of the system. After completion of a successful test the synthetic
voice will respond with TCAS SYSTEM TEST OK. If the system test is unsuccessful
the voice response is TCAS SYSTEM TEST FAIL.
TCAS RNG (range) selects the range of the TCAS display either 5, 10, or 20nm. It does not alter
the range at which aircraft are detected or when warnings are given.
261

(TCAS)
Chapter 15
TCAS TRAFFIC ADVISORIES ON ELECTRONIC VSI
TRAFFIC TRAFFIC
TRAFFIC TRAFFIC
Figure
4.9.Traffic
Traffic
Advisory
Figure 4.9
Advisory
Figure
4.10.
TrafficAdvisory
Advisory.
Figure
4.10 Off
OffScale
Scale Traffic
TCAS PREVENTATIVE RESOLUTION ADVISORIES ON ELECTRONIC VSI
Figure
4.11.
Resolution
Advisories.
Figure
4.11.Preventative
Preventative Resolution
Advisories
262

(TCAS)
Chapter 15
TCAS CORRECTIVE RESOLUTION ADVISORY ON ELECTRONIC VSI
CLIMB CLIMB
Figure
CorrectiveRA
RA.
Figure4.12.
4.12 Corrective
TCAS TEST FORMAT ON ELECTRONIC VSI
TCAS SYSTEM TEST OK

Figure
Display.
Figure4.13.
4.13 Test
Test Display
263
Chapter 15

(TCAS)
NO BEARING ADVISORIES
If TCAS is unable to track the bearing of an intruder, possibly due to antenna screening, the RA
or TA will appear lower centre of the display appropriately colour coded. Up to two lines of
information can be displayed.
TA 2.2- 04 means the intruder is creating a TA 2.2 nm away 400 below and the up arrow
indicates the intruder is climbing at 500 fpm or greater.
It is important to realise that TCAS ability to compute a Traffic or Resolution Advisory is not
degraded by lack of bearing information.
INCREASE CLIMB
Figure
4.14.
RAand
andTA
TA.
Figure
4.14 No
NoBearing
Bearing RA
264

(TCAS)
Chapter 15
ACTION TO BE TAKEN ON RECEIVING TAs AND RAs

Refer to CAP 579
Action on Receiving a TA. TAs alert flight crews to the possibility that an RA may follow, which could require a flight path change. Flight crews should assimilate the information provided by the TA and commence a visual search of that part of the sky. They
should also prepare to respond to an RA if the situation worsens. If the potential threat
cannot be seen and continues to give cause for concern flight crews should seek advice
from ATC. (Para. 6.1.1/2)
Action on Receiving an RA. Pilots are to initiate the required manoeuvre immediately,
adjusting flight path, aircraft power and trim accordingly. Crew members not involved
in executing this manoeuvre should confirm that the sky ahead is clear of other aircraft
and continue the visual search for the established threat. They are to inform ATC as
soon as possible of any deviation from an ATC clearance. (Para. 6.2.3)
Disregarding RAs. Manoeuvres should never be made in a direction opposite to that

given in an RA; this is because the sense may have been determined following an exchange of data with the established threat. For this reason:
RAs may be disregarded only when pilots visually identify the potentially
conflicting traffic and decide no deviation from the current flight path is
needed.
If pilots receive simultaneously an instruction to manoeuvre from ATC and an

RA, and both conflict, the advice given by TCAS should be followed.
STANDARD R/T PHRASEOLOGY

Notification of a manoeuvre in response to an RA.
Pilot:
Controller:
TCAS climb (or TCAS descent).

roger.
after clear of conflict.

Pilot:
Controller:
Returning to xxxxft/flxxx (details of assigned clearance).

roger; a revised clearance may then be issued.
inability to comply with ATC instruction.

Controller:
Pilot:
climb (descend) flxxx.

Unable to comply, TCAS RA..
Further reading: cap 579 airborne collision avoidance systems (ACAS): guidance material.
265
Chapter 15
266

(TCAS)

(TCAS)
Chapter 15
QUESTIONS
1.
On receipt of a TCAS RA your action is to:

a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Which of the following statements concerning TCAS is correct:

a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
b.
c.
d.
TCAS II can provide Traffic Advisories and Resolution Advisories whilst TCAS I can
only provide Traffic Advisories .
TCAS II can only be fitted to large aircraft which carry more than 30 passengers. Whilst
TCAS I can be fitted to any aircraft.
TCAS I can be fitted to aircraft which carry transponders with Mode A only whilst
TCAS II can only be fitted to aircraft whose transponders include either Mode C or
Mode S.
TCAS II can only be fitted to aircraft which are equipped with EFIS.
The aural messages provided by TCAS II are:

a.
b.
c.
d.
5.
TCAS 2 provides avoidance instructions in the vertical and horizontal planes.

TCAS 2 cannot provide information on non-SSR equipped intruders.
TCAS 2 requires Mode S to be fitted to other aircraft.
TCAS 2 provides advice on which way to turn.
With reference to Traffic Collision Avoidance Systems. The difference between TCAS I and II
is that:
a.
4.
initiate the required manoeuvre immediately.

make a note of the details.
request a flight clearance deviation from ATC.
Do nothing until a TA is received.
Threat, Climb; Threat, Descend.

Climb left; Climb right; Descend left; Descend right.
Climb; Descend; Increase climb; Increase Descent.
Turn left, Turn Right, Increase Turn, Decrease Turn
With reference to Traffic Collision Avoidance Systems:

a.
b.
c.
d.
RAs may be disregarded only when the pilot visually identifies the potentially
conflicting traffic and decides that no deviation is necessary and has the clearance
confirmed by ATC.
conflicting traffic and decides that no deviation is necessary and has advised ATC of
the other aircrafts proximity.
RAs must never be disregarded.
conflicting traffic and decides that no deviation is necessary.
267

(TCAS)
Chapter 15
ANSWERS
268
Distance Measuring Equipment

(DME)
Chapter 16
CHAPTER SIXTEEN
DISTANCE MEASURING EQUIPMENT (DME)
Contents
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
FREQUENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
USES OF DME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
TWIN PULSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
RANGE SEARCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
BEACON SATURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
STATION IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
VOR/DME FREQUENCY PAIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
DME RANGE MEASUREMENT FOR ILS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
RANGE AND COVERAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
ACCURACY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
DME SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
QUESTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
ANSWERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
269
Chapter 16
270

(DME)

(DME)
Chapter 16
INTRODUCTION
Distance Measuring Equipment (DME) is a secondary radar system that enables an aircraft
to establish its range from a ground station. A pilot obtains accurate magnetic bearings from
a VHF Omni-range (VOR) beacon and accurate slant ranges from a DME. The two facilities
are normally co-sited to form the standard ICAO approved RHO-THETA short range, Line of
Sight navigation aid. (Rho = range; Theta = bearing)
Figure
16.1 Distance
Distance Measuring
Figure
12.1.
MeasuringEquipment
Equipment.
Figure12.2.
16.2 A
A Combined
Combined Doppler
Figure
DopplerVOR/DME
VOR/DME.
271
Chapter 16

(DME)
Figure
16.3A A
ConventionalVOR
VOR Installation
Installation Surmounted
Antenna
Figure
12.3.
Conventional
Surmountedbybya aDME
DME
Antenna.
Figure 16.4 DME, VOR and Tacan Presentation - Topographical Chart
Figure 12.5. DME, VOR and Tacan Presentation - Topographical Chart.

272

(DME)
Chapter 16
Figure 16.5
VOR
Presentation
- AERAD
Airways
High High
Level Level
Chart
Figure
12.4.DME
DMEand
and
VOR
Presentation
- AERAD
Airways
Chart.
273

(DME)
Chapter 16
FREQUENCIES
Channels
DME (emission code P0N) is a secondary radar system operating between 962 and 1213MHz in
the UHF band at 1MHz spacing; this provides 252 spot frequencies or channels.
There is always a difference of +/- 63MHz between the interrogation and transponding
frequencies. The channels are numbered 1 to 126X and 1 to 126Y. A channel number is selected
by the pilot of a TACAN (TACtical Air Navigation) equipped military aircraft; this equipment
provides the pilot with range and bearing. Civil aircraft have the cheaper VOR/DME equipment
and select the appropriate paired VHF frequency to obtain range from either a DME or military
TACAN facility.
Example Channel Numbers and Paired Frequencies
BEACON
Aircraft
Interrogation
Beacon
Transponds
Military
Aircraft Select
Civil
Aircraft Select
MAZ Tacan
1131 MHz
1194MHz
Channel 107X
116.0MHz
OX DME
1148MHz
1211MHz
Channel 124X
117.7MHz
DME Paired With ILS Localiser Transmitter

DME is also frequency paired with the ILS localiser frequencies. These DME supplement or
replace the range information provided by the Marker Beacons. The range information is zero
referenced to the ILS runway threshold. DME is obtained by selecting the ILS frequency.
USES OF DME
A DME:
provides very accurate slant range, a circular position line and in conjunction with
another DME, or a co-sited VOR, two position line fixes.
integrates the change of slant range into groundspeed and elapsed times when the
aircraft is fitted with an appropriate computer.
permits more accurate flying of holding patterns and DME arcs.
provides range and height checks when flying non-precision approach procedures,
e.g. Locator only and VOR let-downs.
indicates accurate ranges to the runway threshold, and heights for range, when flying
an ILS/DME procedure.
facilitates radar identification when the pilot reports his VOR/DME position.
facilitates the separation and control of aircraft in non-radar airspace, based upon a
VOR/DME fix reported by individual aircraft.
is the basis for a simple Area Navigation (RNAV) system when the appropriate computerisation is fitted.
provides accurate range inputs into the more complex and accurate RNAV systems;
twin, self selecting DME/DME are used.
274

(DME)
Chapter 16
DISTANCE
TACAN
ANTENNA
TACAN
VOR
ANTENNAS
SELECT
CHANNEL
70X
BEARING
VORTAC GROUND STATION
DME
DISTANCE
VOR
BEARING
235
AIRBORNE EQUIPMENT
Figure12.7.
16.6 VORTAC
Figure
VORTAC.
Pulse Technique
DME is a secondary radar system providing slant range by pulse technique.
The aircrafts interrogator transmits a stream of omni-directional pulses on the carrier frequency
of the ground transponder. Simultaneously the Interrogators receiver starts a Range Search.
At the Transponder on the ground the received interrogation pulses are re-transmitted, after a
delay of 50 s, at a frequency that is +/- 63 MHz removed from the interrogation frequency.
The airborne system identifies its own unique stream of pulses and measures the time interval,
electronically, between the start of the interrogation and the reception of the response from the
transponder. The time measurement, and hence range, is very accurate and is based upon the
speed of radio waves i.e. 3x108 m/s. A modern DME is inherently accurate to +/- 0.2nm
In theory up to 100 aircraft can interrogate a DME transponder. Thus each aircraft is receiving
its own returning paired pulses plus those which result from other aircrafts interrogations, as
the pulses have the same carrier frequency.
The width of the interrogation pulses is 3.5 sec (1050m) and they are transmitted in pairs; (the
interval between the individual pulses of a pair is 12 s for X channel and 36
s for Y channel)
275

(DME)
Chapter 16
Aircraft Range Determination

INDICATOR
DME
ANTENNAS
DISTANCE
READOUT
1 2 3.5
PULSE PAIR GROUPS
Randomly Spaced Groups
(Jittered)
STATION delays signal 50

microseconds then retransmits 63MHz
ABOVE or BELOW received frequency
AT THE SAME RANDOM SPACING
CONTROL PANEL
VHF NAV
108.00
NORM
STBY
ORIDE
TEST
DME
VOR / DME GROUND STATION
Figure
16.7The
ThePrinciple
Principle of
Figure
12.8.
of Range
RangeMeasurement
Measurement.
For an individual aircraft to achieve an unambiguous slant range measurement and overcome
the problem of identification:
Each aircrafts interrogator is programmed to transmit its paired pulses at random

intervals i.e. the transmission sequence of pulses is irregular or jittered. This differentiates its pulses from all the others.
At the instant of transmission, the receiver of an interrogator sets up gates to match the
random PRF of the transmitted twin pulses.
The responses on the transponders carrier frequency include an individual aircrafts

paired pulses plus those from other aircraft.
The receiving equipment of an aircraft is designed so that only the responses which
match its randomised PRF are allowed through the gates. The pulses have now
achieved Lock-on i.e. the DME enters the tracking mode.
As the aircrafts range from the station increases or decreases (unless the aircraft is
circling) the gates move to accommodate the corresponding increase or decrease in
the time between transmission and reception of the twin pulses. This lock-and-follow
technique ensures that the returning twin pulses are continuously tracked.
The off-set in time between transmission and reception is the measure of the aircrafts
slant range from the DME transponder.
276

(DME)
Chapter 16
AIRCRAFTS TRANSMITTED RANDOM PRF
RECEIVER GATE
t
t
t
t = Time between Tx and Rx
of twin pulses
Figure
16.8 Acceptance
Acceptance of
Figure
12.9.
ofOwn
OwnPulses
Pulses.
TWIN PULSES
The use by the DME system of twin pulses ensures that the receivers never accept matching
randomised single pulses which could (possibly) emanate from, for example, other radars,
ignition systems or lightning.
RANGE SEARCH
To achieve a rapid lock-on during the range search, the DME interrogator transmits at 150 pulsepairs per second for 15000 pulse-pairs (100 seconds).
If lock-on is not achieved, it will then reduce the rate to 60 pps and maintains this rate until there
is a range lock-on. At lock-on the system operates at a random PRF of 25pps.
During the range search the range counters, or pointer, of the indicator rotate rapidly from zero
nautical miles through to the maximum range; this takes 4 to 5 seconds in modern equipment
and 25 to 30 in older systems. If no response is achieved within this period, the pointer, or
counters, return rapidly to zero and the search starts again.
BEACON SATURATION
It is assumed that 95% of aircraft using a ground beacon will be in the tracking mode (i.e.
indicating a slant range), not exceeding an interrogation rate of 25 pulse-pairs per second, with
the remaining 5% in either of the search modes. This results in an average of 27 pulse pairs per
second required for a lock-on. The search mode at the higher level runs only for a maximum of
277
Chapter 16

(DME)
100 seconds and the 60 PRF would not be continued in the absence of a range lock-on.
The output of a modern ground beacon is a constant 2700 pulse-pairs per second which, in the
absence of any aircraft interrogations, are being triggered by the noise generated by the receiver
increasing its gain, in order to compensate for the lack of aircraft interrogations. When a ground
beacon is receiving 2700 pps it becomes saturated and it then reduces its receiver gain. The effect
of this is to exclude the transmissions from aircraft whose interrogation pulses are weaker. This
equates to about 100 aircraft using the DME at the same time.
Figure
16.9 Beacon
Figure
12.10.
BeaconSaturation
Saturation.
In Figure 16.9 all aircraft A to G are receiving ranges from the transponder with aircraft B just
entering the coverage. When the transponder becomes saturated, the receiver gain is reduced
and aircraft A, B, E, F and G will be excluded and unlock. The aim is to give preference to the
nearest aircraft as the beacon responds to the strongest interrogations.
STATION IDENTIFICATION
A 3-letter callsign is transmitted every 30 seconds, usually in conjunction with an associated
VOR. During the ident period the random pulses are replaced by regularly spaced pulses
keyed with the station identification letters. This means that range information is not available
during the ident period. However the aircraft equipment has a 10 second memory circuit to
continue displaying the range obtained. The DME identification is distinguished from the VOR
identification by having a different tone (usually higher than the VOR).
278

(DME)
Chapter 16
VOR/DME FREQUENCY PAIRING

To facilitate and speed up frequency selection, and to reduce the pilots cockpit workload, VORs
may be frequency paired with a DME or a military TACAN installation. This means that the
aircrafts DME circuits are automatically activated when the appropriate VHF VOR frequency
is selected. Ideally the VOR and DME or TACAN beacons should be co-sited in order that a
range and bearing can be plotted from the same source. This is not always possible. The table
explains the siting and frequency pairing and callsign arrangements of VOR/DME or VOR/
TACAN facilities.
RELATIVE POSITIONS OF VOR/DME OR TACAN
FREQUENCIES
IDENTIFICATION
BOTH TRANSMIT THE
SAME CALLSIGN
ASSOCIATED:
PAIRED
THERE ARE FOUR

IDENTS EVERY 30 sec
PERIOD
(ii) THE MAXIMUM DISTANCE BETWEEN BOTH

TRANSMITTERS IS 30m/100 IN TMAs,
or
PAIRED
THE VOR TRANSMITS

3 OF THE FOUR
(iii) THE MAXIMUM DISTANCE BETWEEN

BOTH TRANSMITTERS IS
600m/2000, FOR USE ELSEWHERE
PAIRED
THE DME TRANSMITS

THE FOURTH
NOT ASSOCIATED BUT SERVE THE SAME

LOCATION
PAIRED
FIRST TWO LETTERS

ARE THE SAME; LAST
LETTER FOR DME IS Z
VOR/DME-TACAN WIDELY SEPARATED i.e. >6nm
MAY OR MAY NOT

BE PAIRED
(i)
BOTH TRANSMITTERS CO-LOCATED,

or
TOTALLY DIFFERENT
IDENTIFICATIONS
DME RANGE MEASUREMENT FOR ILS

When DME is paired with ILS, the transponder is adjusted to give range to the threshold in UK
systems, since clearly the ground installation cannot be placed at the threshold. This is achieved
by reducing the time delay at the transponder, SO that the time taken for the interrogation
signal to travel from the runway threshold to the transponder, plus the delay at the transponder,
plus the time taken for the reply to travel from the transponder to the runway threshold is 50
microseconds.
For example: if the transponder is 1500m from the runway threshold, the time for the interrogation
and reply pulses to travel between the threshold and transponder will be 5 microseconds each
way, so the delay at the transponder must be reduced to 40 microseconds to give a range to the
threshold.
279

(DME)
Chapter 16
RANGE AND COVERAGE

DME transmissions obey the line of sight rule. Thus the higher the aircraft, and the ground
beacon, the greater the theoretical reception distance.
Intervening high ground will block the line of sight range.
The effect of bank angle is to hide the aircraft antenna from the transponder on the ground and
will cause an interruption in the flow of signals. However, the memory circuit ensures that there
is no major disruption to range measurement.
In order to overcome range errors which may be caused by mutual interference between two or
more facilities sharing the same frequencies, a Designated Operational Coverage is published
for each DME; this protects a DME from co-channel interference under normal propagation
conditions. The DOC is specified as a range and height. The use of a DME beyond its DOC
limitations may result in range errors.
In order to eliminate errors arising from reflections from the earths surface, buildings or
mountainous terrain, the aircraft receiver incorporates an Echo Protection Circuit.
ACCURACY
System Accuracy
Based on a 95% probability the system accuracy for DME used for navigation (DME/N) should
give a total system error not exceeding +/- 0.25 nm +/-1.25% of range. Precision systems (DME/P)
should have errors not exceeding +/-0.2 nm.
The total system limits include errors from causes such as those arising from airborne equipment,
ground equipment, propagation and random pulse interference effects.
Slant Range / Ground Range Accuracy
The difference between computed slant range
and actual ground distance increases the
higher and closer an aircraft gets in relation
to the DME. As a general rule the difference
becomes significant when the aircraft is at
a range which is less than 3 x height. When
the aircraft is directly over the DME (0 nm
ground distance), it will indicate the aircrafts
height in nautical miles. There is a small
cone of confusion over a DME, plus range
indications continue to be computed as the
equipment has a 10 second memory circuit.
Aircraft at 36,840 ft:
36840 = 6nm
6080
102 = 62 + x2
x = 100 - 36
= 8nm ground range
Figure
12.11.
Figure
16.10
Applying the ICAO system accuracy limitations, the ground range is 7.625nm to 8.375nm.
280

(DME)
Chapter 16
Accuracy of Groundspeed Computation

The equipments indicated groundspeed, which is computed from the rate of change of slant
range, becomes more inaccurate and under-reads the actual groundspeed, the closer and higher
an aircraft is in relation to the DME beacon.
An aircraft circling a DME beacon at a constant range will have an indicated computed
groundspeed of zero knots. A groundspeed is only valid when an aircraft is homing to, or flying
directly away from, a VOR/ DME - TACAN.
DME SUMMARY
Frequency

UHF band; 962 to 1213 MHz; 1 MHz spacing; 252 channels

+/- 63 MHz difference between transmitted and received frequencies
Selection by paired VHF frequency ( VOR or ILS )
DME paired with ILS gives range zero referenced to ILS runway
threshold
Uses

Circular position line; groundspeed and time to / from station

DME arcs
range and height checks during let-downs
accurate ranges to threshold
RNAV.
Principle of Op
Aircraft interrogator and receiver: transmits pairs of pulses at random

intervals, omni-directionally
Ground station transponder: re-transmits all pulses at +/- 63 MHz after
a delay of 50 s

Slant Range
Aircraft receiver identifies own pulses and determines range from time
interval between transmitted and received pulses ( minus 50 s )
Pulse characteristics

Twin pulse used to avoid interference

Jittered pulses are used to identify own pulses
Frequency change prevents aircraft locking on to reflections
Range Search
Pulse rate

- initially 150 pps

- reduced to 60 pps after 15,000 pps
- further reduced to about 25 pps at lock-on
Beacon saturation

Occurs at 2,700 pps (approx 100 aircraft interrogating)

receiver gain reduced to respond only to strong pulses
Station Ident
3 letter identifier; range info not available during ident period
281

(DME)
Chapter 16
VOR /DME Frequency Pairing:

Associated

- if co-located or within 100 in TMA or 2000 outside TMA

- callsigns are the same; frequencies paired
Not associated

- if serving same location then callsign of DME third letter is Z

- frequencies paired
Separated
- if > 6 nm apart; callsigns different
Coverage:
Line of sight range; reduced by intervening high ground and bank

angle DOC gives protected range; echo protection circuit eliminates
reflections
Accuracy:

+/-0.25 nm +/-1.25% of range (+/-0.2 nm for precision systems)

Slant range error significant when aircraft range < 3 x height;
Groundspeed error increases as aircraft goes higher and closer to
station.
282

(DME)
Chapter 16
QUESTIONS
1.
Airborne DME equipment is able to discriminate between pulses intended for itself and pulses
intended for other aircraft because:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
A DME beacon having a transmit frequency of 962 MHz would have a receive frequency of:
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
primary
secondary
secondary
primary
8800 MHz
1030 MHz
962 MHz
9375 MHz
SHF
UHF
UHF
SHF
A DME transponder does not respond to pulses received from radars other than DME
because:
a.
b.
c.
d.
6.
they are co-located.

they are more than 600m apart but serve the same location.
they are widely separated and do not serve the same location.
they are a maximum distance of 30m apart.
Distance Measuring Equipment is an example of _________ radar operating on a frequency of

_______ in the __________ band.
a.
b.
c.
d.
5.
1030 Mhz
902 Mhz
1025 Mhz
962 Mhz
A VOR/DME share the same first two letters of their respective identifiers; the last identifying
letter of the DME is a Z. This means that:
a.
b.
c.
d.
4.
aircraft transmit and receive on different frequencies.

aircraft will only accept unique twin pulses.
aircraft reject pulses not synchronised with its own random pulse recurrence rate.
each aircraft has its own frequency allocation.
each aircraft transmits pulses at a random rate.

DME transmits and receives on different frequencies.
it will only accept the unique twin DME pulses.
DME only responds to the strongest 100 interrogators.
The range indicated by DME is considered to be accurate to within:

a.
b.
c.
d.
3% of range
1.25 % of range
0.5 nm
+/-0.25 nm +/-1.25% of range
283

(DME)
Chapter 16
7.
A DME receiver is able to distinguish between replies to its own interrogations and replies to
other aircraft because:
a.
b.
c.
d.
8.
When a DME transponder becomes saturated:

a.
b.
c.
d.
9.
it reverts to standby.
it increases the number of pulse pairs to meet the demand.
it increases the receiver threshold to remove weaker signals.
it goes into a selective response mode of operation.
An aircraft flying at FL250 wishes to interrogate a DME beacon situated 400ft amsl. What is the
maximum range likely to be achieved?
ab.
b.
c.
d.
10.
DME is secondary radar and each aircraft transmits and receives on a different
frequency.
DME transponders reply to interrogations with twin pulses and the airborne equipment
ejects all other pulses.
Each aircraft transmits pulses at a random rate and will only accept synchronised
replies.
When DME is in the search mode it will only accept pulses giving the correct range.
210 nm
198 nm
175 nm
222 nm
For a DME and a VOR to be said to be associated it is necessary for:

b.
the DME to transmit on the same VHF frequency as the VOR.
b.
the aerial separation not to exceed 100 feet in a TMA or 2000 feet outside a TMA.
c.
the aerial separation not to exceed 100 metres in a TMA or 2000m outside a TMA.
d.
both beacons to have the same first two letters for their ident but the last letter of the
DME to be a Z.
11.
The transmission frequency of a DME beacon is 63 MHz removed from the aircraft interrogator
frequency to prevent:
a.
b.
c.
d.
12.
interference from other radars.

the airborne receiver locking on to primary returns from its own transmissions.
static interference.
receiver accepting replies intended for other interrogators.
The accuracy associated with DME is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
284
+ or - 3% of range, or 0.5nm, whichever is greater

+ or - 1.25% of range
+ or - 3% of range
+/-0.25 nm +/-1.25% of range

(DME)
13.
For a VOR and a DME beacon to be said to be associated the aerial separation must not exceed_
______ in a terminal area and _______ outside a terminal area.
a.
b.
c.
d.
14.
100 m
50 feet
30m
50 m
2000 m
200 feet
600m
200 m
DME is a
radar operating in the band and uses
The correct words to complete the above statement are:
a.
b.
c.
d.
15.
Chapter 16
primary
secondary
secondary
primary
SHF
UHF
SHF
UHF
CW signals
twin pulses
jittered pulses
pulse pairs
The receiver of airborne DME equipment is able to lock on to its own reply pulses
because:
a.
b.
c.
d.
each aircraft has its own unique transmitter frequency and the receiver only accepts
reply pulses having this frequency.
the reply pulses from the ground transmitter have the same frequency as the incoming
interrogation pulses from the aircraft.
the aircraft receiver only accepts reply pulses which have the same time interval between
successive pulses as the pulses being transmitted by its own transmitter.
the aircraft receiver only accepts reply pulses which arrive at a constant time interval.
The VOR in an aircraft is correctly tuned and set to define

the centre line of an airway within UK airspace which
you intend to fly. The indication received on the VOR/ILS
deviation indicator is shown in the diagram alongside. At
the same time the DME gave a range of 40 nm from the
facility. Use the above information to answer the next two
questions.
Use the 1 in 60 rule and assume 1 dot equals 2.
16.
FROM
045
At the time of the observation, the aircraft was on the:

a.
b.
c.
d.
17.
in order to obtain range information.
042 radial
048 radial
222 radial
228 radial
Assuming still air conditions, on regaining the centreline, it will be necessary to make the
following alteration of heading:
a.
b.
c.
d.
left onto 045

right onto 048
left onto 225
right onto 225
285

(DME)
Chapter 16
18.
DME operates in the frequency band, it transmits

of .
a.
b.
c.
d.
19.
d.
PO1
PON
A9F
J3E
the airborne receiver checks 150 pulses each second.

the airborne transmitter transmits 150 pulses each second.
the ground receiver maintains the ground transmitter pulse transmission rate at no
more than 150 per second.
the aircraft transmits 24 pulses per second and the receiver checks a maximum of 150
pulses per second.
DME and VOR are frequency paired because:

a.
b.
c.
d.
21.
double size pulses

twin pulses
twin pulses
double pulses
Referring to DME during the initial stage of the search pattern before lock-on:
a.
b.
c.
20.
SHF
UHF
EHF
UHF
which give it the emission designator
the same receiver can be used for both aids.

the VOR transmitter is easily converted to the required DME frequency.
cockpit workload is reduced.
both ground transmitter aerials can be placed on the same site if required.
A DME receiver is able to distinguish between replies to its own interrogation pulses and those
intended for other aircraft using the same transponder because:
a.
b.
c.
d.
286
DME is a secondary radar and each aircraft transmits and receives on a different
frequency.
DME transponders reply to interrogations by means of twin pulses and the airborne
equipment rejects all single pulses.
each aircraft transmits pulses at a random rate(jittering) and will only accept replies
that match this randomisation.
when DME is in the range search mode it will accept only pulses separated by + or - 63
MHz from the interrogation frequency.

(DME)
Chapter 16
287

(DME)
Chapter 16
ANSWERS
288
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
10
20
21
Area Navigation Systems

(RNAV)
Chapter 17
CHAPTER SEVENTEEN
AREA NAVIGATION SYSTEMS (RNAV)
Contents
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
BENEFITS OF RNAV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
TYPES AND LEVELS OF RNAV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
A SIMPLE 2D RNAV SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
OPERATION OF A SIMPLE 2D RNAV SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION OF A SIMPLE 2D RNAV SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
LIMITATIONS AND ACCURACY OF SIMPLE RNAV SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
LEVEL 4 RNAV SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
CONTROL DISPLAY UNIT (CDU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
CLIMB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
CRUISE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
DESCENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION - TWIN IRS, TWIN FMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION - TRIPLE IRS, TWIN FMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
KALMAN FILTERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
DME - IRS ACCURACY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
QUESTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
APPENDIX A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
ANSWERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
289
Chapter 17
290

(RNAV)

(RNAV)
Chapter 17
INTRODUCTION
An area navigation (RNAV) system is any system that allows the aircraft to be navigated to the
required level of accuracy without the requirement to fly directly over ground based facilities.
The required accuracy is achieved by using some, or all, of the following inputs of information:
VOR/DME
ILS/MLS
LORAN
GNSS
INS/IRS
ADC
Time
The information is processed within the system to give the most accurate and continuously
updated position and the necessary outputs to provide the pilot with course, ETA etc
BENEFITS OF RNAV
RNAV allows aircraft to take a more direct flight path appropriate to the route they are
flying thereby improving the operating efficiency and helping in relieving congestion on the
overcrowded airway system. To facilitate this, air traffic control centres have established RNAV
routes which are more direct than the traditional airways system allows and do not require
aircraft to regularly fly to the overhead of beacons. Hence the benefits are:
A reduction in distance, flight time and fuel (and hence costs) by giving airlines and pilots
greater flexibility and choice of routes.
An increase in the present route capacity by making full use of the available airspace by
providing more direct routes, parallel or dual routes and bypass routes for overflying aircraft in
high density terminal areas.
A reduction in vertical and horizontal separation criteria.
TYPES AND LEVELS OF RNAV

There are two types of RNAV:
Basic RNAV (B-RNAV) which is required to give a position accuracy to within 5 nm on 95% of
occasions. It is now mandatory for all aircraft carrying 30 passengers or more to have B-RNAV
capability within Euro-control airspace.
Precision RNAV (P-RNAV) must be accurate to within 1.0 nm on 95% of occasions. P-RNAV
routes are now being established in terminal airspace.
There are three levels of RNAV capability:
2D RNAV which relates to the capabilities in the horizontal plane only.

3D RNAV indicates the addition of a guidance capability in the vertical plane.
4D RNAV indicates the addition to 3D RNAV of a timing function.
291

(RNAV)
Chapter 17
A SIMPLE 2D RNAV SYSTEM

The flight deck of a simple 2D RNAV system includes the following components:
Navigation Computer Unit

Control Display Unit (CDU)
Indicator in the form of a:
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) or

Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)
RTN
RAD
CHK
DATA
Figure13.1
17.1 VOR/DME
VOR/DMERNAV
RNAV Integrated
Integrated Nav
Figure
NavSystem
System
OPERATION OF A SIMPLE 2D RNAV SYSTEM

A simple RNAV system uses rho/theta (range/bearing) to define position, which is derived from
range and bearing information from VOR/DME stations. The pilot defines waypoints along the
route to be flown as range and bearing from suitably located VOR/DME. Then the equipment,
using the VOR/DME bearing and range, computes the QDM and distance to the waypoint and
presents the information to the pilot on a CDI or HSI as if the waypoint itself is a VOR/DME
station, hence these waypoints are known as phantom stations.
292

(RNAV)
Chapter 17
RNAV Route and Waypoints

FigureFigure
17.213.2
AnAnRNAV
Route and Waypoints
In the diagram the pilot has defined waypoints along the planned route from SND to NEW
using available and sensibly placed VOR/DME.
Waypoints may be selected and programmed for:
En-route navigation
Initial approach fixes
Locator Outer Markers
ILS frequencies (when selected the instrumentation automatically reverts to ILS
mode).
The following table shows the inputs that would be required for the above RNAV route.
WAYPOINT
STATION
FREQUENCY
RADIAL
DISTANCE
APPLICATION
DTY
116.4 MHz
067
42
En-route Nav.
POL
112.1 MHz
066
29
En-route Nav.
NEW
114.25 MHz
218
26
En-route Nav.
NEW
114.25 MHz
251
Holding LOM
I-NC
111.5 MHz
N/A
N/A
ILS
293

(RNAV)
Chapter 17
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION OF A SIMPLE 2D RNAV SYSTEM

Refer to Figure 17.3. The aircraft is flying from waypoint 1 (WP1) defined by DTY VOR/DME to
waypoint 2 (WP2) defined by POL VOR/DME. As the aircraft arrives at WP1, POL is selected and
the range and bearing measured (145(R)/104 nm). The RNAV knows its position with respect
to POL and the pilot has already input waypoint 2 with respect to POL. The computer can now
compute the track and distance from WP1 to WP2 (340(M)/102 nm) since it has two sides, the
included angle and the orientation of magnetic north. The RNAV now continually computes
the aircraft position with respect to POL and compares this position with the computed track to
determine the cross track error and the distance to go. Steering demands are fed to a CDI or HSI
for the pilot to keep the aircraft on track and give continuous range readout to WP2. It should be
noted that on such a system the indications of deviation from track are in nms.
066/29
WAYPOINT 2
POL
145/104
067/42
WAYPOINT 1
DTY
Figure
Figure13.3
17.3
294

(RNAV)
Chapter 17
LIMITATIONS AND ACCURACY OF SIMPLE RNAV SYSTEMS

The beacons are selected by the pilot during the pre-flight planning and the pilot must ensure
that each waypoint is within DOC of the VOR/DME designating that waypoint and of the VOR/
DME designating the next waypoint.
Slant range error in DME must be considered in selecting facilities close to track.
The pilot must ensure that the information is correctly input into the CDU because the computer
cannot recognise or rectify mistakes.
To avoid positional errors the aircraft must at all times be within the DOC of the in use facility.
The accuracy of the fixing information is dependent on range and whether the VOR or DME
element is predominant. If the VOR/DME is close to the planned track to/from the waypoint,
the along track element will be most accurate. If the VOR/DME designating the way point is
perpendicular to the track, the across track will be most accurate.
295

(RNAV)
Chapter 17
LEVEL 4 RNAV SYSTEMS

The area navigation function in modern passenger aircraft is carried out by a flight management
computer (FMC) which also provides guidance and performance functions. The system outlined
below is specific to the BOEING 737-800, but the principle is true for all aircraft.
AUTO
THROTTLE
SERVO
ELECTRONIC
INTERFACE
UNIT
PILOT
INTEGRATED
DISPLAY
SYSTEM
(ND & PFD)
CENTRAL
MAINTENANCE
MCDU
COMPUTER
ELECTRONIC
ENGINE
CONTROL
FLIGHT
CONTROL
COMPUTER
AIR
DATA
COMPUTER
INERTIAL
REFERENCE
SYSTEM
FUEL
QUANTITY
INDICATING
SYSTEM
DIGITAL
CLOCK
FMC
WEIGHT
AND
BALANCE
COMPUTER
AUTOPILOT
FLIGHT
DIRECTOR
SYSTEM
OFFSIDE
FMC
MODE
CONTROL
PANEL
ADF
DATABASE
LOADER
DME
VOR
ILS / MLS
Figure 13.4 - FMS Schematic

Figure 17.4 FMS Schematic
296

(RNAV)
Chapter 17
The 737-800 FMS comprises:
Flight Management Computer System (FMCS)

Autopilot/Flight Director System (AFDS)
Autothrottle (A/T)
2 Inertial Reference Systems (IRS)
Each component is an independent system which may be used individually or in various

combinations. The term FMS implies the joining of all these systems into one integrated system
which provides automatic navigation, guidance and performance management. The FMS
provides 4D area navigation (latitude, longitude, altitude and time) and optimises peformance
to achieve the most economical flight possible. It provides centralized cockpit control of the
aircrafts flight path and performance parameters.
The Flight Management Computer (FMC) is the heart of the system, performing all the
navigational and performance calculations and providing control and guidance commands. A
control display unit (CDU) allows the crew to input the flight details and performance parameters
into the FMC. The navigation and performance computations are displayed on the CDU for
reference and monitoring. The related FMC commands for lateral (LNAV) and vertical
(VNAV) navigation may be coupled to the AFDS and A/T.
In the navigation functions the FMC receives inputs of position and heading from the IRS and
fixing information using twin DME. The FMC compares these inputs and by a process known as
Kalman filtering (see page 307) produces a system position. In the operation with radio position
updating, the FMC is combining the short term accuracy of the IRS with the long term accuracy
of the external reference (see paragraph 13.16). If the FMS is using just the IRS information to
derive position a warning is displayed to the crew indicating that the positional information is
downgraded.
The crew may select the level of automation required, from simply using the data displays to fly
the aircraft manually, e.g. for heading or TAS/Mach No., to fully automatic flight path guidance
and performance control (see Figure 17.5).
Even with full FMS operation, the crew have absolute control of the management and operation
of the aircraft. Furthermore, certain functions can only be implemented by the crew, e.g. thrust
initiation, take-off, altitude selection, ILS tuning, aircraft configuration and landing rollout. The
crew should always monitor the FMC navigation throughout the flight to ensure the flight plan
is being accurately followed by the automatic systems.
297

(RNAV)
Chapter 17
PILOTS
AFDS
IRSs
A/T
V NAV
L NAV
ON
ON
COMMANDS
FMC
COMPUTATIONS
INTEGRATED
FMS OPERATION
INDEPENDENT
OPERATION
PAGE TITLE
PAGE TITLE
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
F
A
I
L
RTE
CLB
DIR
INTC
LEG S
DE P
ARR
MENU
NAV
RAD
P RE V
PAG E
NEXT
PAG E
+/-
CDUs
PAGE SELECT
PAGE SELECT
INIT
REF
DE S
HOLD
P RO G
E XEC
A B C
D E
K L
S T
U V W X Y
Z
DEL
DATA
F
A
I
L
PAGE SELECT
PAGE SELECT
DIR
INTC
M
S
G
M N O
P Q R
DATA
INIT
REF
CRZ
G H
DATA
DATA
RTE
CLB
LEG S
DE P
ARR
MENU
NAV
RAD
P RE V
PAG E
NEXT
PAG E
DE S
HOLD
P RO G
E XEC
A B C D E
+/-
CLR
CRZ
G H I
K L
M
S
G
M N O
P Q R S T
U V
Z
W X Y
DEL
CLR
CONDITION: L NAV AND V NAV ENGAGED
Figure
13.5
400FMS
FMS
Figure
17.5- B737
B737--400
The FMC contains a performance database and a navigation database. The performance database
contains all parameters of the aircraft performance and the companys cost index strategy. The
navigation database contains aeronautical information for the planned area of operations of the
aircraft, comprising:
aerodrome details, positions, elevations, runways and lengths etc
navigation facilities, including location, altitude, frequency, identification and DOC
airways routes, including reporting points
SIDs and STARs and runway approaches
company routes
The navigation data is updated every 28 days and the FMC contains the current and next 28 days
database (this coincides with the ICAO navigation data cycle). The data may be customised for
the specific airline operations.
298

(RNAV)
Chapter 17
CONTROL DISPLAY UNIT (CDU)

The CDU is the means of communication with the FMC. It is used before flight to initialise the
performance and navigation requirements for the flight.
PAGE TITLE
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
PAGE SELECT
PAGE SELECT
INIT
REF
DIR
INTC
F
A
I
L
RTE
CLB
CRZ
DES
LEGS
DEP
ARR
HOLD
PROG
MENU
NAV
RAD
PREV
PAGE
NEXT
PAGE
+/-
EXEC
B C
D E
G H
K L
P
U V
Z
M
S
G
M N O
Q R
.
W X
DEL
CLR
Figure
ControlDisplay
DisplayUnit
Unit
Figure13.6
17.6 - Control
In addition to the alphanumeric keypad and the specific function keys, alongside the display are
line select keys (LSK) which are used for inserting or selecting data into the FMC and moving
through the various function pages. The format of the display is; in the top field the title of the
selected page and, where the selected function has more than one page, the page number (e.g.
1 of 3). In the centre of the display are up to 10 data fields, 5 on the left and right respectively
which are accessed using the LSKs. At the bottom of the screen are two or more page select fields
and below them the scratchpad. The scratchpad is used to input or modify data for insertion
into the appropriate data field.
Pre-Flight
The pre-flight initialization of the FMC in the navigation mode requires the pilot to check the
validity of the database and input:
The aircraft position
departure and destination aerodromes
intended SID and STAR procedures
the planned route
299

(RNAV)
Chapter 17
If the aircraft is flying a standard company route then the route designator is inserted, otherwise
the pilot will have to input the route manually. Data is initially typed into the scratchpad at the
bottom of the screen then inserted in the appropriate position using the line selection keys. Once
a valid position has been input it is passed to the IRS.
IDENT Page
IDENT
E N G
MODEL
1L
737-400
2L
TBC1880101
23.5K
ACTIVE
NAV DATA
3L
4L
OP
2R
JAN28 FEB25 / 8 9
3R
PROGRAM
548925-08-01
4R
(U5.0)
S U P P
<INDEX
1R
JAN 0 1 JAN28 / 8 9
5L
6L
1 / 1
R A T I N G
D A T A
J A N 2 1/88
5R
POS INIT >
6R
Figure
Figure 13.7
17.7
When power is applied, the FMS executes an internal test sequence. When the test is successfully
completed, it presents the IDENT page on the CDU. This page contains information on the
aircraft model and engine thrust from the performance database at 1L and 1R, the identification
of the permanent navigation database at 2L with 2R and 3R showing the currency periods of the
navigation data in the database. At 4L is the identification of the operating programme and at 5R
is the date of the supplementary data. The only information that can be changed on this display
is the current nav data at 2R. If this is out of date a prompt will appear in the scratchpad. To
change the data, select LSK 3R to downselect the next period of data to the scratchpad, then 2R
to insert the data into the active data line. Note that at 6R is the prompt for the next page in the
initialisation sequence and at 6L is the prompt for the page index. Where any input data is used
on other CDU pages the data will automatically propagate to those pages.
300

(RNAV)
Chapter 17
POS INIT Page
POS INIT
1 / 3
LAST
1L
N47 32.4
R E F
POS
W122 18.7
1R
W122 18.0
2R
W122 18.2
3R
A I R P O R T
2L
KBFI
3L
BF21
N47 31.8
G A T E
N47 31.1
S E T
4L
I R S
.
G M T
MON
5L
1432.2
6L
<INDEX
DY
09/20
P O S
.
S E T
I R S
H D G
4R
---
5R
ROUTE >
6R
Figure
Figure13.8
17.8
The position initialisation (POS INIT) page allows initialisation of heading and position for the
IRS. On all displays the dashed lines, as at 5R, indicate where optional data may be inserted to
assist the FMC operation. The boxed areas at 4R indicate where data essential to the operation of
the FMC must be inserted. The last position recorded before shutdown is displayed at 1R. The
departure airport is inserted at 2L and the gate at 3L. The FMC extracts the airfield reference and
gate positions from the database and inserts them at 2R and 3R respectively. At 4R the FMC is
asking for the aircraft position to initialise the IRS. The position could be input manually in the
scratchpad then inserted by selecting LSK 4R. However, the database has already inserted the
position into 3R, so this can be copied by selecting 3R to draw the data down to the scratchpad
and then 4R to insert into the field. To speed up alignment, particularly if the aircraft has been
moved, the heading from the standby compass can be input at 5R. Having completed this, the
alignment of the IRS will now proceed. The prompt at 6R now directs the pilot to the route (RTE)
page.
301

(RNAV)
Chapter 17
RTE Page
The route pages are used to insert, check and/or modify a company route, or to insert a route
not held in the database.
RTE
1 / XX
ORIGIN
D E S T
1L
K BFI
2L
BFIMWH
3L
13R
4L
LACRE3.VAMPS
5L
V2
CO
KMWH
ROUTE
F L T
N O
430
1R
2R
RUNWAY
3R
TO
VIA
6L
VAMPS
4R
ELN
5R
ACTIVATE >
6R
Figure
Figure 13.9
17.9
The departure and destination aerodromes are input to 1L and 1R respectively. Valid data is any
ICAO aerodrome designator held in the database. If the ICAO identifier was input on the POS
INIT, then it will appear at 1L. The company route is inserted at 2L and the flight number at 2R.
The runway in use and the SID and first route waypoint are inserted at 3L and 4L. Note this will
automatically appear if they are defined in the company route. The information at 5L (airway)
and 5R (next reporting point on airway V2) is inserted by the computer from the database. To
access the subsequent pages of the RTE, select the NEXT PAGE function key on the keyboard to
check or modify the route. The 6R prompt directs the pilot to activate the route. Pressing 6R will
illuminate the EXEC key on the CDU which should in turn be pressed for the computer to action
the route after take-off. After take-off the RUNWAY line is cleared and the VIA/TO moves up to
line 3 and the next waypoint appears at 4. As an active waypoint is passed, line three is cleared
and replaced with the next active waypoint.
The pre-flight actions for the navigation profile are now complete, but the performance
initialisation is yet to be actioned. This is dealt with elsewhere in the course. The computer
will check the conditions against the performance data and the required cost index profile and
inform the pilots of the power, speed and configuration to achieve the required profile. If a
manual input of a route is required, this can be achieved through the scratchpad, as can any
modifications to the standard company routes. The valid formats for navigational inputs are:
Latitude and Longitude as either a 7 group alphanumeric (e.g. N05W010) or a 15 group (e.g.
N0926.3W00504.7) Note the leading zeros must be entered for the FMC to accept the position.
Up to 5 alphanumerics for ICAO aerodrome designators, reporting points, navigation facilities,
airways designators (e.g. EGLL, KODAP, DHD, A23) and runway desigantors
Up to 7 alphanumerics for SID and STAR (e.g. TURN05)
302

(RNAV)
Chapter 17
Range and bearing from a navigational aid or reporting point (eg. TRN250.0/76). Note the
decimals are optional, the bearing must always be a 3 or 5 digit group, the distance may be 1 to
5 digits. In this case the FMC would give the position the designation TRN01, assuming it was
the first or only position specified with reference to TRN. These are known as place bearing/
distance (PBD) waypoints.
TRN
250/76
TRN 01
Figure
13.10
Waypoint
Figure
17.10- Range/Bearing
Range/Bearing Waypoint
Course interception waypoints are positions defined where the bearing from any valid database
position intersects with a course (e.g. an airway) or the bearing from another database defined
position. The format for input is e.g. GOW167.0/TRN090.5, the FMC now produces a PBD
waypoint which in this case would be designated GOW01. As above the bearings must be either
3 or 5 digits.
GOW
180
TRN
090.5
GOW 01
Figure
13.11
Waypoint
Figure
17.11- Bearing/Bearing
Bearing/Bearing Waypoint
303

(RNAV)
Chapter 17
CLIMB
Normally in the climb the VNAV, LNAV and timing functions will be operative.
ACT
C R Z
ECON
FL
2L
280/.72
3L
---/---------------
S P D
330
M A C E Y
6000A
S P D
T O
M A C E Y
2004.3Z/19NM
R E S T
E R R
C L B
<LT
ENG
OUT
RT
1R
2R
M A C E Y
310LO
4L
5L
1 / 1
A T
1L
T G T
CLB
A L T
- T
N 1
3R
90.3/
90.3%
4R
ENG
OUT >
5R
6R
6L
Figure
Figure 13.12
17.12
On the climb page (CLB) at 1L is the planned initial cruising altitude, if one exists and the climb
is active, and at 1R is the current climb restriction. The suffix A indicates altitude. 2L gives the
economy speed for the climb and 3L any speed restriction, which defaults to 250 kt and 10,000 ft.
Any other speed/altitude restriction imposed by ATC can be input to 3L from the scratchpad. At
2R is the ETA and distance to go to the next position. 3R gives the height error at the next point
showing the aircraft will be 310 ft low. The climb engine N1 is displayed at 4R. The prompts at
5 and 6 L and R direct the pilots to the other climb mode pages. (RTA is required time of arrival,
to be used if a RTA is specified by ATC).
304

(RNAV)
Chapter 17
CRUISE
In the cruise all three modes will normally be active.
ACT
C R Z
A L T
ECON
O P T
1L
FL210
2L
. 6 81
3L
61.1/ 61.1 %
T G T
T U R B
F U E L
4L
5L
CRZ
1 / 1
M A X
S T E P
FL342/368
T O
-----
S P D
2 0 5 6 . 2 Z / 1 98
N 1
A T
ACTUAL
NM
2R
WIND
129 / 14
3R
K A T L
7.8
<LT
1R
ENG
4R
OUT
RT
ENG
OUT >
5R
6R
6L
Figure
Figure 13.13
17.13
The cruise page (CRZ) has the current cruising altitude at 1L with the required cruising speed at
2L; in this case the economy cruise speed. At 3L is the computed EPR/N1 required to maintain
the speed at 2L, with the predicted destination fuel shown at 4L. At 1C is the optimum and
maximum cruising level for the aircraft weight and the ambient conditions. The next step
altitude is displayed at 1R with the time and distance to make the step climb at 2R. 3R shows the
estimated wind velocity and 4R shows the predicted savings or penalty in making the step climb
indicated at 1R. The other cruise pages are accessed through 5R, 6L and 6R.
305

(RNAV)
Chapter 17
DESCENT
As in the climb the LNAV, VNAV and timing modes are all operative.
ACT
E / D
ECON
2013
2L
.7 2 0 / 2 8 0
3L
240/10000
S P D
4L
S P D
T O
M A C E Y
2004.3Z/19NM
1R
2R
W P T / A L T
R E S T
V E R T
M A C E Y
6000A
D E V
MACEY/6000
F P A
25NI
V / B
3R
V / S
3.8 6.2 2360
4R
SPEED >
5R
RTA >
6R
5L
6L
1 / 1
A T
1L
T G T
PATH DES
A L T
<FORECAST
Figure
Figure 13.14
17.14
With the active economy path descent (ACT ECON PATH DES) page selected, the target Mach
number and CAS are at 2L; at 1L is the end of descent altitude. At 1R is the next descent position
and altitude; the suffix A indicates at or above. Position 3L contains the speed transition, which
is 10kt less than that stored in the database, and the transition altitude. If none is defined then it
defaults to 240/10000. No input is permitted to this field, but the data can be removed. The next
waypoint and altitude is shown at 3R, with the expected deviation from this required height
displayed at 4L. At 4R FPA is actual flight path angle based on current groundspeed and rate
of descent. V/B is the vertical bearing i.e. the FPA required to achieve the required height at the
next position, and V/S is the actual rate of descent. Access to associated descent pages is gained
at 5R, 6L and 6R.
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION - TWIN IRS, TWIN FMC

In a twin IRS system the left FMC will normally receive information from the left IRS and the
right FMC from the right IRS. The systems compare the IRS positions but if there is a discrepancy,
they cannot determine in isolation which system is in error. The FMC must have the input of
an external reference in order to determine the correct position. Using Kalman filtering, the
external reference is compared with the IRS positions to determine the system position. At the
start of a flight the IRS position will predominate but as the flight progresses, the IRS positions
will degrade and the weighting for the external reference will increase, commensurate with the
selection of external reference, and the range from that reference.
There are four possible modes of operation of a twin FMS system. In the dual mode, one FMC
acts as the master and the other as the slave. The systems independently determine position
and the positional information is co-related, to check for gross errors, before being passed to
the EFIS. This means that the position presented on the EFIS may differ from that on each CDU.
With independent operation, each FMC works in isolation with no communication.
306

(RNAV)
Chapter 17
The information from one of the FMCs will be used to feed the other systems and there will be a
difference in position between the two FMCs and between the EFIS and the non-selected FMC.
If one FMC is inoperative then the functions can be carried out by the serviceable FMC. If both
FMCs are inoperative then IRS information will be used directly in the EFIS but the automatic
performance functions will not be available.
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION - TRIPLE IRS, TWIN FMC

Positional information and heading from the triple INS/IRS is fed into the FMC where the
information is compared to check for any system having gross errors and then averaged. This
position may then be compared with an external reference which may be DME/DME, VOR/
DME LORAN C or GNSS. The FMC uses Kalman filtering to produce position and velocity.
This filtering may be done purely using the IRS information or using a combination of IRS and
external reference.
When operating at latitudes in excess of 84 the FMC will de-couple the IRS with the left FMC
using the IRS in the order left, centre, right and the right FMC in the order right, centre, left.
Over a short period of time each FMC will change the FMC position to the appropriate IRS
position. The reason for the de-coupling is that the calculation of change of longitude from
departure is a function of the secant of latitude, which, at values approaching 90, is increasing
rapidly (e.g. sec 8600 = 14.3356, sec 8601 = 14.3955). This means that a small error in latitude
will result in a large error in the calculation of change of longitude. This would give an apparent
large divergence between the IRS positions in terms of the longitude calculated, although in fact
the actual difference in position would be small.
KALMAN FILTERING
Kalman filtering is the process used within a navigation computer to combine the short term
accuracy of the IRS with the long term accuracy of the external reference. The model assesses
the velocity and position errors from the IRS by comparing the IRS position with the external
reference to produce its own prediction of position and velocity. Initially the IRS information
will be the most accurate, but as the ramp effect of IRS errors progresses, the external reference
information will become the most accurate. The weighting system applied within the model will
initially favour the IRS information but as a flight progresses it will become more biased towards
the external reference. Consequently the position will be most accurate after the position update
on the runway threshold but will gradually decay to the accuracy of the external reference. The
position information will again improve when the aircraft is on final approach using a precision
system (ILS or MLS). The more complex the model used (i.e. the more factors are included) the
better will be the quality of the system position and velocity.
DME - IRS ACCURACY

The position accuracy of the IRS continually degrades throughout the flight, although the
heading and groundspeed maintain a high degree of accuracy. The measurement of position is
subject to random errors which are dependent on the range and the cut of the position lines. The
second problem is solved by the computer selecting DMEs positioned so that a good cut will be
obtained. Slant range error is compensated for in the calculation, but the DME error is constant
at +/-0.25 nm +/-1.25% of range, so at 100 nm the error will a maximum of 1.5 nm. At the start of
a flight this error will be large compared with the IRS error, but as the flight progresses the IRS
is degrading at around 1 nm/hr. After several hours, since the DME error is constant, the DME
fixing will be significantly more accurate than the IRS.
307
Chapter 17
308

(RNAV)

(RNAV)
Chapter 17
QUESTIONS
1.
The accuracy required of a precision area navigation system is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
A basic 2D RNAV system will determine tracking information from:

a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
on the ground only

at designated positions en-route and on the ground
on the ground and overhead VOR/DME
at selected waypoints and on the ground
Refer to Appendix A. What are the correct selections to insert the most accurate position into the
IRS?
a.
b.
c.
d.
7.
POS INIT, IDENT, RTE

IDENT, RTE, POS INIT
IDENT, POS INIT, RTE
POS INIT, RTE, IDENT
The IRS position can be updated:

a.
b.
c.
d.
6.
15 nm
20 nm
25 nm
30 nm
The sequence of displays accessed on initialisation is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
5.
twin DME
VOR/DME
Twin VOR
Any of the above
An aircraft using a basic 2D RNAV system is on a section between WP1 and WP2, a distance of
45 nm. The aircraft is 20nm from the phantom station, which is 270/30 nm from the VOR/DME.
The aircraft is 15nm from the VOR/DME. The range readout will show:
a.
b.
c.
d.
4.
0.25 nm
2 nm
1 nm
0.5 nm
3R then 4R
2R then 4R
4R then 3R
3L then 4R
The position used by the FMC in the B737-400 is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
an average of the two IRS positions

an average of the two IRS positions, smoothed by the Kalman filtering process.
taken from the selected IRS, smoothed by Kalman filtering and updated to the external
reference
generated from the external reference and updated by the IRS as part of the Kalman
filtering process.
309

(RNAV)
Chapter 17
8.
The FMC position will be at its most inaccurate:

a.
b.
c.
d.
9.
Which positions can be input to the FMC using a maximum of 5 alpha-numerics?

a.
b.
c.
d.
10.
10 nm
25 nm
50 nm
60 nm
Concerning FMC operation, which of the following is true:

a.
b.
c.
d.
14.
to prevent error messages as the IRS longitudes show large differences

to ease the pilots workload
to improve the system accuracy
because the magnetic variation changes rapidly in high latitudes
The maximum range at which VOR bearing information will be used by the B737-400 FMC for
fixing is:
a.
b.
c.
d.
13.
to update the database

to read information only
to change information between the 28 day updates
to change the information to meet the sector requirements
Above latitudes of 84 a twin FMS/triple IRS system will go to de-coupled operations. The
reason for this is:
a.
b.
c.
d.
12.
SIDS & STARS, reporting points and airways designators

Navigation facilities, reporting points and airways designators
SIDS & STARS and latitude and longitude
Latitude and longitude, reporting points and airways designators
The FMC navigational database can be accessed by the pilots:

a.
b.
c.
d.
11.
on take-off
at TOC
at TOD
on final approach
the FMC combines the long term accuracy of the IRS with the short term accuracy of the
external reference
the FMC combines the long term accuracy of the IRS with the long term accuracy of the
external reference
the FMC combines the short term accuracy of the IRS with the short term accuracy of
the external reference
the FMC combines the short term accuracy of the IRS with the long term accuracy of the
external reference
The correct format for the input of position 50N 00527E to the CDU is:
a.
b.
c.
d.
310
5000.0N00527.0E
N50E00527
N5000.0E00527.0
N5000E00527

(RNAV)
15.
Chapter 17
The period of validity of the navigational database is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
28 days
1 month
determined by the national authority and may be from 28 days to 91 days
91 days
APPENDIX A
APPENDIX A
311

(RNAV)
Chapter 17
ANSWERS
312
11
12
13
14
15
10
Electronic Horizontal Situation Indicator

(EHSI)
Chapter 18
CHAPTER EIGHTEEN
ELECTRONIC HORIZONTAL SITUATION INDICATOR (EHSI)
Contents
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
EHSI CONTROLLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
EXPANDED NAVIGATION MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
FULL NAVIGATION MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
EXPANDED VOR MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
FULL ROSE VOR MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
EXPANDED ILS MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
FULL ROSE ILS MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
MAP MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
CENTRE MAP MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
PLAN MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
EHSI COLOUR CODING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
EHSI SYMBOLOGY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
QUESTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
APPENDIX A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
ANSWERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
313
Chapter 18
314

(EHSI)

(EHSI)
Chapter 18
INTRODUCTION
(EASA CS-25) AMJ 25-11, contains the advisory material for manufacturers to observe when
designing electronic horizontal situation indicator (EHSI) displays. It specifies the colour coding
to be used (see Figure 18.12), and the requirement on manufacturers to ensure there can be no
confusion between colours or symbols. It also defines the probabilities that essential information
(e.g. attitude, altitude, heading etc) will not be lost or inaccurately displayed.
Detailed knowledge of the EASA CS-25 specifications is not required for the examination. Such
knowledge as is needed has been reproduced in this chapter.
EHSI CONTROLLER
The EHSI displays navigational information, radar information and TCAS information. For
the Radio Navigation examination knowledge of, and the ability to interpret, the navigational
information is essential.
The inputs to the EHSI are from:

IRS
FMC
VOR, DME, ILS, and ADF
TCAS
AWR
The information from all of the inputs is fed to the port and starboard EHSI, through the
respective symbol generators, which are the heart of the EFIS. They process the various inputs
to generate the correct symbology for the EHSI.
The EHSI controller has a function switch to select the mode of the displays, a range selection
switch and 6 switches to control the display of data.
ADI
HSI
EXP
VOR/
NAV ILS
DH REF
150
VOR/
ILS
FULL
NAV
MAP
CTR
MAP
PLAN
RANGE
40
80 160
20
10
TFC
WXR
ON
RST
BRT
320
VOR/ADF
ON
NAV AID
ON
MAP
ARPT
RTE DATA
WPT
ON
ON
ON
Figure
Figure 14.1
18.1
315

(EHSI)
Chapter 18
The display modes available are:
Full rose Navigation (NAV)
Full rose VOR/ILS
Expanded rose Navigation (EXP NAV)
Expanded rose VOR/ILS
MAP
Centre Map (CTR MAP)
PLAN
Weather radar and TCAS information can only be displayed on the expanded NAV, expanded
VOR/ILS and MAP displays. The selectable map background options are enabled in the Map,
Centre Map and Plan modes. The information available for display is:
Tuned VOR/ADF radials (VOR/ADF)
Navigation Aids (NAV AID)
Airports (ARPT)
Route Data (RTE DATA)
Waypoints (WPT)
Weather (WXR)
The traffic switch in the centre of the range selection knob when pressed will either:
Display TCAS information, if not already displayed
Remove TCAS information from the display
When TCAS FAIL is displayed; remove the message
With the exception of the PLAN mode which is orientated to true north, all the displays are
orientated to aircraft heading which may be either magnetic or true. Range arcs (white) are
displayed in the expanded rose VOR, ILS and NAV modes when the WXR switch is on, and in
the MAP mode at all times.
316

(EHSI)
Chapter 18
DISPLAY MODES
EXPANDED NAVIGATION MODE
The expanded navigation mode displays lateral and vertical guidance information. Weather
data is displayed when the WXR switch is on.
16.2
BUGLE
HDG 130 M
0358.4z
WX + T
+12
10
100 / 20
NAV
Figure 18.2 Expanded Navigation Mode

The mode of the display isFigure
shown 14.2
in theExpanded
bottom leftNavigation
hand corner.Mode
The aircrafts position is at the
tip of the triangle (bottom centre) and the aircrafts present track is depicted by the straight line
(133M) and the aircraft heading is 130M. The active waypoint and distance to go are at top
left of display, with the ETA at top right. The required track shown by the deviation indicator is
165M, and the actual bearing to the waypoint is 156M. The aircraft is just over 2 nm right of the
required track. The heading bug is selected to 104M, the 20nm range scale is selected. WXR is
selected and the radar is operating in the weather and turbulence (WX+T) mode with 12 uptilt
and is showing a contouring cloud centred on 105M at 8 to 16nm. The wind is 100M/20 kt.
317

(EHSI)
Chapter 18
FULL NAVIGATION MODE

0358.4z
16.2 nm
2380
100' / 20
NAV
Figure14.3
18.3Full
Full
Navigation
Mode
Figure
Navigation
Mode
The full navigation mode is displaying the same data as the expanded navigation mode (at 14.3),
except that some of the symbology is different (aircraft symbol and track) and there is no WXR
facility. The vertical scale shows that the aircraft is 2380ft above the computed descent profile.
EXPANDED VOR MODE

The expanded VOR mode displays VOR information with a VOR selected and either a manual
or database generated input of track.
DME13.3 HDG
10
FROM
126 / 20
Figure14.4
18.4 Expanded
Expanded VOR
Figure
VORMode
Mode
318

(EHSI)
Chapter 18
The display shows that VOR2 is in use on a frequency of 116.80 MHz, the aircraft is outbound
from the beacon at a range of 13.3nm (DME) and is 7.5 right of the required track (165M). The
heading is 130M and the present track 133M . The pilot has selected the heading bug to 104M.
WXR is selected and the radar is in WX+T mode with 12 uptilt and the display is showing a
contouring cloud centred on 105M between 8 and 17nm. The selected scale is 20 nm and the
wind is 126M/20kt.
FULL ROSE VOR MODE

DME 17.7
125' / 20
HDG
FROM
Figure 18.5 Full Rose VOR Mode
Figurethe
14.5
Fullinformation
Rose VOR Mode
The full rose VOR mode is showing
same
as Figure 18.5, with the differences
from the expanded VOR mode being the same as in the NAV modes, except that a to/from
pointer is displayed (below the aircraft symbol).
319

(EHSI)
Chapter 18
EXPANDED ILS MODE
DME13.3 HDG
10
126 / 20
Figure 18.6 Expanded ILS Mode
Figure
14.6 Expanded
ILS Modewhen an ILS localiser frequency
The expanded ILS mode shows the
appropriate
ILS information
is selected. The glideslope indications are suppressed when the aircraft track is more than 90
removed from the ILS localiser course.
FULL ROSE ILS MODE
DME 16.7
100' / 20
Figure 18.7 Full Rose ILS Mode

The full rose ILS mode shows theFigure
same information
as the
14.7 Full Rose
ILSexpanded
Mode ILS mode and has the same
differences from the expanded ILS mode as noted for the nav modes, except that the localiser
deviation scale is doubled.
320

(EHSI)
Chapter 18
MAP MODE
26.3 nm
DIT
ZAPPO
12000
1412z
10
AFS
CAD
BANTU
10000
1359z
EYY
EDNORPIL
12000
1347z
DFC
2500
129 / 20
Figure
Figure18.8
14.8 Map
Map Mode
Mode
The MAP mode shows the navigational information selected on the control panel and is heading
orientated.
CENTRE MAP MODE

26.9 nm
10
BAT
ZAPPO
12000
1412z
DIT
ANT
AFS
EYY
126 / 20
10
BANTU
12000
1347z CAD
2500
Figure
Figure18.9
14.9 Centre Map Mode
The centre map mode displays the same information as the map mode, except the aircraft is in
the centre of the screen, no range circles are displayed and the navigational information behind
the aircraft is displayed.
321

(EHSI)
Chapter 18
PLAN MODE
26.2 nm
BURDY
ZAPPO
KBZN
BANTU
Figure
Figure18.10
14.10 Plan
PlanMode
Mode
The plan mode is orientated to true north and the information displayed at the top of the screen
is the same as in the map mode. The plan mode allows the pilot to review the planned route
using the FMC/CDU LEGS page. The display will be centred using this page.
322

(EHSI)
Chapter 18
EHSI COLOUR CODING

The colour coding used on the EHSI is to the ICAO standard, which is also the standard adopted
by EASA. The EASA CS-25 recommended colour presentation is:
Display features should be colour coded as follows:
Warnings
Flight envelopes and system limits
Cautions, abnormal sources
Earth
Engaged modes
Sky
ILS deviation pointer
Flight director bar
Red
Red
Amber/Yellow
Tan/Brown
Green
Cyan/Blue
Magenta
Magenta/Green
Specified display features should be allocated colours from one of the following colour sets:

Fixed reference symbols
Current data, values

Armed modes
Selected data, values

Selected heading
Active route/flight plan
Colour Set 1
Colour Set 2
White
White
White
Green
Magenta**
Magenta
Yellow*
Green
Cyan
Cyan
Cyan
White
The extensive use of yellow for other than caution or abnormal information is
discouraged
**
In colour set 1, magenta is intended to be associated with those analogue parameters

that constitute fly to or keep centred type information
Precipitation and turbulence areas should be coded as follows:

Precipitation

0 - 1
1 - 4
4 - 12
12 - 50
Above 50
mm/hr
mm/hr
mm/hr
mm/hr
mm/hr
Turbulence
Black
Green
Amber/Yellow
Red
Magenta
White or Magenta
323

(EHSI)
Chapter 18
RADIO NAVIGATION
EHSI
14.13SYMBOLOGY
EHSI SYMBOLOGY
EHSI
The
symbology
used
the
B737-800
is depicted
in the
following
table,
which
should
be used
in
The
symbology
usedinin
the
B737-800
is depicted
in the
following
table,
which
should
be used
conjunction
with
the
displays
shown
in
Figures
at
18.3
to
18.10:
in conjunction with the display Figures at 14.3 to 14.10:
Symbol
200nm
or
DME 124
0835.4z
324
Name
Applicable
Modes
Remarks
Distance Display
(W)
ALL
Distance is displayed to next FMC

Waypoint (nm) or tuned
Navaid (DME). Below 100nm tenths
of a nm will be displayed
HEADING
Orientation (G)
Indicator (W)
Reference (G)
ALL
Indicates number under pointer is a

heading - box indicates actual
heading. Referenced to Magnetic (M)
or true (TRU) North.
ETA Display
(W)
NAV,
PLAN, MAP
Indicates FMC computed ETA for the

active waypoint.
Expanded
Compass
Rose (W)
PLAN, MAP
VOR, ILS
Compass Data is provided by the

selected IRS (360 available but
approximately 70 are displayed
except CTR MAP - 120)
Full Compass
Rose (W)
Full NAV,
Full VOR,
Full ILS
Compass Data is provided by the

selected IRS.
Aeroplane
Symbol (W)
EXP NAV,
EXP
VOR/ILS,
MAP, PLAN
Represents the aeroplane and

indicates its position at the apex of the
triangle.
Aeroplane
Symbol (W)
Full NAV,
Full
VOR/ILS
Represents the aeroplane and

indicates its position at the centre of
the symbol.
Waypoint Active
(M)
Downpath(W)
MAP, PLAN
Active - Represents the waypoint the

aircraft is currently navigating to.
Downpath - Represents a navigation
point making up the selected active
route.
14-10
Oxford Aviation Services Limited

(EHSI)
Chapter 18
RADIO NAVIGATION
EHSI
Trend Vector
MAP
Predicts aeroplane directional trend at

the end of 30, 60 and 90 second
intervals. Based on bank angle and
ground speed. Three segments are
displayed when selected range scale is
greater than 20nm, two on the 20nm
and one segment when on the 10nm
scale.
Active Route (M)

Active Route
Mods (W)
Inactive
Route (C)
MAP, PLAN
The active route is displayed with

continuous lines (M) between
waypoints. Active route modifications
are displayed with short dashes (W)
between waypoints. When a change is
activated in the FMC, the short dashes
are replaced by a continuous line.
Inactive routes are displayed with
long dashes (C) between waypoints.
Vertical Pointer
(M) and
Deviation Scale
(W)
NAV, MAP
Displays vertical deviation from

selected vertical profile (pointer) in
MAP mode during descent only.
Scale indicates +/- 400ft deviation.
Glide slope
Pointer (M) and
Deviation Scale
(W)
ILS
Displays Glide slope position and

deviation in ILS mode.
Wind Speed and

Direction (W)
NAV, MAP,
VOR, ILS
Indicates wind speed in knots and

wind direction with respect to the
map display orientation and compass
reference.
North Pointer (G)
PLAN
Indicates map background is

orientated and referenced to true
north.
14-11
325

(EHSI)
Chapter 18
RADIO NAVIGATION
EHSI
Altitude Profile
Point and
Identifier(G)
MAP
Represents an FMC calculated point

and is labelled on the flight plan path
as T/C (top of climb), T/D (top of
descent), E/D (end of descent) and
S/C (step climb).
Weather Radar
Returns
Mapping Radar
Returns
(both G,A,R,M)
EXP NAV,
EXP
VOR/ILS,
MAP
Multicoloured returns are presented

when either WXR ON switch is
pushed. Most intense regions are
displayed in Red, lesser Amber lowest
intensity Green. Areas of turbulence
are displayed in magenta
Range Arcs (W)
EXP VOR,
EXP ILS,
EXP NAV,
MAP
Range Arcs are displayed in the

expanded rose VOR/ILS and NAV
modes when the Weather Radar
Switch is ON. Range arcs are
displayed in the MAP mode with or
without the WXR Switch ON.
Active
Waypoint
Name (M)
NAV
Displays the name of the active

waypoint.
Selected Heading
Bug (M)
ALL
Indicates the heading selected on the

MCP. A dashed line extends from the
marker to the airplane symbol (except
for PLAN mode) for ease in tracking
the marker when it is out of view.
Waypoint
Bearing
Pointer (M)
NAV
Displays relative bearing to active

waypoint.
ADF Bearing
Pointers
ALL
Indicates relative bearing to tuned

ADF station as received from the
respective ADF radio.
and
Reference Line
326
14-12

(EHSI)
Chapter 18
RADIO NAVIGATION
EHSI
VOR / ILS
Frequency
Display (G)
VOR, ILS
Displays frequency of manually tuned

navaid. The word AUTO is
displayed in place of the frequency if
the VHF Nav radio is in the auto tune
mode
Drift Angle
Pointer (W)
FULL NAV,
FULL
VOR/ILS
Indicates airplanes present track.

Replaces track line when a Full Rose
mode is selected.
Altitude Range
Arc (G)
MAP
The intersection of the arc with the

track line is the predicted point where
the MCP altitude will be reached.
The prediction is based on present
ground speed and airplane vertical
speed.
Position
Difference
Display (W)
NAV, MAP
NUMBERS - Indicate the Position

Difference in NM between the FMCs
present position and the L IRS and R
IRS present positions respectively.
ARROWS - Rotate through 360 to
indicate the relative bearing to the
associated IRS present position.
L or R - Indicates which IRS present
position the displayed Position
Difference corresponds to.
Displayed when the Position
Difference of the L IRS and/or R IRS
exceeds the Position Difference limits
detected by the FMC or EFIS Symbol
generator.
Present Track
Line (W) and
Range Scale (W)
EXP NAV,
EXP VOR,
EXP ILS,
MAP
Displays present ground track based

on airplane heading and wind. Range
numeric values are one-half the actual
selected range. With heading-up
orientation, the track line will be
rotated left or right at an angle equal
to the drift angle.
14-13
Oxford Aviation Services

327Limited

(EHSI)
Chapter 18
RADIO NAVIGATION
EHSI
Lateral Deviation
Indicator Bar
(M) and
Deviation Scale
(W)
NAV, VOR,
ILS
Displays ILS, VOR, or FMC (NAV)

course deviation.
ILS 1 dot 1 Normal Scale
ILS 1 dot 1/2 Expanded Scale
VOR 1 dot 5
NAV 1 dot 2 NM
Selected Course
Pointer (W) and
Line (M)
EXP NAV,
EXP ILS,
EXP VOR
Points to selected course as set by the

respective MCP course selector (VOR
/ ILS) or by the FMC (NAV)
Selected Course
Pointer (W)
FULL NAV,
FULL VOR,
FULL ILS
Points to selected course as set by the

respective MCP course selector (VOR
/ ILS) or by the FMC (NAV)
To / From
Pointer (W)
328
TO/FROM symbol is displayed when

VOR navigation is being used.
To/From
Annunciation
(W)
VOR
Operative in VOR Mode only.

Indicates whether or not the selected
course, if intercepted directly, and
tracked, would take the aircraft TO or
FROM the station.
Off-Route
Waypoint (C)
MAP, PLAN
When the WPT switch is ON, FMC

database waypoints not used in the
selected flight plan route are
displayed. Displayed only for HSI
ranges of 10, 20, or 40 NM.
Airport (C)
MAP, PLAN
ARPT switch - OFF

Only origin and destination are
displayed.
ARPT switch - ON
All FMC database airports within the
MAP area are displayed.
Airport Identifier
and Runway (W)
MAP, PLAN
Available when the EHSI display

range is 80, 160, or 320 NM.
Displayed if the airport has been
selected as the origin or destination
airport with a specific runway
selected.
14-14

(EHSI)
Chapter 18
RADIO NAVIGATION
EHSI
Airport and
Runway (W)
MAP, PLAN
Available when the EHSI display

range is 10, 20, or 40 NM.
Displayed if the airport has been
selected as the origin or destination
airport with a specific runway
selected.
Runway symbol is scaled to represent
the length of the selected runway.
The dashed centre lines extend
outward 14.2 NM from the runway
thresholds.
Vertical Profile
Points (G)
MAP, PLAN
Represents an FMC computed vertical

profile point in the active flight plan
as T/C (top-of-climb), T/D (top-ofdescent), S/C (step-climb), and E/D
(end-of-descent).
A deceleration segment point has no
identifier.
MAP, PLAN
NAV AID switch - OFF

Tubed Navaids (excluding NDBs) are
displayed in green.
NAV AID switch - ON
All appropriate navaids in the FMC
database and within the MAP area are
displayed when the range is 10, 20, or
40 NM. Only high altitude navaids are
displayed when selected range is 80,
160, or 320NM.
Nav aids not being used are displayed
in Cyan (blue)
Manually Tuned
VOR Radials (G)
MAP, PLAN
When a VOR navaid is manually

tuned, the associated MCP selected
course and its reciprocal are displayed.
VOR Radials (G)
MAP
The VOR/ADF switch on the EFIS

control panel must be ON and a valid
VOR signal must be received.
Identifiers (G)
VOR (C, G)
DME / TACAN
(C, G)
VORTAC (C, G)
14-15
329
Oxford Aviation Services
Limited

(EHSI)
Chapter 18
RADIO NAVIGATION
EHSI
ADF Bearings
(G)
MAP
The VOR/ADF switch on the EFIS

control panel must be ON and a valid
ADF signal must be received.
Displays relative bearing to the tuned
ADF station(s).
Selected Fix
Circle (G) Fix
Symbol and
Identifier (C or
G)
MAP, PLAN
Depicts the selected reference point as

entered on the FMC/CDU FIX INFO
page. Can appear with other special
map symbols (e.g. VOR, VORTAC,
airport or waypoint etc.) if stored in the
FMC data base.
Selected Fix
Radial (G)
MAP, PLAN
A fix reference radial is displayed for

each downtrack bearing entered on the
FMC / CDU FIX INFO page.
Selected Fix
Circle (G)
Holding Pattern
A DME reference circle is displayed

for each distance entered on the FMC /
CDU FIX INFO page.
MAP, PLAN
Active (M)
Modification (W)
Inactive (C)
330
14-16
Appears as a fixed size holding pattern

if selected range is greater than 80
NM.
A scaled representation of the holding
pattern is displayed when the selected
range is 80 NM or less and the
airplane is within 3 min. of the holding
fix.

(EHSI)
Chapter 18
QUESTIONS
1.
Refer to appendix A. Which display shows the expanded ILS mode?

a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Refer to appendix A. Which mode is display C?

a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
130
165
146
135
The EASA CS25 colour code for ILS deviation pointer is:
a.
b.
c.
d.
7.
3 nm
8
3
1.5
On display A, what is the aircrafts track?

a.
b.
c.
d.
6.
full ILS
full VOR
full nav
full map
On display E, what is the approximate deviation from the required track?

a.
b.
c.
d.
5.
Centre map
Map
Plan
Expanded nav
Refer to appendix A. Which mode is display A?

a.
b.
c.
d.
4.
A
B
D
E
magenta
cyan
green
amber
The EASA CS-25 colour code for selected heading is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
green
magenta
amber
white
331

(EHSI)
Chapter 18
8.
The EASA CS-25 colour code for precipitation rate in excess of 50 mm/hr is:
a.
b.
c.
d.
9.
The EASA CS-25 colour code for the active route is:
a.
b.
c.
d.
10.
MAP
EXP ILS/VOR, MAP & CTR MAP
MAP & CTR MAP
PLAN, EXP ILS/VOR, MAP & CTR MAP
The heading inputs to the EHSI are from:

a.
b.
c.
d.
14.
1
2
0.5
5
On which displays will the range markers be displayed regardless of the weather selection?
a.
b.
c.
d.
13.
white
magenta
green
cyan
The horizontal deviation on the expanded ILS display represented by one dot is
approximately:
a.
b.
c.
d.
12.
yellow
magenta
green
cyan
The EASA CS-25 colour code for a downpath waypoint is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
11.
red
amber
magenta
white or magenta
The IRS
The FMC
the IRS through the symbol generator
the FMC through the symbol generator
Refer to Appendix A. The track direction from BANTU to ZAPPO on display F is:
a.
b.
c.
d.
332
360 (M)
130 (M)
360 (T)
130 (T)

(EHSI)
15.
Chapter 18
The EASA CS- OPS1 recommended colour code for an in-use radio navigation facility is:
a.
b.
c.
d.
cyan
magenta
white
green
APPENDIX A
APPENDIX A
26.2 nm
BURDY
ZAPPO
KBZN
BANTU
333

(EHSI)
Chapter 18
ANSWERS
334
11
12
13
14
15
10
Global Navigation Satellite Systems

(GNSS)
Chapter 19
CHAPTER NINETEEN
GLOBAL NAVIGATION SATELLITE SYSTEMS (GNSS)
Contents
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
SATELLITE ORBITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
POSITION REFERENCE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
THE GPS SEGMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
THE SPACE SEGMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
THE CONTROL SEGMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
THE USER SEGMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
GPS ERRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
SYSTEM ACCURACY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
INTEGRITY MONITORING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
DIFFERENTIAL GPS (DGPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
COMBINED GPS AND GLONASS SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
QUESTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
ANSWERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
335
Chapter 19
336

(GNSS)

(GNSS)
Chapter 19
INTRODUCTION
The development of space based navigation systems commenced in the 1950s with the
establishment of the USA Transit system. The current generation began development in the
1970s and the next generation is already under development. It is intended that GNSS will
eventually replace all terrestrial radio navigation facilities. However, despite USA assertions
that this is imminent, it is unlikely to be achieved in the foreseeable future.
The current systems have brought a new dimension of accuracy to navigation systems with
precision measured in metres, and where special differential techniques are used the potential
is for accuracies substantially less than one metre.
At present there are two operational global navigation satellite systems (GNSS), enhancements
of the existing systems under development and a planned European system. These systems
are:
The NAVSTAR Global Positioning System (GPS) operated by the USA.
The Global Orbiting Navigation Satellite System (GLONASS) operated by Russia. There are
some doubts about the long term viability of GLONASS because of the economic situation in
Russia.
Local area differential GNSS (LADGNSS) to provide improved accuracy and integrity to
aircraft making airfield approaches.
Wide area differential GNSS (WADGNSS) of which the European Geostationary Navigation
Overlay System (EGNOS) currently under development is the European contribution to a global
augmentation system providing integrity and improved accuracy.
The European Galileo, which is under development and intended to become operational in
2008, but this will probably slip to 2010. The principal reason the Europeans are developing
their own system is one of internal security, since access to the full GPS or GLONASS facilities
is outside European control. It can be anticipated that other countries or regions may develop
their own systems for the same reason.
This chapter will study GPS, LADGNSS and EGNOS in detail, but it should be borne in mind
that GLONASS operates on the same principles as GPS, although there are differences in
implementation.
337

(GNSS)
Chapter 19
SATELLITE ORBITS
Johannes Keplers three laws quantified the mathematics of planetry orbits which apply equally
to the orbits of satellites:
First Law: a satellites orbit describes an ellipse with the earth at one of the foci.
Figure
Figure19.1
15.1
Second Law: a satellite sweeps out equal areas in equal time.
Earth
Equal Areas In Equal Time.

Figure 19.2
Figure 15.2
Third Law: The square of the satellites orbital period is proportional to the cube of its average
distance.
Using these laws, and given a starting point, the satellites - space vehicles (SVs) calculate their
positions at all points in their orbits. The SVs orbital position is known as ephemeris.
338

(GNSS)
Chapter 19
POSITION REFERENCE SYSTEM

GNSS use an Earth referenced three dimensional Cartesian coordinate system with its origin at
the centre of the earth.
Figure
Figure 15.3
19.3
Because the systems are global, a common model of the Earth was required. The World Geodetic
Survey of 1984 (WGS84) was selected as the appropriate model for GPS and all GPS terrestrial
positions are defined on this model and referenced to the Cartesian coordinate system. Where
other models are required, for instance for the UKs Ordnance Survey maps, a mathematical
transformation is available between the models (note this is incorporated as a feature of GPS
receivers available in the UK). Galileo uses the European Terrestrial Reference System 1989
(ETRS89) and the Russian model for GLONASS is known as Parameters of the Earth 1990
(PZ90). WGS84 is the ICAO standard for aeronautical positions, however, since all these systems
are mathematical models transposition from ETRS89 to WGS84, for example, is a relatively
simple mathematical process. Mathematically all these models are regular shapes, known as
ellipsoids.
339

(GNSS)
Chapter 19
Figure
Figure 15.4
19.4
The ellipsoids cannot be a perfect representation, nor can they represent geographical features,
e.g. mountains and land depressions. The distance of mean sea level from the centre of the earth
depends on gravitational forces which vary both locally and globally. Hence mean sea level will
not necessarily coincide with the surface of the ellipsoid. The maximum variation between mean
sea level and the surface of the ellipsoid for WGS84 is approximately 50 m. Hence the vertical
information provided by any system referenced to this model cannot be used in isolation for
vertical positioning, except when in medium/high level cruise with all aircraft using the GNSS
reference and in LADGNSS applications -(where the vertical error is removed).
340

(GNSS)
Chapter 19
THE GPS SEGMENTS

GPS comprises three segments:
The Space Segment
The Control Segment and
The User Segment

HAWAII
KWAJALEIN
ASCENSION Is.
DIEGO GARCIA
THE SPACE
SEGMENT
MONITOR
STATIONS
THE
CONTROL
SEGMENT
COLORADO
SPRINGS
THE USER
SEGMENT
Figure 19.5
Three
Segments
of theofGPS
ControlControl
System
Figure
15.5.The
The
Three
Segments
theOperational
GPS Operational
System.
GPS time is measured in weeks and seconds from 00:00:00 on 06 January 1980 UTC. An epoch
is 1,024 weeks after which the time restarts at zero. GPS time is referenced to UTC but does not
run in direct synchronisation, so time correlation information is included in the SV broadcast
(see page 343). In July 2000 the difference was about 13 seconds.
341

(GNSS)
Chapter 19
THE SPACE SEGMENT

In GPS the space segment comprises a constellation of 24 SVs in 6 orbital planes; 21 SVs are
operational and the other 3 are in-space spares, to be activated to replace any failure of an
operational SV. The orbits have an average height of 10,898nm (20,180km) and have an orbital
period of 12 hours. The orbital planes have an inclination of 55 and are equally spaced around
the Equator. The spacing of the SVs in their orbits is such that an observer on or close to the
surface of the Earth will have between five and eight SVs in view, at least 5 above the horizon.
The SVs have 3 or 4 atomic clocks of caesium or rubidium standard with an accuracy of 1
nanosecond.
A SV will be masked (that is not selected for navigation use) if its elevation is less than 5 above
the horizon.
FigureFigure
19.6. The
GPS
Satellite
Constellation
(21 active,
spares,3in
6 orbital
15.6.
The
GPS Satellite
Constellation
(213active,
spares,
in 6planes)
orbital planes)
The SVs broadcast pseudo-random noise (PRN) codes of one millisecond duration on two
frequencies in the UHF band and a NAV and SYSTEM data message. Each SV has its own
unique code.
L1 Frequency: 1,575.42 MHz transmits the coarse acquisition (C/A) code repeated every
millisecond with a modulation of 1.023MHz, the precision (P) code, modulation 10.23 MHz
repeats every seven days and the navigation and system data message at 50 Hz. The navigation
and system data message is used by both the P and C/A codes.
L2 Frequency: 1227.6 MHz transmitting the P code. The second frequency is used to determine
ionospheric delays.
L3 Frequency: 1381.05 MHz has been allocated as a second frequency for non-authorised users
and will be available from 2007/8, its use is the same as the L2 frequency.
342

(GNSS)
Chapter 19
L1 Carrier 1575.42 Mhz

L 1 Signal
C/A code 1.023 Mhz

Nav/ system Data 50 Hz
Mixer
Modulo to Sum
P-Code 10.23 Mhz

L2 Carrier 1227.6 Mhz
L 2 Signal
Figure 19.7
Figure 15.7
Only the C/A code is available to civilian users. The reason the use of two frequencies is important
will be discussed in GNSS errors. The P code is provided for the US military and approved civilian
users and foreign military users at the discretion of the US DOD. The P code is designated as the
Y code when anti-spoofing measures are implemented. The Y code is encrypted and therefore
only available to users with the necessary decryption algorithms.
The PRN codes provide SV identification and a timing function for the receiver to measure SV
range.
The information contained in the nav and system data message is:
SV position
SV clock time
SV clock error
Information on ionospheric conditions
Supplementary information, including the almanac (orbital parameters for the SVs), SV
health (P-code only) correlation of GPS time with UTC and other command and control
functions.
The two services provided are:
The standard positioning service (SPS) using the C/A code

The precise positioning service (PPS) using the C/A and P codes
GLONASS is intended to have 24 SVs (21 operational and 3 in-space spares) in three orbital
planes inclined at 65 to the Equator. The orbital height is 10,313 nm (19,099 km) giving an
orbital period of 11 hours 15 minutes. As in GPS, GLONASS transmits C/A and P codes. The
codes are the same for all SVs, but each SV uses different frequencies. The L1 frequency is
incremental from 1,602 MHz and the L2 frequency from 1,246 MHz.
343

(GNSS)
Chapter 19
THE CONTROL SEGMENT

The GPS control segment comprises:
A Master Control Station

A Back-up Control Station
5 Monitoring Stations
BACK UP CONTROL STATION

MASTER CONTROL STATION
MONITOR STATION
GROUND ANTENNA
ONIZUKA
HAWAII
COLORADO
SPRINGS
KWAJALEIN
ASCENSION
DIEGO
GARCIA
Figure
15.8
Segment
Figure
19.8GPS
GPSOperational
Operational Control
Control Segment
The monitoring stations check the SVs internally computed position and clock time at least
once every 12 hours. Although the calculation of position using Keplerian laws is precise, the
SV orbits are affected by the gravitational influences of the sun, moon and planets and are also
affected by solar radiation, so errors between the computed position and the actual position
occur. When a positional error is detected by the ground station, it is sent to the SV for the SV
to update its knowledge of position. Similarly if an error is detected in the SV clock time this
is notified to the SV, but since the clocks cannot be adjusted, this error is included in the SV
broadcast (see Figure 19.8).
344

(GNSS)
Chapter 19
THE USER SEGMENT

The User Segment is all the GPS receivers using the space segment to determine position on
and close to the surface of the Earth. These receivers may be stand-alone or be part of integrated
systems.
There are several types of receiver:
Sequential receivers which use one or two channels and scan the SVs sequentially to determine
the pseudo-ranges.
Multiplex receivers may be single or twin channel and are able to move quickly between SVs
to determine the pseudo-ranges and hence have a faster time to first fix than the sequential
receivers.
Multi-channel receivers monitor several SVs simultaneously to give instant positional
information. These include all-in-view receivers which monitor all the SVs in view and select
the best 4 to determine position. Because of the speed of operation these are the preferred type
for aviation.
Figure 19.10a GPS Receiver, Control Unit
Figure 15.10a GPS Receiver, Control Unit
Figure 19.10b Initialisation Page
Figure 15.10b Initialisation Page
345
Chapter 19

(GNSS)
Figure 19.10c Position Page
Figure 15.10c Position Page
Figure 19.10d Waypoint Definitions Page
Figure 15.10d Waypoint Definitions Page
346

(GNSS)
Chapter 19
The navigation message is contained in one frame comprising 5 sub-frames. The sub-frames
each take 6 seconds to transmit, so the total frame takes 30 seconds for the receiver to receive.
Frame 1 contains SV clock error, frames 2 and 3 contain the SV ephemeris data, frame 4 contains
data on the ionospheric propagation model, GPS time and its correlation with UTC. The fifth
frame is used to transmit current SV constellation almanac data. A series of 25 frames is required
to download the whole almanac. The almanac data is usually downloaded hourly and is valid
from 4 hours to several months dependent on the type of receiver.
SUBFRAME #
ONE SUBFRAME = 300 BITS, 6 SECONDS
TLM
HOW SV CLOCK CORRECTION DATA
TLM
HOW SV EPHEMERIS DATA (I)
TLM
HOW SV EPHEMERIS DATA (II)
ONE
DATA
FRAME
=
1500 BITS,
30 SECONDS
25 PAGES OF SUBFRAME 4 AND 5 = 12.5 MINUTES
TLM
HOW OTHER DATA (IONO,UTC,ETC)
TLM
HOW ALMANAC DATA FOR ALL SVS
ONE WORD = 30 BITS, 24 DATA, 6 PARITY

TLM
TELEMETRY WORD
HOW
HANDOVER WORD
8-BIT PREAMBLE
17-BIT TIME OF WEEK
DATA
PARITY
DATA
PARITY
Figure
Navigation Data
DataFormat
Format
Figure15.11
19.11 GPS
GPS Navigation
Because the orbits are mathematically defined, an almanac of their predicted positions can be
and is maintained within the receivers. Thus, when the receiver is switched on, provided it
knows its position and time to a reasonable degree of accuracy, it will know which SVs to expect
and can commence position update immediately. If the almanac is corrupted, out of date or lost,
or if receiver position or receiver clock time are significantly in error it will not find the expected
SVs and will download the almanac from the constellation. The almanac data fills 25 frames
so it takes 12.5 minutes to download. When the receiver position is significantly in error it will
not detect the expected SVs. Having downloaded the almanc the receiver will now carry out a
skysearch, this involves the receiver checking which SVs are above the horizon and selecting the
4 to give the most accurate fix, then commencing position fixing, this takes a least a further 2.5
minutes. Hence the time to first fix will be at least 15 minutes. If there are no problems then the
first fix, on initialisation, will be obtained within about 30 seconds.
The GPS receiver internally generates the PRN code and compares the relative position of the
two codes to determine the time interval between transmission and reception.
347

(GNSS)
Chapter 19
RECEIVER OSCILLATOR PRODUCED

1
7 8 9
10
7 8 9
10
11
TIME
DIFFERENCE
SATELLITE (ATOMIC CLOCKS)

PSEUDO-RANDOM
CODES
Figure 19.12 Pseudo-Random Code Time Measurement

Figure
15.12. Pseudo-Random Code Time Measurement
The receiver uses four SVs and constructs a three dimensional fix using the pseudo-ranges from
the 4 SVs. Each range corresponds to a position somewhere on the surface of a sphere with a
radius in excess of 10,900nm.
11,000 MILES
Figure 19.13
Figure 15.13.
The intersection of two range spheres will give a circular position line.
348

(GNSS)
Chapter 19
TWO MEASUREMENTS PUTS US

SOMEWHERE ON THIS CIRCLE
Figure15.14.
19.14
Figure
The introduction of a third range sphere will produce two positions several thousand miles
apart. One position will be on or close to the surface of the earth, the other position will be out in
space, so it would be possible to use just three pseudo-ranges to produce a position, by rejecting
the space position.
However, a fourth range position line is needed because of the way the receiver compensates
for receiver time errors. The receiver has an accurate crystal oscillator to provide time. However,
the accuracy does not compare with the accuracy of the SV clocks, so there will always be an
error in the time measurement, and hence in the computation of range. Furthermore the receiver
clock is deliberately kept in error by a small factor to ensure that the correction process can only
go in one direction. This is why the initial calculated range is known as a pseudo-range. As a
result the position lines will not meet in a point but will form a cocked hat. For example, if the
receiver clock is permanently 1 millisecond fast, then the receiver will over estimate each range
by about 162 nm. So when the receiver sets about calculating the correct ranges it knows that it
must reduce the pseudo ranges.
349

(GNSS)
Chapter 19
A
B
5
SECONDS
XX
7
SECONDS
9
SECONDS
Figure 15.16a
19.16a
Figure
4
SECONDS
6
SECONDS
8
SECONDS
Figure 19.16b
Figure 15.16b.
The receiver has to correct the X, Y, Z coordinates and time to produce the fix. Since it has each
element provided by each SV the receiver can set up 4 linear simultaneous equations each with
4 unknown quantities (X, Y, Z, and T) which it solves by iteration to remove the receiver time
error, and hence, range errors. This means that the use of 4 SVs provides a 3D fix and an accurate
time reference, i.e. a 4D fix, at the receiver. The X, Y, and Z coordinates can now be transposed
into latitude and longitude or any other earth reference system (e.g. the UK Ordnance Survey
grid) and altitude.
Note: some receivers can also produce a three dimensional position using three SVs with an input of
altitude, the altitude simulates a fourth SV positioned at the centre of the earth. However the position
produced will not be as accurate as the 4D fix.
350

(GNSS)
Chapter 19
GPS ERRORS
All errors are at the 95% probability level.
Ephemeris Errors. These are errors in the SVs calculation of position caused by the gravitational
effects of the sun, moon, planets and solar radiation. As discussed on page 344 the SV position is
checked every 12 hours and, where necessary, updated. The maximum error will be 2.5 m.
SV Clock Error. As with SV ephemeris, the SV clock is checked at least every 12 hours and any
error is passed to the SV to be included in the broadcast. Maximum error 1.5 m.
Ionospheric propagation error. The interaction of the radio energy with the ionized particles in
the ionosphere causes the radio energy to be slowed down as it traverses the ionosphere, this
is known as the ionospheric delay. The delay is dependent on both the level of ionization and
the frequency of the radio waves. The higher the frequency is, the smaller the delay and the
higher the levels of ionisation, the greater the delay. The receiver contains an average model
of the ionosphere which is used to make time corrections to the measured time interval. The
state of the ionosphere is continuously checked at the monitoring stations and the required
modifications to the model is regularly updated to the SVs and thence to the receivers. However,
the propagation path from the SV to the monitoring station will be very different to that to the
receiver, so this is only a partial solution.
The ionospheric delay is inversely proportional to the square of the frequencies:

Delay =
1
L12
L22
( )
As two different frequencies will experience different delays, by measuring the difference in
arrival time of the two signals we can deduce the total delay experienced hence minimising the
error and calculate a very accurate range.
This is the most significant of the errors in SV navigation systems.
Maximum error for single frequency operation is 5 m.
Tropospheric propagation error. Because of the inherent accuracy of SV navigation systems,
the effect of variations in tropospheric conditions on the passage of radio waves has become
significant. Variations in pressure, temperature, density and humidity affect the speed of
propagation, increased density and increased absolute humidity reduce the speed of propagation.
For example, a change in transit time of one nanosecond would give an error of 0.3m. Maximum
0.5m. As with ionospheric propagation error this is minimised with the use of two frequencies.
Receiver noise error. All radio receivers generate internal noise, which in the case of GNSS
receivers can cause errors in measurement of the time difference. Maximum 0.3m.
Multi-path reception. Reflections from the ground and parts of the aircraft result in multipath reception. This can be minimised by careful siting of the aerial and by internal processing
techniques. Maximum 0.6 m.
351

(GNSS)
Chapter 19
Geometric dilution of precision (GDOP). This is the GPS term for a poor cut between position
lines. GDOP occurs when the satellites are (relatively) close to each other.
GOOD
POOR
Figure 19.17 GDOP
Figure 15.17. GDOP.

GDOP is further divided:
Position dilution of precision (PDOP). This refers to errors in the X, Y and Z
coordinates.
Horizontal dilution of precision (HDOP). This refers to errors in the X and Y
coordinates.
Vertical dilution of precision (VDOP). This refers to errors in the Z coordinate.
Time dilution of precision (TDOP). This refers to timing errors.
Errors caused by GDOP are minimised by the geometry of the positioning of the SVs in their
orbits and by the receivers selecting the four best SVs to determine position. The SV geometry
that will provide the most accurate fixing information is one SV directly overhead the receiver
and the other three SVs close to the horizon and spaced 120 apart.
Effect of aircraft manoeuvre. Aircraft Manoeuvre may result in part of the aircraft shadowing
one or more of the in-use SVs. There are two possible outcomes of this. Firstly, whilst the SV is
shadowed, the signal may be lost resulting in degradation of accuracy, or the receiver may lock
onto reflections from other parts of the aircraft again with a reduction in accuracy. The effect of
manoeuvre can be minimised by careful positioning of the aerial on the aircraft. The optimum
position for the antenna is on top of the fuselage close to the aircrafts centre of gravity.
Selective availability (SA). SA was introduced into GPS by the US DOD in about 1995. It
deliberately degraded the accuracy of the fixing on the C/A code (i.e. for civilian users). The
USA withdrew SA at 0000 on 01 May 2000, and President Clinton stated that it would never be
reintroduced. (SA downgraded the accuracy of position derived from the C/A code to the order
of 100 m spherical error). SA was achieved by introducing random errors in the SV clock time,
known as dithering the SV clock time.
352

(GNSS)
Chapter 19
SYSTEM ACCURACY
The ICAO specification requires an accuracy (95%) of the SPS to be:
Vertical:
Horizontal:
Time:
+/-13 m
+/-22 m
40 nanoseconds (10-9)
INTEGRITY MONITORING
The ICAO specification for radio navigation systems requires a 2 second warning of failure for
precision systems (e.g. ILS) and 8 second warning for non-precision systems. With 4 SVs being
used to provide a 3D position, there is no means of detecting the degradation of information
in any of the SV data and an operator could potentially experience errors of hundreds of miles
unless he was able to cross check the GNSS position with another system. Therefore differential
systems are under development which will determine any degradation in accuracy and allow a
timely warning of the failure or degradation of the information provided.
DIFFERENTIAL GPS (DGPS)

If the SV information degrades, the GPS receiver has no means of determining the degradation.
Consequentially the safety of flight may be seriously endangered. DGPS is a means of improving
the accuracy of GPS by monitoring the integrity of the SV data and warning the user of any
errors which occur. DGPS systems will provide warning of failure in the SV data and prevent or
minimize the effect of such errors, or provide failure warning and improve the accuracy of the
deduced position. There are three kinds of DGPS currently in use or under development:
Air based augmentation systems (ABAS)

Ground based augmentation systems (GBAS)
Satellite based augmentation systems (SBAS)
Air Based Augmentation Systems (ABAS)

To determine, at the receiver, if any of the data from any of the SVs is in error requires the
use of a fifth SV. By comparing positions generated by the combinations of the five SVs it is
possible to detect errors in the data, and hence which SV is in error. The rogue SV can then be
deselected. However, once the system is back to 4 SVs the facility is lost. The CAA recommend
that a minimum of 6 SVs are available, so that if a SV is deselected the integrity monitoring
continues to be available. The GPS term for this is receiver autonomous integrity monitoring
(RAIM). RAIM has only limited availability at present and would require at least 30 operational
SVs to achieve continuous global availability. RAIM will only provide failure warning and either
prevent or minimise errors in computed position arising from erroneous SV data.
Ground Based Augmentation Systems (GBAS)
GBAS is a local area DGPS (LADGPS) implemented through a local area augmentation system
(LAAS). This system is used in aviation to provide both failure warning and enhancement of the
GPS receiver position by removing ephemeris and SV clock errors and minimising ionospheric
and tropospheric errors. It will not remove errors arising from receiver noise and multi-path
reception as these errors are particular to the receiver. It is specifically established to provide
precision runway approaches.
353

(GNSS)
Chapter 19
The implementation of a LAAS requires a precisely surveyed site on the aerodrome and a means
of transmitting the corrections to aircraft operating close to the aerodrome. On the site is a GPS
receiver which determines the GPS position and compares it with the known position of the site.
The error in the X, Y and Z coordinates is determined and specially formatted to be transmitted
to approaching aircraft. The system will detect any errors in the SV data and either correct the
error or give a failure warning indication.
The data is transmitted from an aerial close to the runway threshold and is formatted in such a
way that the GPS receiver in the aircraft reads the transmission as being from a SV situated on
the aerodrome. This pseudo-SV is known as a pseudolite (pseudo-satellite).
Figure 19.18 LAAS

Figure 15.18 - LAAS
When the aircraft is close to the DGPS site, the ionospheric and tropospheric transmission paths
will be virtually identical so these errors are effectively eliminated. The LAAS has the potential
to provide the necessary accuracy to achieve category 3C type operations.
Satellite Based Augmentation Systems (SBAS)
SBAS utilise a wide area DGPS (WADGPS) implemented through a wide area augmentation
system (WAAS). There are three systems currently under development which will cover a large
area of the northern hemisphere, these are:
The European Geostationary Navigation Overlay System (EGNOS), declared operational in
July 2004.
The USA WAAS, declared operational in July 2003.
The Japanese Multi-functional Transport Satellite Augmentation System, (MSAS) expected to
become operational in 2010.
The Indian Geo and GPS Augmented Navigation (GAGAN), expected to become operational
in 2014.
The objectives of these systems are more or less identical, to provide an integrity monitoring and
position enhancement to aircraft operating over a large area. The methods of implementation
differ slightly between systems, but the end result to the user will be the same (i.e. there will be
full compatability between the systems). The discussion of WADGPS will centre on EGNOS, but
the same principles apply to all SBAS.
354

(GNSS)
Chapter 19
There are 3 segments making up SBAS:

The space segment which comprises the GPS and GLONASS constellations and geo-stationary
SVs.
Note: geostationary SVs have an orbital period of 24 hours and are found only in Equatorial orbits at an
altitude of 35,800 km
The ground segment comprising reference stations (RS), regional control stations (RCS)
And a master control station (MCS) (or navigation earth station (NES)).
The user segment comprised all who use the service.
RS are established within a region to measure the accuracy of the SV data and the ionospheric
and tropospheric effects on the SV transmissions. As with LAAS the RS are precisely surveyed
sites containing a GPS receiver and an accurate atomic clock. Each RS is linked to a RCS. The
RCS will be linked in turn to MCS (or NES).
GPS
GEOSTATIONARY
GPS
GPS
Figure
Figure 15.19
19.19 EGNOS
EGNOS Segments
Segments
The RS determine their GPS position from the SV data. The RS now, since it knows its own
position and receives the SV ephemeris, clock time and any clock error corrections, back
calculates the true position and time at the SV and determines the range error for each SV. It also
determines if there are significant errors which render any of the SVs information unusable,
hence providing an integrity check on the system. This range error will not deviate significantly
over a considerable range (400+ km), neither will the relative effects of the ionospheric and
tropospheric propagation.
The data (SV errors and integrity assessment) is sent via the RCS to the MCS (located at the
NATS at Gatwick) where it is formatted for use by suitable equipped GPS receivers. The data is
then sent to Goonhilly Down to be uplinked for broadcast on the East Atlantic and Indian Ocean
INMARSAT geo-stationary SVs navigation broadcast channels. The GPS receivers incorporate
the data into the calculations and achieve both enhancement of position and failure warning.
355
Chapter 19

(GNSS)
Whilst the accuracy of GPS will be greatly enhanced by WADGPS, it cannot and is unlikely
to achieve the accuracy required for category 1 type operations. These will continue for the
foreseeable future to require the provision of LAAS. (The best decision height achieved to date
is about 300 ft, and this is unlikely to be improved upon in the near future).
COMBINED GPS AND GLONASS SYSTEMS

Receiver systems combining GPS and GLONASS are under development. The ability to combine
positional information from the two systems will provide improved accuracy and enhanced
integrity monitoring. However, since the SV systems use different models of the earth, the
GLONASS PZ90 generated information will need to be converted to the GPS WGS84 model, or
vice versa, to provide the final position.
356

(GNSS)
Chapter 19
QUESTIONS
1.
NAVSTAR/GPS operates in the band the receiver determines position by:

a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3
4
5
6
The NAVSTAR/GPS operational constellation comprises how many satellites

a.
b.
c.
d.
7.
WGS90
PZ90
WGS84
PZ84
The minimum number of satellites required for a 3D fix is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
6.
20180 km, 65
20180 km, 55
19099 km, 65
19099 km, 55
The model of the earth used for NAVSTAR/GPS is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
5.
the space segment, the user segment and the ground segment
a ground segment and the INMARSAT geostationary satellites
a master control station, a back-up control station and five monitoring stations
a master control station, a back-up control station, five monitoring stations and the
INMARSAT geostationary satellites
The orbital height and inclination of the NAVSTAR/GPS constellation are:

a.
b.
c.
d.
4.
range position lines

secondary radar principles
secondary radar principles
range position lines
The NAVSTAR/ GPS control segment comprises:

a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
UHF,
UHF,
SHF,
SHF,
12
21
24
30
The most accurate fixing information will be obtained from:

a.
b.
c.
d.
four satellites spaced 90 apart at 30 above the visual horizon

one satellite close to the horizon and 3 equally at 60 above the horizon
one satellite directly overhead and 3 equally spaced at 60 above the horizon
one satellite directly overhead and 3 spaced 120 apart close to the horizon
357

(GNSS)
Chapter 19
8.
The most significant error of GNSS is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
9.
The frequency available to non-authorised users of NAVSTAR/GPS is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
10.
2.5 minutes
12.5 minutes
25 minutes
15 minutes
The use of LAAS and WAAS remove the errors caused by:
a.
b.
c.
d.
14.
3
4
5
6
If a receiver has to download the almanac, the time to do this will be:
a.
b.
c.
d.
13.
identify the satellites

pass the almanac data
pass the navigation and system data
pass the ephemeris and time information
The minimum number of satellites required for receiver autonomous integrity monitoring is:
a.
b.
c.
d.
12.
1227.6 MHz
1575.42 MHz
1602 MHz
1246 MHz
The purpose of the pseudo-random noise codes in NAVSTAR/GPS is to:

a.
b.
c.
d.
11.
GDOP
Receiver clock
Ionospheric propagation
Ephemeris
propagation, selective availability, satellite ephemeris and clock

elective availability, satellite ephemeris and clock
GDOP, selective availability and propagation
receiver clock, GDOP, satellite ephemeris and clock
The most accurate satellite fixing information will be obtained from:

a.
b.
c.
d.
358
NAVSTAR/GPS & GLONASS

TRANSIT & NAVSTAR/GPS
COSPAS/SARSAT & GLONASS
NAVSTAR/GPS & COSPAS/SARSAT

(GNSS)
15.
A LAAS requires:
a.
b.
c.
d.
16.
b.
c.
d.
determine the time interval between the satellite transmission and receipt of the signal
at the receiver
pass ephemeris and clock data to the receivers
synchronise the receiver clocks with the satellites clocks
determine the range of the satellites from the receiver
The availability of two frequencies in GNSS:

a.
b.
c.
d.
20.
the proposed European satellite navigation system

a LAAS
a WAAS
a system to remove errors caused by the difference between the model of the earth and
the actual shape of the earth
The PRN codes are used to:

a.
19.
selective availability, skywave interference, GDOP

propagation, selective availability, ephemeris
GDOP, static interference, instrument
ephemeris, GDOP, siting
EGNOS is:
a.
b.
c.
d.
18.
an accurately surveyed site on the aerodrome and a link through the INMARSAT
geostationary satellites to pass corrections to X, Y & Z co-ordinates to aircraft
an accurately surveyed site on the aerodrome and a link through the INMARSAT
geostationary satellites to pass satellite range corrections to aircraft
an accurately surveyed site on the aerodrome and a system known as a pseudolite to
pass satellite range corrections to aircraft
an accurately surveyed site on the aerodrome and system known as a pseudolite to pass
corrections to X, Y & Z co-ordinates to aircraft
The position derived from NAVSTAR/GPS satellites may be subject to the following errors:
a.
b.
c.
d.
17.
Chapter 19
removes SV ephemeris and clock errors

reduces propagation errors
reduces errors caused by GDOP
removes receiver clock errors
The NAVSTAR/GPS reference system is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
A geo-centred 3D Cartesian co-ordinate system fixed with reference to the sun

A geo-centred 3D Cartesian co-ordinate system fixed with reference to the prime
meridian, equator and pole
A geo-centred 3D Cartesian co-ordinate system fixed with reference to space
A geo-centred 3D system based on latitude, longitude and altitude
359

(GNSS)
Chapter 19
21.
The initial range calculation at the receiver is known as a pseudo-range, because it is not yet
corrected for:
a.
b.
c.
d.
22.
The navigation and system data message is transmitted through the:

a.
b.
c.
d.
23.
b.
c.
d.
barometric altitude
GPS altitude
Radio altimeter height
Either barometric or radio altimeter altitude
If an aircraft manoeuvre puts a satellite being used for fixing into the wing shadow then:
a.
b.
c.
d.
26.
informs the operator that all the satellites required for fixing and RAIM are in
available
checks all the satellites in view and selects the 4 with the best geometry for fixing
requires 5 satellites to produce a 4D fix
uses all the satellites in view for fixing
When using GNSS to carry out a non-precision approach the MDA will be determined using:
a.
b.
c.
d.
25.
50 Hz modulation
The C/A and P PRN codes
The C/A code
The P code
An all in view receiver:

a.
24.
receiver clock errors

receiver and satellite clock errors
receiver and satellite clock errors and propagation errors
receiver and satellite clock errors and ephemeris errors
the accuracy will be unaffected

the accuracy will be temporarily downgraded
the receiver will automatically select another satellite with no degradation in positional
accuracy
the receiver will maintain lock using signals reflected from other parts of the aircraft
with a small degrading of positional accuracy
Which of the following statements concerning NAVSTAR/GPS time is correct?

a.
b.
c.
d.
360
satellite time is the same as UTC

the satellite runs its own time based on seconds and weeks which is independent of
UTC
the satellite runs its own time based on seconds and weeks which is correlated with
UTC
satellite time is based on sidereal time

(GNSS)
Chapter 19
361

(GNSS)
Chapter 19
ANSWERS
362
11
21
12
22
13
23
14
24
15
25
16
26
17
18
19
10
20
LORAN C
Chapter 20
CHAPTER TWENTY
LORAN C
Contents
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
HYPERBOLAE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
LORAN COVERAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
LORAN EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
CHAIN IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
SLAVE STATION - TIME DELAYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
DIFFERENTIAL RANGE BY TIMING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
RANGES AND FACTORS AFFECTING RANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
PHASE CODING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
FIX ACCURACY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
APPENDIX 16 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
LORAN SUMMARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
QUESTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
ANSWERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
363
Chapter 20
364
LORAN C
LORAN C
Chapter 20
INTRODUCTION
LORAN is an acronym for long range navigation. LORAN C is a hyperbolic system operating
at a frequency of 100 kHz. It uses the principle of differential range by pulse technique to
measure the time difference between the arrival, at an aircrafts receiver, of a series of pulses
from a Master transmitter and a series of pulses from up to four Slave or Secondary transmitters;
this arrangement of transmitters is known as a chain. Loran C is also used as a non-precision
approach aid in the USA.
Loran C was planned to be shut down by the end of year 2000 but has now been extended
until the end of 2008, and it is very likely that it will be extended for several more years beyond
2008.
HYPERBOLAE
Definition
A hyperbola is the locus of (a line joining) all points having the same difference in distance
from two fixed points called the foci. A series of such hyperbolae is known as a family as shown
in Figure 16.1 where the foci are called Master and Slave.
Figure 20.1 Family of Hyperbolae
Figure 16.1. Family of Hyperbolae.
365
Chapter 20
LORAN C
Baseline and Right Bisector

The two fixed points used to create a family of hyperbolae, for either a Decca or Loran C chain,
are the Master and Slave transmitters, M and S; the Master controls the Slave and the great circle
distance between them is the baseline. See Figure 20.2.
The line joining C, B, A, B1, C1 is a hyperbola called the the right bisector or bisector line, as
all points on it have a constant difference in range of 0 units from M and S.
Baseline Extensions
The baseline extensions, from M or S, shown in Figure 20.3 are also a hyperbolae as the
difference in distance along those lines is a constant M to S or baseline distance.
Figure
20.2 Baseline
Baseline Right
Figure
16.2.
RightBisector
Bisector.
Figure 20.3 Baseline Extensions
366
Figure 16.3. Baseline Extensions
LORAN C
Chapter 20
Curved Hyperbola
Any hyperbola constructed in the areas between the right bisector and the extended baseline
will be curved. See Figure 20.4. Thus any point on a curved hyperbola has a constant range
difference from M and S.
Figure16.4.
20.4 Curved
Curved Hyperbola
Figure
Hyperbola.
LORAN COVERAGE
Figures 20.5 and 20.6 show the coverage of LORAN C extending from South-east Asia, over the
North Pacific, across the United States, the North Atlantic and over Europe.
An example of the composition of an individual chain is as follows:
STATION
POSITION
DESIG
LOCATION
Eidhi Faroes
(Master)N62 18 W007 04
7970
Faroes
Bo
(Slave) N63 38 E014 28
7970X
Norway
Sylt
(Slave) N54 48 E008 18
7970W
Germany
Jan Mayen
(Slave) N70 55 W008 44
7970Z
Arctic Ocean
Sandur
(Slave) N64 54 W023 55
7970Y
Iceland
367
Chapter 20
LORAN C
Figure16.5.
20.5 Atlantic
Atlantic Coverage
Figure
Coverage.
368
LORAN C
Chapter 20
Figure
16.6.
Coverage.
Figure
20.6 Pacific
Pacific Coverage
369
Chapter 20
LORAN C
LORAN EQUIPMENT
Prior to modern electronics, computer technology and pilot operated systems, the pulses from
the transmitters were displayed on a cathode ray tube (CRT) with the time differences between
the master and slave transmitters being displayed, alternately, on a readout unit once every
second.
Figure 20.7 shows a Loran C Readout Unit and Receiver/CRT. The CRT displays the nine gated
pulses of the master transmission and the eight pulses of the four slave transmissions, two of
which have been selected and gated. The operator selected the two slaves that gave the best
position line cut to produce the most accurate navigational fix. The microsecond time difference
values displayed on the readout unit were plotted on the appropriate LORAN C plotting chart.
The latest equipments have receivers that can evaluate, simultaneously, up to eight slaves from
four chains. The computerised results are presented as latitude and longitude or along and
across track co-ordinates. The chains and stations are acquired and deselected as required as
the aircraft progresses through its waypoints. These systems also possess powerful computers
which store and display useful navigation and performance data and can interface with GPS or
INS to provide FMS/RNAV systems.
LORAN C uses the principle of differential range by pulse technique. In order to understand
the principle it is useful to consider how the LORAN C pulses and time difference readings
appear on the operators CRT/Readout unit (Figure 20.7). Figure 20.8 shows part of a Loran
C chart. Consider master-slave time differences of 50000 s and 64600 s as shown in Figure
20.6.
Timebase 1 (Figure 20.9a.) shows the nine Master pulses gated at the extreme left of the
timebase and the four Slave groups of eight pulses appearing at their correct s time intervals.
The operator has also gated Slaves Y and Z as these hyperbolae provide the most accurate
fix. The distances between the Master pulses and the two selected Slave pulses represent their
coarse time differences in s, displayed at the readout unit.
Timebase 2 (Figure 20.9b.) shows the master pulse expanded and more accurately aligned with
its gate. This timebase is then selected in turn for each chosen slave which is then gated
more accurately in order to refine the differential timing.
Timebase 3 is finally selected for the Master and each chosen Slave. It is at this stage in the
manually operated set and the automated systems that the eight pulses of the master and slaves
are combined to produce the separate composite, strong pulses of 250-300s width as shown in
Figure 20.9c.
370
LORAN C
Chapter 20
Figure
16.7.
presentation
Figure
20.7Readout
Readoutunit
unit &
& Receiver/CRT
Receiver/CRT presentation
371
Chapter 20
LORAN C
Figure
20.8 Portion
Portion of
of Loran
Figure
16.8.
LoranCCHyperbolic
HyperbolicChart
Chart.
372
LORAN C
Chapter 20
Figure
20.9a Master
Master and
and Slaves
Figure
16.9a.
SlavesGated
Gated.
Figure
20.9b Master
Mastermore
more accurately
Figure
16.9b.
accuratelyGated
Gated.
Figure16.9c
Combined
Pulses and
3rd. Cycle
Figure16.9c.
Combined
Pulses
and gated
3rd. Cycle gated.
373
Chapter 20
LORAN C
Figure
20.9d Cycle
Cycle matching
Figure
16.9d.
matchingororIndexing
Indexing.
Figure 20.9d shows cycle matching where the accurately measured time difference (s) between
the same cycle in the master and slave pulses is obtained. The third cycle is used as this is
never contaminated by a skywave pulse and once it has been acquired, in either the manually
operated or the modern automated equipments, tracking and timing measurement is automatic
and positive throughout flight in groundwave cover. As the period for 100 kHz carrier wave is
10 s then, by phase matching the corresponding cycles of the master and slave transmissions,
the accuracy obtained is in the order of 10 s.
CHAIN IDENTIFICATION
All the master and slave stations transmit at a single basic frequency of 100 kHz. To overcome
the consequent problem of chain identification a chain is allocated a Specific PRI, or Group
PRI which itself is based upon a Basic PRI in accordance with the following tables:
Basic PRI
Chains Specific PRI or Group PRI
50000s
60000s
80000s
100000s

Basic PRI minus 100s

200s

300s

400s

500s

600s

700s
374
LORAN C
Chapter 20
The production of chain identification is shown in the following examples:
The Faroes chain, which has four slaves (W at Sylt, X at BO, Y at Sandur and Z at Jan
Mayen Island) has a basic PRI of 80000s and a specific PRI (GRI) of 79700s (80000
-300s). The code for this chain is 7970.
The Johnston Island chain in the South Pacific, which has two slaves ( X at Hawaii and
Y at Midway ) has a basic PRI of 50000s and a specific PRI(GRI) of 49900s ( 50000100s). The code for this chain is 4990.
SLAVE STATION - TIME DELAYS

It can be seen from the diagram of the pulses displayed on the CRT, Figures 20.7/20.9a, that the
master must arrive at a receiver, positioned at any location on a particular chain, before the slave
pulses and that their transmissions must arrive also in the correct time/distance sequence. This
is achieved by building in s time delays at the slave transmitters. (Figure 20.10). Each slave or
secondary transmitter has a different delay such that the secondary transmissions always arrive
at a receiver in the sequence W, X, Y, Z. These time delays at the slave stations are also known as
secondary specific delays or emission or coding delays.
Figure
20.10 Baseline
Baseline Extension
Delays
Figure
16.10.
ExtensionTime
Time
Delays.
375
Chapter 20
LORAN C
DIFFERENTIAL RANGE BY TIMING

Consider master (M) and slave (S) stations at a certain distance apart (the baseline distance). Let
T s be the time for a pulse to travel from M to S or vice versa (master/slave propagation delay)
and D s the delay at S (the secondary specific delay).
The difference in distance to the two stations is then obtained simply by multiplying the time
difference with the speed of light.
Figure
Delay
Figure16.11
20.11 Propagation
Propagation Delay
The propagation delay or the time delay between the pulses from M and S at every chain will
be as follows:
Baseline extension from S: Ds

Right bisection: (T + D)s
Baseline extension from M: (2T + D)s
Values of propagation delays on other hyperbolic will vary between Ds and (2T +
D)s
RANGES AND FACTORS AFFECTING RANGE

Ground Wave Range
Long range surface waves, which are affected by the earths conductivity, give the following
approximate daytime ranges:
1200 nm over water

900 nm over land
Skywave Range
Skywaves of varying strength can be used up to about 2500nm by night and also by day when
propagation conditions permit. For frequencies near 100 khz the base of the E and F layer acts
as a reflector. In general the timings obtained from skywave pulses will be different from those
obtained from ground wave pulses at the same location. The standard method of allowing for
these differences is to provide tabulated corrections on the Loran charts.
376
LORAN C
Chapter 20
Factors affecting Range

Transmissions are adversely affected by weather, static build-up on an aircraft in precipitation
(hence static-wick dischargers), natural and man-made noise, and require large aerial arrays
with considerable power to transmit long range. These disadvantages are minimised by using
a multi-pulse system. The master and slave pulses are transmitted in groups of eight, the
individual pulses in each group separated by 1000s with the master group distinguishable by
a ninth pulse at a 2000s interval; the duration of a pulse is 250-350s. These pulses are then
amalgamated at the receiver to produce a single strong pulse with a good signal/noise ratio.
Any phase coding present in the pulses is removed before this process of amalgamation.
PHASE CODING
In order to provide an automatic search capability and some measure of multi-hop skywave
rejection, the pulses are phase coded. The phase of a pulse would be positive if the first half
of the carrier wave is positive as shown in Figure 20.12a. The phases of the pulses in a group
would be coded in a predetermined sequence as shown in Figure 20.12b. The master sequence
M1 would be followed by the slave sequences S1(X), S1(Y) and S1(Z) which would be identical.
This is then followed by M2, S2(X), S2(Y) and S2(Z) etc. The received pulses are compared with
reference pulses stored in the receiver to ensure that individual chains are identified and also that
Master and Slave pulses cannot be mismatched at the receiver or contaminated by skywaves.
Figure 20.12a Carrier Wave Phase
Figure 16.12a Carrier Wave Phase
Figure
Coding
Figure20.12b
16.12bPhase
Phase
Coding
377
Chapter 20
LORAN C
FIX ACCURACY
The accuracy of the fix obtained depends upon the range and the type of radio wave arriving at
the receiver.
In good groundwave cover the accuracy is better than 0.2 nm decreasing to 1nm at
1,000 nm range.
Skywave accuracy up to about 2,500 nm is 10-20 nm depending upon conditions and

the accurate application of predicted corrections.
At ranges of 1000 to 1200nm and more, accuracy is diminished because the surface
wave pulses are contaminated by skywave pulses.
Best results are achieved in clear weather by day over water in the region of the baseline
between a master and a slave. These baseline distances are between 500 and 1000nm.
378
LORAN C
Chapter 20
APPENDIX 16 A
[ NOT REQUIRED FOR JAA EXAMS ]

Calculation of Baseline Distance (Figure 20.10)
Delays at SY and M are 46000sec and 51889.06sec
Baseline, SY to M
=
51889.06 - 46000sec x 300m

1852 x 2

=
477nm
Delays at SZ and M are 60000sec and 66432.6sec
Baseline, SZ to M
=
66432.6 - 60000sec x 300m

1852 x 2

=
521nm
Calculation of Line of Constant Time Range Difference, i.e. A Hyperbola
Consider the hyperbola with a constant difference, measured at a LORAN C receiver, of
50000sec between the master and Y slaves transmissions:
Time M to SY = 51889.06 - 46000sec

2

= 2944.53sec
Delay at SY
= 46000sec
SY to receiver = 50000 - (46000 + 2944.53)sec

= 1055.47sec, 171nm
Therefore, any point on the 50000sec hyperbola equates to a constant time difference of
1055.47sec, or, constant difference in distance of 171nm in relation to the fixed points M and
SY .
The actual great circle distances from the master and Y slave to the point RX on figure 8. are
202nm and 373nm, a constant difference of 171nm. The same process could be used to calculate
the baseline distance master to Z slave and the 64600sec hyperbola time/range difference.
Chain Malfunctions and Abnormalities
All transmissions are monitored at the masters, slaves and special out stations. The ninth master
pulse and the first two pulses of a slave can be coded to blink to indicate a specific fault.
Modern Loran C CDUs have some form of status warning system which gives the pilot an
indication of a malfunction and the possible course of action to adopt. Common irregularities
are:
Station not transmitting

Incorrect number of pulses
Incorrect pulse spacing
Incorrect pulse shape
The CDU is also provided, usually, with a Built In Test Equipment (BITE) which monitors overall
system performance whilst on the ground or in flight, whether or not signals are available.
379
Chapter 20
LORAN C
LORAN SUMMARY
Features

Long range hyperbolic navigation using pulse technique in LF band

Master and four Slave or Secondary stations ( W, X, Y and Z)
Older equipment used CRT and charts. Newer systems computerised.
Principle of
Differential range by pulse technique or timing
Operation

Master station transmits 9 pulses, Slave stations 8 pulses

Selection of Time-bases and Gating of pulses enables time difference
measurement between master and slave pulses to within 10 s
Third cycle used for cycle matching - no skywave interference
Chain Ident.
Basic PRI minus 100 - 900 s gives Specific PRI for chain
Time Delays

Specific time delay at each slave or secondary station ensures pulses arrive at
receiver always in sequence W, X, Y, Z.
Differential
From propagation delay between pulses from master and slave stations.
Range
Propagation delay is: D s

(T + D) s

(2T + D) s

Between D s and (2T +D) s.
on baseline extension from S

on right bisector
on baseline extension from M
on other hyperbolae
D s = time delay at slave ]
[ T s = M to S time
Range

Ground wave 1200 nm over water

900 nm over land
Skywave
up to 2500 nm
Tabulated corrections on chart
Signal improved by multi-pulse system (amalgamated pulses).
Automatic
Search

Pulses phase coded plus (+) or minus (-).

Master and slaves have different sequences
Chain identified by comparing with reference pulses in receiver.
Accuracy

Ground wave - 0.2 nm to 1 nm

Skywave
- 10 to 20 nm

380
at 1,000 nm range
at 2,500 nm range.
LORAN C
Chapter 20
QUESTIONS
1.
The principle of operation of Loran C is:
a.
b.
c.
d.
timing the interval between transmitted and received pulses.

differential range by frequency comparison.
differential range by pulse transmissions.
differential range by phase comparison.
2.
The frequency and waveband of LORAN C are:
a.
b.
c.
d.
100 kHz, hectometric

100 MHz, kilometric
100 MHz, hectometric
100 kHz, kilometric
3.
The coverage of LORAN C is:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Specified areas only

Northern hemisphere only
Oceanic areas
Northern hemisphere oceanic areas
381
Chapter 20
LORAN C
ANSWERS
382
Revision Questions
Chapter 21
CHAPTER TWENTY ONE

REVISION QUESTIONS
Contents
QUESTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
ANSWERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
SPECIMEN EXAMINATION PAPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
APPENDIX A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
ANSWERS TO SPECIMEN EXAMINATION PAPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
EXPLANATION of SELECTED QUESTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
383
Chapter 21
384
Revision Questions
Revision Questions
Chapter 21
QUESTIONS
1.
When would VDF be used for a position fix?

a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
What equipment does an aircraft need when carrying out a VDF letdown?
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
it is simple and only requires a VHF radio on the ground

it is simple and requires a VHF radio and DF equipment in the aircraft
it is simple requiring only VHF radios on the ground and in the aircraft
it uses line of sight propagation
What is the wavelength corresponding to a frequency of 375 kHz?

a.
b.
c.
d.
7.
134 nm
107 nm
91 nm
114 nm
Which of the following statements regarding VHF direction finding (VDF) is most accurate?
a.
b.
c.
d.
6.
no equipment required in the aircraft

no special equipment required in the aircraft or on the ground
only a VHF radio is needed in the aircraft
it is pilot interpreted, so ATC is not required
What is the maximum range at which a VDF station at 325 ft can provide a service to an
aircraft at FL080?
a.
b.
c.
d.
5.
VHF radio
VOR
VOR/DME
None
Which of the following is an advantage of a VDF let down?

a.
b.
c.
d.
4.
When an aircraft declares an emergency on any frequency.

When first talking to a FIR on crossing an international boundary.
When joining controlled airspace from uncontrolled airspace.
When declaring an emergency on 121.500 MHz.
8m
80 m
800 m
8000 m
A NDB transmits a signal pattern which is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
a 30 Hz polar diagram
omni-directional
a bi-lobal pattern
a beam rotating at 30 Hz
385
Chapter 21
8.
Revision Questions
The accuracy of ADF within the DOC by day is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
9.
Given that the compass heading is 270, the deviation is 2W, the variation is 30E and the
relative bearing of a beacon is 316, determine the QDR:
a.
b.
c.
d.
10.
+/-1
+/-2
+/-5
+/-10
044
048
074
224
Two NDBs, one 20 nm from the coast and the other 50 nm further inland. Assuming coastal
error is the same for each, from which NDB will an aircraft flying over the sea receive the
greatest error?
a.
b.
c.
d.
the NDB at 20 nm
the NDB at 50 nm
same when the relative bearing is 090/270
same when the relative bearing is 180/360
11.
Which of the following is likely to have the greatest effect on the accuracy of ADF bearings?
a.
b.
c.
d.
12.
Which of the following are all errors associated with ADF?

a.
b.
c.
d.
13.
selective availability, coastal refraction, night effect

night effect, quadrantal error, lane slip
mountain effect, station interference, static interference
selective availability, coastal refraction, quadrantal error
What action must be taken to receive a bearing from an ADF?

a.
b.
c.
d.
14.
interference from other NDBs particularly by day

interference between aircraft aerials
interference from other NDBs, particularly at night
frequency drift at the ground station
BFO on
Select the loop position
Both the loop and sense aerials must receive the signal
Select the LOOP position
When is coastal error at its worst for an aircraft at low level?

a.
b.
c.
d.
386
beacon inland at an acute angle to the coast

beacon inland at 90 to the coast
beacon close to the coast at an acute angle to the coast
beacon close to the coast at 90 to the coast
Revision Questions
15.
A radio beacon has a range of 10 nm. By what factor should the power be increased to achieve
a range of 20 nm?
a.
b.
c.
d.
16.
quadrantal error
coastal refraction
precipitation static
static from Cb
Which of the following may cause inaccuracies in ADF bearings?

a.
b.
c.
d.
18.
16
2
4
8
Which of the following is the most significant error in ADF?

a.
b.
c.
d.
17.
Chapter 21
static interference, height effect, lack of failure warning

station interference, mountain effect, selective availability
coastal refraction, slant range, night effect
lack of failure warning, station interference, static interference
The allocated frequency coverage of NDBs is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
250 450 kHz

190 1750 kHz
108 117.95 MHz
200 500 kHz
19.

The principle used to measure VOR bearings is:
20.
When converting VOR and ADF bearings to true, the variation at the should be used for
VOR and at the for ADF.
a.
b.
c.
d.
a.
b.
c.
d.
21.
phase comparison
switched cardioids
difference in depth of modulation
pulse technique
aircraft, aircraft
aircraft, station
station, aircraft
station, station
An aircraft flies from a VOR at 61N 013W to 58N 013W. The variation at the beacon is 13W
and the variation at the aircraft is 5W. What radial is the aircraft on?
a.
b.
c.
d.
013
005
193
187
387
Chapter 21
22.
Revision Questions
In a conventional VOR the reference signal and the variable signal have a 30 Hz modulation.
The variable signal modulation is produced by:
a.
b.
c.
d.
23.
If the VOR accuracy has a limit of 1.0, what is the maximum cross track error at 200 nm?
a.
b.
c.
d.
24.
210
030
330
150
In a certain VORTAC installation the VOR is coding STN and the DME is coding STZ. This
means that the distance between the two beacons is in excess of:
a.
b.
c.
d.
28.
120 nm
109 nm
60 nm
54 nm
On a CVOR the phase difference between the AM and FM signals is 30. The VOR radial is:
a.
b.
c.
d.
27.
2000 m
60 m
600 m
6m
What is the maximum distance between VOR beacons designating the centreline of an airway
(10 nm wide), if the expected VOR bearing error is 5.5?
a.
b.
c.
d.
26.
3.0 nm
2.5 nm
2.0 nm
3.5 nm
What is the maximum distance apart a VOR and TACAN can be located and have the same
identification?
a.
b.
c.
d.
25.
adding 30 Hz to the transmitted signal

a 30 Hz rotation producing a 30 Hz modulation
varying the amplitude up and down at +/-30 Hz
using Doppler techniques to produce a 30 Hz amplitude modulation
600 m
100 m
2000 m
300 m
Using a 5 dot CDI, how many dots would show for an aircraft on the edge of an airway at 100
nm from the VOR beacon?
a.
b.
c.
d.
388
5
2.5
1.5
3
Revision Questions
29.
The maximum range an aircraft at FL370 can receive transmissions from a VOR/DME at 800 ft
is:
a.
b.
c.
d.
30.
075
105
255
285
When identifying a co-located VOR/DME the following signals are heard in the Morse code
every 30 seconds:
a.
b.
c.
d.
35.
loss of signal due to line of sight limitations

interference from other VORs operating on the same frequency
skywave contamination of the VOR signal
scalloping errors
An aircraft is flying a heading of 090 along the equator, homing to a VOR. If variation at the
aircraft is 10E and 15E at the VOR, what is the inbound radial?
a.
b.
c.
d.
34.
107.75
109.90
118.35
112.20
Using a VOR beyond the limits of the DOC may result in:
a.
b.
c.
d.
33.
a constant track
a great circle track
a rhumb line track
a constant heading
Which of the following is a valid frequency (MHz) for a VOR?

a.
b.
c.
d.
32.
275 nm
200 nm
243 nm
220 nm
When tracking a VOR radial inbound the aircraft would fly:

a.
b.
c.
d.
31.
Chapter 21
4 identifications in the same tone

4 identifications with the DME at a higher tone
4 identifications with the DME at a lower tone
no DME identification, but if the VOR identification is present and a range is indicated
then this shows that both are serviceable
What is the maximum range a transmission from a VOR beacon at 169 ft can be received by an
aircraft at FL012
a.
b.
c.
d.
60 nm
80 nm
120 nm
220 nm
389
Chapter 21
36.
Revision Questions
An aircraft is tracking inbound to a VOR beacon on the 105 radial. The setting the pilot should
put on the OBS and the CDI indications are:
a.
b.
c.
d.
37.
When tracking the 090 radial outbound from a VOR, the track flown is:
a.
b.
c.
d.
38.
26000 ft
16000 ft
24000 ft
20000 ft
For a conventional VOR a phase difference of 090 would be achieved by flying from the
beacon:
a.
b.
c.
d.
42.
160
347
193
167
What is the minimum height an aircraft must be to receive signals from a VOR at 196 ft amsl
at a range of 175 nm?
a.
b.
c.
d.
41.
VHF
UHF
HF
LF & MF
On which radial from a VOR at 61N025E (VAR 13E) is an aircraft at 59N025E (VAR 20E)?
a.
b.
c.
d.
40.
a straight line
a rhumb line
a great circle
a constant true heading
The frequency band of VOR is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
39.
285, TO
105, TO
285, FROM
105, FROM
west
north
east
south
At a range of 200 nm from a VOR, if there is an error of 1, how far off the centreline is the
aircraft?
a.
b.
c.
d.
390
3.5 nm
1.75 nm
7 nm
1 nm
Revision Questions
43.
The quoted accuracy of VOR is valid:

a.
b.
c.
d.
44.
b.
c.
d.
tracking towards the beacon at 10 nm

overhead the beacon
tracking away from the beacon at 100 nm
passing abeam the beacon at 5 nm
A DME beacon will become saturated when more than about aircraft are interrogating
the transponder.
a.
b.
c.
d.
49.
it stays in the search mode, but reduces to 60 pulse pairs per second (ppps) after 100
seconds
it stays in the search mode, but reduces to 60 ppps after 15000 pulse pairs
it stays in the search mode at 150 ppps
it alternates between search and memory modes every 10 seconds
The most accurate measurement of speed by DME for an aircraft at 30000 ft will be when the
aircraft is:
a.
b.
c.
d.
48.
a VOR on the flight plan route

a VOR off the flight plan route
a DME on the flight plan route
a DME off the flight plan route
What happens when a DME in the search mode fails to achieve lock-on?
a.
47.
DME
VOR
ADF
VDF
Which of the following would give the best indication of speed?

a.
b.
c.
d.
46.
at all times
by day only
at all times except night
at all times except dawn and dusk
Which of the following provides distance information?

a.
b.
c.
d.
45.
Chapter 21
10
50
100
200
A typical DME frequency is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
1000 MHz
1300 MHz
1000 kHz
1575 MHz
391
Chapter 21
50.
Revision Questions
The DME in an aircraft, cruising at FL210, fails to achieve lock on a DME at msl at a range of
210 nm. The reason for this is:
a.
b.
c.
d.
51.
The aircraft DME receiver accepts replies to its own transmissions but rejects replies to other
aircraft transmissions because:
a.
b.
c.
d.
52.
8 nm
11.7 nm
10 nm
13.6 nm
A DME transceiver does not lock onto its own reflections because:
a.
b.
c.
d.
56.
10 MHz
100 MHz
1000 MHz
10000 MHz
An aircraft at FL360 is 10 nm plan range from a DME. The DME reading in the aircraft will
be:
a.
b.
c.
d.
55.
6 nm
9 nm
0
12 nm
A DME frequency could be:

a.
b.
c.
d.
54.
the PRF of the interrogations is unique to each aircraft

the pulse pairs from each aircraft have a unique amplitude modulation
the interrogation frequencies are 63 MHz different for each aircraft
the interrogation and reply frequencies are separated by 63 MHz
When an aircraft at FL360 is directly above a DME, at mean sea level, the range displayed will
be:
a.
b.
c.
d.
53.
the beacon is saturated

the aircraft is beyond the maximum usable range for DME
the aircraft is beyond line of sight range
the aircraft signal is too weak at that range to trigger a response
the PRF of the pulse pairs is jittered

it uses MTI
the interrogation and reply frequencies differ
the reflections will all fall within the flyback period
What information does military TACAN provide for civil aviation users?
a.
b.
c.
d.
392
magnetic bearing
DME
Nothing
DME and magnetic bearing
Revision Questions
57.
The DME in an aircraft flying at FL430 shows a range of 15 nm from a beacon at an elevation
of 167 ft. The plan range is:
a.
b.
c.
d.
58.
the DME is in the search mode

the DME is unserviceable
the DME is receiving no response from the transponder
The transponder is unserviceable
An aircraft at FL200 is 220 nm from a DME at msl. The aircraft equipment fails to lock on to
the DME. This is because:
a.
b.
c.
d.
63.
the DME is unserviceable

the DME is trying to lock onto range
the DME is trying to lock onto frequency
the DME is receiving no response from the ground station
On a DME presentation the counters are continuously rotating. This indicates:

a.
b.
c.
d.
62.
330 nm
185 nm
165 nm
370 nm
The DME counters are rotating continuously. This indicates that:

a.
b.
c.
d.
61.
1030 & 1090 MHz

1030 1090 MHz
960 &1215 MHz
960 1215 MHz
The time from the transmission of the interrogation pulse to the receipt of the reply from the
DME ground station is 2000 microseconds (ignore the delay at the DME). The slant range is:
a.
b.
c.
d.
60.
13.5 nm
16.5 nm
15 nm
17.6 nm
What are the DME frequencies?

a.
b.
c.
d.
59.
Chapter 21
DME is limited to 200 nm

The aircraft is too high to receive the signal
The aircraft is too low to receive the signal
The beacon is saturated
On an ILS approach you receive more of the 90 Hz modulation than the 150 Hz modulation.
The action you should take is:
a.
b.
c.
d.
fly left and up

fly left and down
fly right and up
fly right and down
393
Chapter 21
64.
Revision Questions
The errors of an ILS localiser (LLZ) beam are due to:

a.
b.
c.
d.
65.

66.

emission sidelobes
ground reflections
spurious signals from objects near the runway
interference from other systems operating on the same frequency
The amplitude modulation of the ILS outer marker is . and it illuminates the light in
the cockpit.
a.
b.
c.
d.
400 Hz, blue

1300 Hz, amber
400 Hz, amber
1300 Hz, blue
The principle of operation of the ILS localiser transmitter is that it transmits two overlapping
lobes on:
a.
b.
c.
d.
different frequencies with different phases

the same frequency with different phases
the same frequency with different amplitude modulations
different frequencies with different amplitude modulations
67.

The ILS glideslope transmitter generates false glidepaths because of:

a.
b.
c.
d.
68.
A category III ILS system provides accurate guidance down to:

a.
b.
c.
d.
69.
the surface of the runway

less than 50 ft
less than 100 ft
less than 200 ft
A HSI compass rose is stuck on 200. When the aircraft is lined up on the centreline of the ILS
localiser for runway 25, the localiser needle will be:
a.
b.
c.
d.
70.
ground returns from the vicinity of the transmitter

back scattering of the signals
multiple lobes in the radiation pattern
reflections from obstacles in the vicinity of the transmitter
left of the centre

centred
right of the centre
centred with the fail flag showing
The coverage of the ILS glideslope with respect to the localiser centreline is:
a.
b.
c.
d.
394
+/-10 to 8 nm
+/-10 to 25 nm
+/-8 to 10 nm
+/-35 to 17 nm
Revision Questions
71.
The middle marker is usually located at a range of , with an audio frequency of and
illuminates the light.
a.
b.
c.
d.
72.
3000 Hz
400 Hz
1300 Hz
1000 Hz
An aircraft is flying downwind outside the coverage of the ILS. The CDI indications will be:
a.
b.
c.
d.
77.
300 m from the downwind end of the runway

300 m from the threshold
300 m from the upwind end of the runway
200 m abeam the threshold
The audio frequency of the outer marker is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
76.
ILS operations are in progress

category 1 ILS operations are in progress
category II/III ILS operations are in progress
the ILS is undergoing calibration
The ILS localiser is normally positioned:

a.
b.
c.
d.
75.
white, blue, amber

blue, white, amber
blue, amber, white
amber, blue, white
The sensitive area of an ILS is the area aircraft may not enter when:
a.
b.
c.
d.
74.
4-6 nm, 1300 Hz, white

1 km, 400 Hz, white
1 km, 1300 Hz, amber
1 km, 400 Hz, amber
The sequence of marker colours when flying an ILS approach is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
73.
Chapter 21
unreliable in azimuth and elevation

reliable in azimuth, unreliable in elevation
no indications will be shown
reliable in azimuth and elevation
The frequency band of the ILS glidepath is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
UHF
VHF
SHF
VLF
395
Chapter 21
78.
Revision Questions
In which band does the ILS glidepath operate?

a.
b.
c.
d.
79.
The coverage of MLS is either side of the centreline to a distance of

a.
b.
c.
d.
80.
metric
centimetric
decimetric
hectometric
40, 40 nm
40 20 nm
20, 20 nm
20, 40 nm
Distance on MLS is measured by:

a.
b.
c.
d.
measuring the time taken for the primary radar pulse to travel from the MLS
transmitter to the aircraft receiver
measuring the time taken for the secondary radar pulse to travel from the MLS
transmitter to the aircraft receiver
phase comparison between the azimuth and elevation beams
co-located DME
81.
Which of the following is an advantage of MLS?
82.
a.
can be used in inhospitable terrain
b.
uses the same aircraft equipment as ILS
c.
has a selective access ability
d.
is not affected by heavy precipitation
The frequency band of MLS is:
a.
b.
c.
d.
UHF
VHF
SHF
VLF
83.

Primary radar operates on the principle of:
84.
The definition of a radar display will be best with:
a.
b.
c.
d.
a.
b.
c.
d.
396
transponder interrogation
pulse technique
phase comparison
continuous wave emission
narrow beamwidth and narrow pulsewidth

narrow beamwidth and wide pulsewidth
wide beamwidth and narrow pulsewidth
wide beamwidth and wide pulsewidth
Revision Questions
85.
The main advantage of a continuous wave radar over a pulsed radar is:
a.
b.
c.
d.
86.
87.
1.
2.
3.
4.
a.
b.
c.
d.
all the above

2 and 4 only
2 only
1 and 3 only
Pulse width
Beamwidth
Pulse recurrence rate
Rate of rotation
The maximum range of a ground radar is limited by:

pulse width
peak power
average power
pulse recurrence rate
What does pulse recurrence rate refer to?

a.
b.
c.
d.
91.
2
4
8
16
In a primary pulsed radar the ability to discriminate in azimuth is a factor of:
a.
b.
c.
d.
90.
secondary surveillance radar

airborne weather radar
distance measuring equipment
primary radar
To double the range of a primary radar, the power must be increased by a factor of:
a.
b.
c.
d.
89.
more complex equipment but better resolution and accuracy

removes the minimum range restriction
smaller more compact equipment
permits measurement of Doppler in addition to improved range and bearing
Which of the following systems use pulse technique?
a.
b.
c.
d.
88.
Chapter 21
the number of cycles per second

the number of pulses per second
the ratio of pulse width to pulse repetition period
the delay known as flyback or dead time
The maximum PRF required for a range of 50 nm is:

a.
b.
c.
d.

600 pps
1620 pps
3280 pps
397
Chapter 21
92.
Revision Questions
The best radar for measuring very short ranges is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
93.
Which is the most suitable radar for measuring short ranges?

a.
b.
c.
d.
94.
150 km
333 km
666 km
1326 km
The best picture on a primary radar will be obtained using:

a.
b.
c.
d.
98.
134 nm
180 nm
67 nm
360 nm
The PRF of a radar is 450 pps. If the speed of light is 300000 kps, what is the maximum range
of the radar?
a.
b.
c.
d.
97.
reduces sidelobes and directs more energy into the main beam
removes the need for azimuth slaving
sidelobe suppression
can produce simultaneous map and weather information
The maximum unambiguous (theoretical) range for a PRF of 1200 pps is:
a.
b.
c.
d.
96.
millimetric pulse
continuous wave primary
centimetric pulse
continuous wave secondary
The main advantage of a slotted scanner is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
95.
a continuous wave primary radar

a pulsed secondary radar
a pulsed primary radar
a continuous wave secondary radar
low frequency, narrow beam

short wavelength, narrow beam
high frequency, wide beam
long wavelength, wide beam
Which of the following is a primary radar system?

a.
b.
c.
d.
398
SSR
DME
GPS
AWR
Revision Questions
99.
On what principle does primary ATC radar work?

a.
b.
c.
d.
100.
UHF, 120, sometimes

SHF, 60, always
UHF, 120, never
SHF, 60, sometimes
The frequency band of most ATC radars and weather radars is:
a.
b.
c.
d.
105.
millimetric
centimetric
decimetric
metric
The ASMR operates in the band, the antenna rotates at rpm can distinguish
between aircraft types.
a.
b.
c.
d.
104.
330 MHz
600 MHz
10 GHz
15 GHz
Short range aerodrome radars will have wavelengths.

a.
b.
c.
d.
103.
100 nm
200 nm
300 nm
400 nm
An area surveillance radar is most likely to use a frequency of:

a.
b.
c.
d.
102.
pulse technique
pulse comparison
continuous wave
transponder interrogation
ATC area surveillance radars will normally operate to a maximum range of:
a.
b.
c.
d.
101.
Chapter 21
UHF
SHF
VHF
EHF
The airborne weather radar (AWR) cannot detect:

a.
b.
c.
d.
snow
moderate rain
dry hail
wet hail
399
Chapter 21
106.
Revision Questions
The frequency of AWR is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
107.
The use of the AWR on the ground is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
108.
in flashing red
by a black hole
by a steep colour gradient
alternating red and white
On an AWR colour display, the sequence of colours indicating increasing water droplet size is:
a.
b.
c.
d.
112.
WEA
CONT
MAP
MAN
On the AWR display the most severe turbulence will be shown:

a.
b.
c.
d.
111.
Cirro-cumulus
Alto-stratus
Cumulus
Stratus
The AWR uses the cosecant squared beam in the mode.

a.
b.
c.
d.
110.
not permitted
permitted provided reduced power is reduced
permitted provided special precautions are taken to safeguard personnel and
equipment
only permitted to assist movement in low visibility conditions
Which type of cloud does the AWR detect?

a.
b.
c.
d.
109.
9375 MHz
937.5 MHz
93.75 GHz
9375 GHz
blue, green, red

green, yellow, red
black, amber, red
blue, amber, green
In an AWR with a 5 beamwidth, how do you orientate the scanner to receive returns from
clouds at or above your level?
a.
b.
c.
d.
400
0 tilt
2.5 uptilt
2.5 downtilt
5 uptilt
Revision Questions
113.
The ISO-ECHO circuit is incorporated in the AWR:

a.
b.
c.
d.
114.
black, yellow, amber

green, yellow, red
blue, green, orange
green, yellow, amber
The cosecant squared beam is used for mapping in the AWR because:
a.
b.
c.
d.
119.
the image will decrease in area and remain where it is

the image will increase in area and move to the top of the screen
the image will increase in area and move to the bottom of the screen
the image will decrease in area and move to the top of the screen
As a storm intensifies, the colour sequence on the AWR display will change:
a.
b.
c.
d.
118.
iso-echo areas coloured black

large areas of flashing red
iso-echo areas with no colour
most rapid change of colour
With the AWR set at 100 nm range a large cloud appears at 50 nm. If the range is reduced to
50 nm:
a.
b.
c.
d.
117.
the size of the water droplets and the diameter of the antenna reflector
the scanner rotation rate and the frequency/wavelength
the size of the water droplets and the wavelength/frequency
the size of the water droplets and the range of the cloud
In an AWR with a colour CRT, areas of greatest turbulence are indicated by:
a.
b.
c.
d.
116.
to allow ground mapping

to alert pilots to the presence of cloud
to display areas of turbulence in cloud
to allow simultaneous mapping and cloud detection
The main factors which affect whether an AWR will detect a cloud are:
a.
b.
c.
d.
115.
Chapter 21
a greater range can be achieved

a wider beam is produced in azimuth to give a greater coverage
a larger area of ground is illuminated by the beam
it allows cloud detection to be effected whilst mapping
On switching on the AWR a single line appears on the display. This means that:
a.
b.
c.
d.
the transmitter is unserviceable

the receiver is unserviceable
the CRT is not scanning
the antenna is not scanning
401
Chapter 21
120.
Revision Questions
The AWR can be used on the ground provided:

i.
the aircraft is clear of personnel, buildings and vehicles

ii.
conical beam is selected

iii.
maximum uptilt is selected

iv.
the AWR must never be operated on the ground
a.
b.
c.
d.
121.
Doppler navigation systems use to determine the aircraft groundspeed and drift.
a.
b.
c.
d.
122.
the frequency is too high

SSR does not use the echo principle
The PRF is jittered
By the use of MTI to remove stationary and slow moving returns
The advantages of SSR mode S are:

a.
b.
c.
d.
126.
4096 codes in 4 blocks

Why is the effect of returns from storms not a problem with SSR?
a.
b.
c.
d.
125.
Pitch, roll and yaw

Roll and yaw
Pitch and roll
Pitch only
With normal SSR mode C altitude coding the aircraft replies by sending back a train of up to
12 pulses contained between 2 framing pulses with:
a.
b.
c.
d.
124.
DVOR
Phase comparison of signals from ground stations
Frequency shift in signals reflected from the ground
DME range measurement
Which axes is the AWR stabilised in?

a.
b.
c.
d.
123.
iv
i and iii
i, ii and iii
ii and iii
improved resolution, TCAS

data link, reduced voice communications
TCAS, no RT communications
better resolution, selective interrogation
Which SSR mode A code should be selected when entering European airspace from an area
where no code has been allocated?
a.
b.
c.
d.
402
7000
7500
2000
0000
Revision Questions
127.
The accuracy of SSR mode C altitude as displayed to the air traffic controller is:
a.
b.
c.
d.
128.
+/-25 ft
+/-50 ft
+/-75 ft
+/-100 ft
The SSR ground transceiver interrogates on and receives responses on

a.
b.
c.
d.
129.
1030 MHz, 1030 MHz

1030 MHz, 1090 MHz
1090 MHz, 1030 MHz
1090 MHz, 1090 MHz
The vertical position provided by SSR mode C is referenced to:

a.
b.
c.
d.
QNH unless QFE is in use

1013.25 HPa
QNH
WGS84 datum
130.

Why is a secondary radar display free from weather clutter?
131.
The availability of 4096 codes in SSR is applicable to mode:
a.
b.
c.
d.
a.
b.
c.
d.
132.
A
C
S
All
9999
0000
4096
7600
LORAN C is available:
a.
b.
c.
d.
134.
the frequencies are too low to detect water droplets

the frequencies are too high to detect water droplets
moving target indication is used to suppress the static generated by water droplets
the principle of the return of echoes is not used
With reference to SSR, what code is used to indicate transponder altitude failure?
a.
b.
c.
d.
133.
Chapter 21
globally
in oceanic areas
in continental areas
in specified areas
The frequencies used by LORAN C are:

a.
b.
c.
d.
70 130 kHz
90 110 kHz
108 112 MHz
190 1750 kHz
403
Chapter 21
135.
Revision Questions
The principle of operation of LORAN C is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
136.
In NAVSTAR/GPS the PRN codes are used to:

a.
b.
c.
d.
137.
12.5 minutes
12 hours
30 seconds
15 minutes
The effect of the ionosphere on NAVSTAR/GPS accuracy is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
141.
none
the position will degrade
another satellite will be selected, so there will be no degradation of position
the GPS will maintain lock using reflections of the signals from the fuselage
The time required for a GNSS receiver to download the satellite almanac for the NAVSTAR/
GPS is:
a.
b.
c.
d.
140.
barometric altitude
radio altimeter
GPS altitude
GPS or barometric altitude
If, during a manoeuvre, a satellite being used for position fixing is shadowed by the wing, the
effect on position will be:
a.
b.
c.
d.
139.
reduce ionospheric and tropospheric errors

determine satellite range
eliminate satellite clock and ephemeris errors
remove receiver clock error
The MDA for a non-precision approach using NAVSTAR/GPS is based on:

a.
b.
c.
d.
138.
differential range by phase comparison

differential range by pulse technique
range by pulse technique
range by phase comparison
only significant for satellites close to the horizon

minimised by averaging the signals
minimised by the receivers using a model of the ionosphere to correct the signals
negligible
The height derived by a receiver from the NAVSTAR/GPS is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
404
above mean sea level

above ground level
above the WGS84 ellipsoid
pressure altitude
Revision Questions
142.
The NAVSTAR/GPS constellation comprises:

a.
b.
c.
d.
143.
the inclination of the orbits is 55 with an orbital period of 12 hours

the inclination of the orbits is 55 with an orbital period of 24 hours
the orbits are geostationary to provide global coverage
the orbits are inclined at 65 with an orbital period of 11 hours 15 minutes
NAVSTAR GPS receiver clock error is removed by:

a.
b.
c.
d.
148.
provides X, Y & Z co-ordinates and monitoring of the accuracy of the satellite data
provides X, Y, Z & T co-ordinates and the constellation data
monitors the accuracy of the satellite data and provides system time
provides geographic position and UTC
Concerning NAVSTAR/GPS orbits, which of the following statements is correct?

a.
b.
c.
d.
147.
in the fin
on the fuselage as close as possible to the receiver
on top of the fuselage close to the centre of gravity
under the fuselage
The NAVSTAR/GPS space segment:

a.
b.
c.
d.
146.
introducing an offset in the satellites clocks

random dithering of the broadcast satellites clock time
random dithering of the broadcast satellites X, Y & Z co-ordinates
introducing an offset in the broadcast satellites X, Y & Z co-ordinates
The positioning of a GNSS aerial on an aircraft is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
145.
24 satellites in 6 orbits
Selective availability may be used to degrade the accuracy of the NAVSTAR/GPS position.
This is achieved by:
a.
b.
c.
d.
144.
Chapter 21
regular auto-synchronisation with the satellite clocks

adjusting the pseudo-ranges to determine the error
synchronisation with the satellite clocks on initialisation
having an appropriate atomic time standard within the receiver.
The contents of the navigation and systems message from NAVSTAR/GPS SVs include:
a.
b.
c.
d.
satellite clock error, almanac data, ionospheric propagation information

satellite clock error, almanac data, satellite position error
position accuracy verification, satellite clock time and clock error
ionospheric propagation information, X, Y & Z co-ordinates and corrections, satellite
clock time and error
405
Chapter 21
149.
Revision Questions
The NAVSTAR/GPS segments are:

a.
b.
c.
d.
space, control, user

space, control, ground
space, control, air
space, ground, air
150.
The preferred GNSS receiver for airborne application is:
151.
a.
multiplex
b.
multi-channel
c.
sequential
d.
fast multiplex
The orbital height of geostationary satellites is:
a.
b.
c.
d.
152.
The best accuracy from satellite systems will be provided by:

a.
b.
c.
d.
153.
determined by the satellite and transmitted to the receiver

determined by the receiver from the satellite almanac data
transmitted by the satellite as part of the almanac
determined by the receiver from the broadcast satellite X, Y, Z & T data
The skysearch carried out by a GNSS receiver:

a.
b.
c.
d.
155.
NAVSTAR/GPS and TNSS transit

GLONASS and COSPAS/SARSAT
GLONASS and TNSS transit
NAVSTAR/GPS and GLONASS
The azimuth and elevation of the satellites is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
154.
19330 km
35800 km
10898 nm
10313 nm
is done prior to each fix

is done when the receiver position is in error
involves the receiver downloading the almanac from each satellite before determining
which satellites are in view
is the procedure carried out by the monitoring stations to check the accuracy of the
satellite data
An aircraft GNSS receiver is using 5 satellites for RAIM. If the receiver deselects one satellite
then the flight should be continued:
a.
b.
c.
d.
406
using 4 satellites with the pilot monitoring the receiver output

using alternative navigation systems
using alternative radio navigation systems only
using inertial reference systems only
Revision Questions
156.
The WGS84 model of the earth is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
157.
they are significantly reduced by the use of RAIM

they are eliminated using differential techniques
they are significantly reduced when a second frequency is available
transmitting the state of the ionosphere to the receivers enables the error to reduced to
less than one metre
Using differential GNSS for a non-precision approach, the height reference is:
a.
b.
c.
d.
162.
4
2
3
5
Which of the following statements concerning ionospheric propagation errors is true?

a.
b.
c.
d.
161.
3
4
5
6
How many satellites are needed for a 2D fix?

a.
b.
c.
d.
160.
VHF
UHF
EHF
SHF
The number of satellites required to produce a 4D fix is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
159.
a geoid
a sphere
an exact model of the earth
an ellipse
The frequency band of the NAVSTAR/GPS L1 and L2 frequencies is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
158.
Chapter 21
barometric
GNSS
radio
radio or GNSS
The number of satellites required to provide a 3D fix without RAIM is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
4
5
6
3
407
Chapter 21
163.
Revision Questions
The number of satellites required for a fully operational NAVSTAR/GPS is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
164.
Unauthorised civilian users of NAVSTAR/GPS can access:

a.
b.
c.
d.
165.
NAVSTAR/GPS
GLONASS
COSPAS/SARSAT
TNSS transit
During flight using NAVSTAR/GPS and conventional navigation systems, you see a large
error between the positions given by the systems. The action you should take is:
a.
b.
c.
d.
169.
SHF
UHF
VHF
EHF
Which GNSS system can be used for IFR flights in Europe?

a.
b.
c.
d.
168.
barometric
GPS height
radio altitude
average of barometric and GPS
The nav/system message from GLONASS and NAVSTAR/GPS is found in the band.
a.
b.
c.
d.
167.
the P and Y codes

the P code
the C/A and P codes
the C/A code
When using GPS to fly airways, what is the vertical reference used?
a.
b.
c.
d.
166.
21
18
24
30
continue the flight in VMC

continue using the conventional systems
continue using the GPS
switch off the faulty system after determining which one is in error
What information can a GPS fix using four satellites give you?
a.
b.
c.
d.
408
latitude and longitude

latitude, longitude, altitude and time
latitude, longitude and altitude
latitude, longitude and time
Revision Questions
170.
What are the basic elements transmitted by NAVSTAR/GPS satellites?

i.
offset of the satellite clock from GMT
ii.
ephemeris data
iii.
health data
iv.
ionospheric delays
v.
solar activity
a.
b.
c.
d.
171.
b.
c.
d.
the angle between the SV orbit and the equator

the angle between the SV orbit and the polar plane
90 minus the angle between the SV orbit and the equator
90 minus the angle between the SV orbit and the polar plane
How is the distance between the NAVSTAR/GPS SV and the receiver determined?
a.
b.
c.
d.
175.
measuring the time taken for signals from a minimum number of satellites to reach
the aircraft.
measuring the time taken for the aircraft transmissions to travel to a number of
satellites in known positions and return to the aircraft
measuring the pulse lengths of the sequential signals from a number of satellites in
known positions
measuring the phase angle of the signals from a number of satellites in known
positions
The inclination of a satellite is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
174.
to control the use of the satellites by unauthorised users

to monitor the satellites in orbit
to maintain the satellites in orbit
degrade the accuracy of satellites for unauthorised users
In GNSS a fix is obtained by:

a.
173.
i, ii, iii, iv and v

i, i and iii
i, i and iv
ii, iii and iv
What is the purpose of the GPS control segment?

a.
b.
c.
d.
172.
Chapter 21
by referencing the SV and receiver positions to WGS84

by synchronising the receiver clock with the SV clock
by measuring the time from transmission to reception and multiplying by the speed
of light
by measuring the time from transmission to reception and dividing by the speed of
light
The distance measured between a satellite and a receiver is known as a pseudo-range because:
a.
b.
c.
d.
it is measured using pseudo-random codes

it includes receiver clock error
satellite and receiver are continually moving in relation to each other
it is measured against idealised Keplerian orbits
409
Chapter 21
176.
Revision Questions
The task of the control segment is to:

a.
b.
c.
d.
177.
To provide 3D fixing with RAIM and allowing for the loss of one satellite requires SVs:
a.
b.
c.
d.
178.
GLONASS
NAVSTAR/GPS
Galileo
COSPAS/SARSAT
In GPS on which frequencies are both the C/A and P codes transmitted?
a.
b.
c.
d.
183.
1227.6 MHz only

1575.42 MHz only
1227.6 MHz and 1575.42 MHz
1227.6 MHz or 1575.42 MHz
Which GNSS is authorised for use on European airways?

a.
b.
c.
d.
182.
monitors all 24 satellites

tracks selected satellites
selects and tracks all (in view) satellites and selects the best four
tracks the closest satellites
Which GPS frequencies are available for commercial air transport?

a.
b.
c.
d.
181.
differentiate between satellites

pass satellite ephemeris information
pass satellite time and ephemeris information
pass satellite time, ephemeris and other information
An all in view satellite navigation receiver is one which:

a.
b.
c.
d.
180.
4
5
6
7
In NAVSTAR/GPS the PRN codes are used to:

a.
b.
c.
d.
179.
determine availability to users

monitor the SV ephemeris and clock
apply selective availability
all of the above
both frequencies
the higher frequency
neither frequency
the lower frequency
The orbits of the NAVSTAR GPS satellites are inclined at:

a.
b.
c.
d.
410
55 to the earths axis

55 to the plane of the equator
99 to the earths axis
99 to the plane of the equator
Revision Questions
184.
RAIM is achieved:
a.
b.
c.
d.
185.
b.
c.
d.
dependent on the location of the user

greatest at the equator
greatest at the poles
the same at all points on and close to the surface of the earth
In the approach phase with a two dot lateral deviation HSI display, a one dot deviation from
track would represent:
a.
b.
c.
d.
190.
Local area DGPS gives the same improvement in accuracy regardless of distance from
the station
DGPS removes SV ephemeris and clock errors and propagation errors
DGPS can improve the accuracy of SA affected position information.
Wide area DGPS accuracy improves the closer the aircraft is to a ground station
The visibility of GPS satellites is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
189.
SHF
VHF
UHF
EHF
Which of the following statements concerning differential GPS (DGPS) is true?

a.
188.
interrogate the satellites to determine range

track the satellites to calculate time
track the satellites to calculate range
determine position and assess the accuracy of that position
In which frequency band are the L1 and L2 frequencies of GNSS?

a.
b.
c.
d.
187.
by ground monitoring stations determining the satellite range errors which are
relayed to receivers via geo-stationary satellites
by ground stations determining the X, Y & Z errors and passing the corrections to
receivers using pseudolites
within the receiver
any of the above
The function of the receiver in the GNSS user segment is to:

a.
b.
c.
d.
186.
Chapter 21
5 nm
0.5 nm
5
0.5
The required accuracy of a precision RNAV (P-RNAV) system is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
0.25 nm standard deviation or better

1 nm standard deviation or better
411
Chapter 21
191.
Revision Questions
The ETA generated by the FMS will be most accurate:

a.
b.
c.
d.
192.
When is the FMS position likely to be least accurate?

a.
b.
c.
d.
193.
12 nm
25 nm plan range
35 nm
25 nm slant range
The FMC position is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
197.
2
5
5 nm
2 nm
An aircraft, using a 2D RNAV computer, is 12 nm from the phantom station, 25 nm from the
VOR/DME designating the phantom station and the phantom station is 35 nm from the VOR/
DME. The range read out in the aircraft will be:
a.
b.
c.
d.
196.
DME/DME
VOR/DME
DME/DME or VOR/DME
Any combination of VOR, DME and ADF
When using a two dot HSI, a deviation of one dot from the computed track represents:
a.
b.
c.
d.
195.
TOD
TOC
Just after take-off.
On final approach.
For position fixing the B737-800 FMC uses:

a.
b.
c.
d.
194.
when the forecast W/V equals the actual W/V and the FMS calculated Mach No.
equals the actual Mach No.
If the groundspeed and position are accurate.
If the forecast W/V at take-off is entered.
If the groundspeed is correct and the take-off time has been entered.
the average of the IRS positions

the average of the IRS and radio navigation positions
computer generated from the IRS and radio navigation positions
computer generated from the radio navigation positions
The JAR25 recommended colour for a downpath waypoint is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
412
white
green
magenta
cyan
Revision Questions
198.
The JAR25 recommended colour for the present track line in the expanded modes is:
a.
b.
c.
d.
199.
waypoints, latitude and longitude, SIDs and STARs

ICAO aerodrome designators, navigation facilities, SIDs and STARs
Waypoints, airways designators, latitude and longitude
Navigation facilities, reporting points, airways designators
The inputs to the EHSI display during automatic flight include:

a.
b.
c.
d.
204.
by using the ATD at the previous waypoint

by using the computed ETA for the next waypoint
by using the ATA at the previous waypoint
by using the ETA at the destination
Which of the following can be input manually to the FMC using a maximum of 5
alphanumerics?
a.
b.
c.
d.
203.
white
green
magenta
cyan
When midway between two waypoints, how can the pilot best check the progress of the
aircraft?
a.
b.
c.
d.
202.
white
green
magenta
cyan
The JAR25 recommendation for the colour of a VORTAC which is not in use by the FMC is:
a.
b.
c.
d.
201.
white
green
magenta
cyan
The range arcs in the expanded and map modes are recommended by JAR25 to be coloured:
a.
b.
c.
d.
200.
Chapter 21
auto-throttle, IRS and FMC

FCC, FMC and ADC
IRS, FMC and radio navigation facilities
IRS, ADC and FCC
The inputs the pilot will make to the FMC during the pre-flight initialisation will include:
a.
b.
c.
d.
ETD, aircraft position, and planned route

Planned route, aircraft position, and departure runway
Navigation data base, aircraft position and departure aerodrome
Departure runway, planned route and ETD.
413
Chapter 21
205.
Revision Questions
The JAR25 recommended colour for an active waypoint is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
206.
The JAR25 recommended colour for an off-route waypoint is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
207.
white
magenta
green
cyan
The JAR25 recommended colour for the aircraft symbol is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
208.
amber
magenta
green
cyan
white
magenta
green
cyan
The JAR25 recommended colour for the active route is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
white
magenta
green
cyan
209.
In the NAV and EXP NAV modes one dot on the EHSI represents:
210.
a.
2 nm
b.
2
c.
5 nm
d.
5
The phantom station in a 2D RNAV system may be generated by:
a.
b.
c.
d.
211.
The operation of a 2D RNAV system may be seriously downgraded:

a.
b.
c.
d.
212.
VOR/DME
Twin VOR
Twin DME
Any of the above
because the computer cannot determine if the aircraft is within the DOC of the
programmed facilities
because the computer cannot determine if the heading and altitude input are in error
because the pilot cannot verify the correct frequency has been selected
if the selected navigation facility is in excess of about 70 nm
The colour recommended in JAR25 for engaged modes is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
414
green
magenta
cyan
white
Revision Questions
213.
The colour recommended in JAR25 for armed modes is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
214.
4 left
12 left
4 right
12 right
According to JAR25, for what type of message is the colour red used?
a.
b.
c.
d.
220.

green
magenta
red
white
Refer to Appendix A diagram C. What is the current drift?

a.
b.
c.
d.
219.
altered by the pilots between the 28 day updates

read and altered by the pilots
only read by the pilots
altered by the pilots every 28 days
The JAR25 colour for selected heading is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
218.
green
magenta
cyan
amber
The FMS database can be:

a.
b.
c.
d.
217.
red
black
white or magenta
amber
The colour recommended in JAR25 for the active route is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
216.
green
yellow
white
magenta
The colour recommended in JAR25 for the display of turbulence is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
215.
Chapter 21
warnings, cautions, abnormal sources

flight envelope, system limits, engaged mode
cautions, abnormal sources, engaged mode
warnings, flight envelope, system limits
In the B737-400 EFIS which component generates the visual display?

a.
b.
c.
d.
flight control computer (FCC)

FMC
symbol generator
navigation database
415
Chapter 21
221.
Revision Questions
When is the IRS position updated?

a.
b.
c.
d.
222.
Refer to Appendix A. Which diagram is the MAP mode?

a.
b.
c.
d.
223.
may be modified by the pilot to meet routing requirements

is read only
may be modified by the operations staff to meet routing requirements
may be modified by national aviation authorities to meet national requirements
In accordance with JAR25, which features on an EFIS display are coloured cyan?
a.
b.
c.
d.
228.
NAV
EXP VOR
VOR
ILS
The navigation database in the FMS:

a.
b.
c.
d.
227.
right of the centreline and above the glidepath

left of the centreline and below the glidepath
right of the centreline and below the glidepath
left of the centreline and above the glidepath
Refer to Appendix A. Diagram F represents:

a.
b.
c.
d.
226.
205(T)
205(M)
064(T)
064(M)
Refer to diagram B of Appendix A. The aircraft is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
225.
D
F
E
C
Refer to diagram E of Appendix A. The track from ZAPPO to BURDY is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
224.
continuously by the FMC

at VOR beacons on route by the pilots
at significant waypoints only
on the ground only
engaged modes
the sky
the flight director bar(s)
system limits and flight envelope
In an EHSI the navigation information comes from:

a.
b.
c.
d.
416
INS, weather mapping, radio navigation

FMC, radio navigation
IRS, radio navigation, TAS and drift
FMC, weather mapping, radio navigation
Revision Questions
229.
On an EFIS display the pictured symbol represents:

a.
b.
c.
d.
230.
b.
c.
d.
d.
that a manual track has been selected

that a manual heading has been selected
the actual aircraft track over the ground, which will coincide with the aircraft heading
when there is zero drift
the aircraft actual track which will coincide with the planned track when there is zero
drift
The JAR25 colour recommended for the display of current data is:
a.
b.
c.
d.
234.
INS
Direct reading magnetic compass
VOR/DME
ADF
The track line on an EFIS display indicates:

a.
b.
c.
233.
one which enables the aircraft to navigate on any desired flight path within the
coverage of appropriate ground based navigation aids or within the specified limits of
self contained on-board systems or a combination of the two
coverage of appropriate ground based navigation aids or within the specified limits of
self contained on-board systems but not a combination of the two
coverage of appropriate ground based navigation aids only
specified limits of self contained on-board systems.
Which of the following is independent of external inputs?

a.
b.
c.
d.
232.
DME
VOR/DME
VORTAC
aerodrome
According to ICAO (Annex 11), the definition of an RNAV system is:

a.
231.
Chapter 21
yellow
red
magenta
white
The EHSI is showing 5 fly right with a TO indication. The aircraft heading is 280(M) and the
required track is 270. The radial is:
a.
b.
c.
d.
275
265
085
095
417
Chapter 21
235.
Revision Questions
On the B737-400 EHSI what happens if the selected VOR fails?

a.
b.
c.
d.
236.
In an RNAV system which combination of external reference will give the most accurate
position?
a.
b.
c.
d.
237.
130
133
156
165
Refer to appendix A diagram C. The wind velocity is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
241.
magenta
flashing red
white or magenta
high colour gradient
Refer to diagram D of Appendix A. The current aircraft track is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
240.
by removal of the deviation bar and pointer

by showing a fail flag alongside the deviation bar
a flashing red FAIL message appears in the frequency location
an amber FAIL message appears in the frequency location
The colour used on the B737-400 EHSI weather display to show turbulence is:
a.
b.
c.
d.
239.
GPS/rho
Rho/theta
Rho/rho
GPS/theta
If the signal from a VOR is lost, how is this shown on the B737-400 EHSI display?
a.
b.
c.
d.
238.
the display blanks and a fail warning appears

the deviation bar is removed
a fail flag is displayed alongside the display bar
the display flashes
129(M)/20 ms-1
129(T)/20 kt
129(M)/20kt
129(T)/20 ms-1
In order that a waypoint designated by a VOR can be used by a RNAV system:

a.
b.
c.
d.
418
the VOR must be identified by the pilot

the VOR must be within range when the waypoint is input
the VOR need not be in range when input or used
the VOR need not be in range when input but must be when used
Revision Questions
242.
Which EHSI modes cannot show AWR information?

a.
b.
c.
d.
243.
FULL VOR/ILS/NAV and MAP

PLAN, CTR MAP and EXP VOR/ILS/NAV
CTR MAP and PLAN
PLAN and FULL VOR/ILS/NAV
Refer to appendix A, diagram C. The symbol annotated KXYZ is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
244.
destination aerodrome
a diversion aerodrome
an en-route aerodrome
a top of climb/descent point
Refer to Appendix B. The distance displayed on the EHSI will be:

a.
b.
c.
d.
10 nm
11 nm
12 nm
21 nm
245.

The NAVSTAR/GPS constellation comprises:
246.
Comparing the L1 and L2 signals helps with the reduction of which GNSS error?
a.
b.
c.
d.
a.
b.
c.
d.
247.
6 SVs each in 4 orbits

tropospheric propagation
SV ephemeris
SV clock
Ionospheric propagation
The normal maximum range for an ATC surveillance radar is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
248.
Chapter 21
50 nm
150 nm
250 nm
350 nm
The cause of a RNAV giving erratic readings would be:

a.
b.
c.
d.
the aircraft is in the cone of confusion of the phantom station

the aircraft is beyond line of sight range of the phantom station
the aircraft is beyond line of sight range of the reference station
the aircraft is outside the DOC of the reference station
419
Chapter 21
249.

250.
Revision Questions
Flying an ILS approach with a 3 glideslope referenced to 50 ft above the threshold, an aircraft
at 4.6 nm should be at an approximate height of:
a.
b.
c.
d.
The height of the GPS constellation is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
251.
1400 ft
1380 ft
1500 ft
1450 ft
19300 km
20200 km
10900 km
35800 km
Which type of radar could give an indication of the shape and sometimes the type of the
aircraft?
a.
b.
c.
d.
area surveillance radar

SSR
AWR
Aerodrome surface movement radar
252.
What are the ground components of MLS?
253.
a. separate azimuth and elevation antennae with DME

b. separate azimuth and elevation antennae with middle and outer markers
c. combined azimuth and elevation antennae with DME
d. combined azimuth and elevation antennae with middle and outer markers
The accuracy required of a basic area navigation (B-RNAV) system is:
a.
b.
c.
d.
254.
What function does the course line computer perform?

a.
b.
c.
d.
255.
+/-5 nm on 90% of occasions

all the time
Uses VOR/DME information to direct the aircraft to the facility

Uses VOR/DME information to direct the aircraft along a specified track
Converts VOR/DME information into HSI directions to maintain the planned track
Uses VOR/DME information to determine track and distance to a waypoint
The emissions from a non-directional beacon (NDB) are:

a.
b.
c.
d.
420
a cardioid with a 30 Hz rotation rate

omni-directional
a phase-compared signal
a frequency modulated continuous wave (FMCW)
Revision Questions
256.
How does night effect affect ADF?

a.
b.
c.
d.
257.
b.
c.
d.
the aircraft is in the cone of confusion of the phantom station

The aircraft is outside the DOC of the reference VOR/DME
the aircraft is below line of sight range of the reference VOR/DME
the aircraft is in the cone of confusion of the reference VOR
What is the maximum PRF that allows detection of targets to a range of 50 km? (ignore any
flyback time)
a.
b.
c.
d.
262.
If there is a discrepancy between the GPS and multi-sensor positions, then the multisensor position must be regarded as suspect
The GPS must be operating and its information displayed
The multi-sensor system must be operating and its information displayed
Both systems must be operating but only the primary system information needs to be
displayed
The indications from a basic RNAV are behaving erratically. The reason is likely to be:
a.
b.
c.
d.
261.
300 MHz
600 MHz
900 MHz
1200 MHz
When flying under IFR using GPS and a multi-sensor system:

a.
260.
Heading
VOR/DME position
TAS
Groundspeed and drift
A typical frequency for DME would be:

a.
b.
c.
d.
259.
Causes false bearings as the goniometer locks onto the skywave

Skywave interference which affects the null and is worst at dawn and dusk
Interference from other NDBs which is worst at dusk and when due east of the station
Phase shift in the received signal giving random bearing errors
What is an ADC input to the FMC?

a.
b.
c.
d.
258.
Chapter 21

617 pps
3000 pps
1620 pps
In NAVSTAR/GPS the space segment:

a.
b.
c.
d.
Provides the positional information to the receiver

the receiver interrogates the satellite and the satellite provides positional information
sends information for receiver to determine latitude, longitude and time
relays positional data from the control segment
421
Chapter 21
263.
Revision Questions
An accurate position fix on the EHSI will be provided by inputs of:

a.
b.
c.
d.
264.
The almanac in the receiver:

a.
b.
c.
d.
265.
the time difference between the minimum number of satellites

the time taken for the signal to travel from the satellite to the receiver
the synchronisation of the satellite and receiver clocks
the time taken for a signal to travel from the receiver to the satellite and return to the
receiver
Quadrantal error in the ADF is caused by:

a.
b.
c.
d.
269.
INS
pressure altitude
magnetic heading from a direct reading compass
VOR/DME
In NAVSTAR/GPS range measurement is achieved by measuring:

a.
b.
c.
d.
268.
by what is selected on the pilots DME and hence is tuned manually

automatically by taking pilots DME selection
by selecting DMEs to give suitable angle of cut to get a fix automatically
by automatically selecting the nearest suitable DME
Which input to the FMC is taken from sources external to the aircraft?
a.
b.
c.
d.
267.
determines selective availability

assigns the PRN codes to the satellites
is used to determine receiver clock error
is used to determine which satellites are above the horizon
In a RNAV system the DME is tuned:

a.
b.
c.
d.
266.
FMC, IRS, radio navigation aids

AWR, drift and TAS
the metallic structure of the aircraft

generative voltages caused by the rotation of the engines
the electrical wiring running through the aircraft
multipath reception
For the FMC the take-off speeds, V1, VR and V2 are found:
a.
b.
c.
d.
422
in the operating manual and input to the FMC

in the performance database
in the checklist and input manually
in the navigation database
Revision Questions
270.
The optimum climb and descent speeds used byn the FMC are found:
a.
b.
c.
d.
271.

Which of the following external inputs is required by the FMC to determine W/V?
a.
b.
c.
d.
273.

The optimum cruise speeds used by the FMC are found:

a.
b.
c.
d.
272.
Chapter 21
magnetic heading
Mach no.
TAS
Track and groundspeed
Which of the following is true concerning the use of GNSS position in the FMC?
a.
b.
c.
d.
it is used to verify and update the IRS position

an alternate source of position must be used and displayed
GNSS position is usable stand alone
GNSS data may only be used in the absence of other positional information
423
Chapter 21
Revision Questions
ANSWERS
1
41
81
121
161
201
241
42
82
122
162
202
242
43
83
123
163
203
243
44
84
124
164
204
244
45
85
125
165
205
245
46
86
126
166
206
246
47
87
127
167
207
247
48
88
128
168
208
248
49
89
129
169
209
249
10
50
90
130
170
210
250
11
51
91
131
171
211
251
12
52
92
132
172
212
252
13
53
93
133
173
213
253
14
54
94
134
174
214
254
15
55
95
135
175
215
255
16
56
96
136
176
216
256
17
57
97
137
177
217
257
18
58
98
138
178
218
258
19
59
99
139
179
219
259
20
60
100
140
180
220
260
21
61
101
141
181
221
261
22
62
102
142
182
222
262
23
63
103
143
183
223
263
24
64
104
144
184
224
264
25
65
105
145
185
225
265
26
66
106
146
186
226
266
27
67
107
147
187
227
267
28
68
108
148
188
228
268
29
69
109
149
189
229
269
30
70
110
150
190
230
270
31
71
111
151
191
231
271
32
72
112
152
192
232
272
33
73
113
153
193
233
273
34
74
114
154
194
234
35
75
115
155
195
235
36
76
116
156
196
236
37
77
117
157
197
237
38
78
118
158
198
238
39
79
119
159
199
239
40
80
120
160
200
240
424
Revision Questions
Chapter 21
SPECIMEN EXAMINATION PAPER

1.
Which wavelength corresponds to a frequency of 5035 MHz?

a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
The VDF term meaning true bearing from the station is:
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
280 nm
200 nm
224 nm
238 nm
The Doppler effect is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
7.
headings and heights to fly to arrive overhead the aerodrome

radar vectors to position on final approach
QDM information to position overhead the aerodrome
Radar vectors to position overhead the aerodrome
The maximum range an ATC facility at 1369 ft amsl can provide a service to an aircraft at
FL350 is:
a.
b.
c.
d.
6.
2
10
1
5
ATC inform a pilot that they will provide a QGH service. The pilot can expect:
a.
b.
c.
d.
5.
QDM
QDR
QTE
QUJ
A class B VDF bearing will have an accuracy of:

a.
b.
c.
d.
4.
5.96 mm
5.96 cm
59.6 cm
5.96 m
the change in frequency caused by the movement of a transmitter and receiver

the change in frequency caused by the movement of a receiver
the change in frequency caused by the movement of a transmitter
the change in frequency caused by the relative movement between a transmitter and
receiver
The least accurate bearing information taken by an aircraft over the sea from a NDB will be
from:
a.
b.
c.
d.
a coastal beacon at an acute angle

an inland beacon at an acute angle
a coastal beacon perpendicular to the coast
an inland beacon perpendicular to the coast
425
Chapter 21
8.
Revision Questions
The accuracy of ADF may be affected by:

a.
b.
c.
d.
9.
The ADF error which will cause the needle to hunt (ie oscillate around the correct bearing) is:
a.
b.
c.
d.
10.
bearing by lobe comparison

bearing by frequency comparison
bearing by searchlight principle
bearing by phase comparison
The pilot of an aircraft flying at FL 240 is 250 nm from a VOR at 16 ft amsl which he selects.
He receives no signal from the VOR. This is because:
a.
b.
c.
d.
14.
tuning
identification
identification and monitoring
tuning, identification and monitoring
The principle of operation of VOR is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
13.
+/-1
+/-2
+/-5
+/-10
A NDB has emission designator N0NA1A this will require the use of the BFO for:
a.
b.
c.
d.
12.
night effect
Cb static
station interference
coastal refraction
The accuracy of ADF by day and excluding compass error is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
11.
night effect, tropospheric propagation, quadrantal error

static interference, siting errors, slant range
angle of bank, mountain effect, station interference
angle of bank, static from Cb, siting errors
the VOR is unserviceable

the range of VOR is limited to 200 nm
the aircraft is beyond line of sight range
there are abnormal atmospheric conditions
The phase difference measured at the aircraft between the VOR FM modulation and the AM
modulation is 235. The bearing of the beacon from the aircraft is:
a.
b.
c.
d.
426
055
235
145
325
Revision Questions
15.
In a Doppler VOR (DVOR) the reference signal is , the variphase signal is and the
rotation is
a.
b.
c.
d.
16.
800 ft
1050 ft
900 ft
1500 ft
A category 2 ILS facility is required to provide guidance to:

a.
b.
c.
d.
21.
fly left and fly up

fly left and fly down
fly right and fly up
fly right and fly down
On an ILS approach using a 3.5 glidepath, the height an aircraft, groundspeed 160 kt, should
be at 3.5 nm is:
a.
b.
c.
d.
20.
030, TO, Fly Right

030, TO, Fly Left
210, FROM Fly Right
210, FROM, Fly Left
Flying an ILS approach the equipment senses that the 90 Hz modulation predominates on
both the localiser and the glidepath. The indications the pilot will see are:
a.
b.
c.
d.
19.
147, TO
147, FROM
327, FROM
327, TO
An aircraft is 100 nm SW of a VOR heading 080. The pilot intends to home to the VOR on the
210 radial. The setting he should put on the OBS is and the CDI indications will be:
a.
b.
c.
d.
18.
FM, AM, clockwise

AM, FM, clockwise
FM, AM, anti-clockwise
AM, FM, anti-clockwise
A pilot intends to home to a VOR on the 147 radial. The setting he should put on the OBS and
the CDI indications will be:
a.
b.
c.
d.
17.
Chapter 21
below 50 ft
below 200 ft
the surface
below 100 ft
When flying downwind abeam the upwind end of the runway the indications from the ILS on
the CDI will be:
a.
b.
c.
d.
in the correct sense for the localiser and no glidepath signal

erratic on both localiser and glidepath
erratic on the localiser and in the correct sense on the glidepath
no localiser signal and in the correct sense for glidepath
427
Chapter 21
22.
Revision Questions
The azimuth coverage of a 3 glidepath is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
23.
The coverage of the approach azimuth and elevation of a MLS is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
24.
primary CW radar
primary pulsed radar
secondary CW radar
secondary pulsed radar
The maximum theoretical range of a radar is determined by:

a.
b.
c.
d.
28.
108 112 MHz

329 335 MHz
960 1215 MHz
5031 5090 MHz
The type of radar which has no minimum range restriction is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
27.
4 elements multiplexing on 2 frequencies

4 elements multiplexing on one frequency
2 elements using 2 frequencies
2 elements multiplexing on one frequency
MLS has 200 channels available in the frequency band:

a.
b.
c.
d.
26.
+/-20 to 40 nm
+/-20 to 20 nm
+/-40 to 40 nm
+/-40 to 20 nm
A full MLS system comprises a DME and:

a.
b.
c.
d.
25.
+/-35 to 17 nm
+/-10 to 25 nm
+/-8 to 10 nm
+/-10 to 8 nm
power
PW
beamwidth
PRF
The time interval between the transmission of a pulse and receipt of the echo from a target is
925.5 microseconds. The range of the target is:
a.
b.
c.
d.
428
37.5 nm
75 nm
150 nm
300 nm
Revision Questions
29.
An advantage of a slotted antenna (planar array) over a parabolic reflector are:

a.
b.
c.
d.
30.
6000 ft
45000 ft
33000 ft
63000 ft
The AWR frequency is selected because it gives:

a.
b.
c.
d.
35.
9375 MHz
9375 GHz
937.5 MHz
93.75 GHz
A cloud detected at 60 nm on the AWR of an aircraft flying at FL390 just disappears from the
screen when the tilt is selected to 2 UP. If the beamwidth of the radar is 6, then the altitude
of the cloud tops is:
a.
b.
c.
d.
34.
an area surveillance radar

an aerodrome surface movement radar
an aerodrome surveillance radar
a terminal area radar
The AWR operating frequency is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
33.
high power output and large parabolic reflector

narrow beamwidth and narrow pulse width
low frequency and small parabolic reflector
wide beamwidth and large pulsewidth
A radar transmitting on 600 MHz has a PRF of 300 pps and an aerial rotation rate of 5 rpm.
This radar will be:
a.
b.
c.
d.
32.
side lobes removed

360 scan without any rotation requirement
less power required
higher data rate possible
The best resolution will be achieved on a radar display with:

a.
b.
c.
d.
31.
Chapter 21
good returns from water droplets

good returns from turbulence
good penetration of cloud
good returns from water vapour
On a colour AWR display, the heaviest precipitation will be displayed in:

a.
b.
c.
d.
amber
red
yellow
blue
429
Chapter 21
36.
Revision Questions
The SSR code to select when entering an area where a radar service is available from an area
where there is no radar service within the JAA area is:
a.
b.
c.
d.
37.
In SSR the ground station interrogates the aircraft on MHz and receives replies from the
aircraft on MHz
a.
b.
c.
d.
38.
d.
each pulse pair has its own unique modulation which is replicated by the transponder
the PRF of the interrogating pulses is jittered
each aircraft has a different time interval within the pulses pairs which is replicated
by the transponder
the transponder uses a selective reply system to respond to the aircraft interrogation
pulses
The DME in an aircraft at FL630 measures a slant range of 16 nm from a ground station at
1225 ft amsl. The plan range is:
a.
b.
c.
d.
42.
1262 MHz
1030 MHz
1090 MHz
1136 MHz
A DME recognises replies to its own interrogating pulses because:

a.
b.
c.
41.
300 ft
100 ft
500 ft
50 ft
If the aircraft DME interrogates a ground transponder on a frequency of 1199 MHz, it will
look for replies on:
a.
b.
c.
d.
40.
1030, 1090
1090, 1030
1030, 1030
1090, 1090
The altitude readout at the ground station from a mode C response will give the aircraft
altitude within:
a.
b.
c.
d.
39.
7000
7007
2000
0000
12.5 nm
19 nm
16 nm
10.5 nm
If the identification of a VOR is FKL and the paired DME identification is FKZ, then:
a.
b.
c.
d.
430
the transmitters are co-located

the beacons are between 600 m and 6 nm apart
the transmitters are within 600 m
the transmitters are in excess of 6 nm apart
Revision Questions
43.
The frequency used by LORAN C is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
44.
WGS90
PZ84
PZ90
WGS84
The major limitation in the use of GPS for precision approaches using wide area augmentation
systems (WAAS) is:
a.
b.
c.
d.
49.
The model of the earth used for GPS is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
48.
in specified areas
in oceanic areas
over land only
in oceanic areas in the northern hemisphere
The NAVSTAR/GPS operational constellation comprises:

a.
b.
c.
d.
47.
20 nm at 1000 nm
1 nm at 2500 nm
1 nm at 1000 nm
20 nm at 2500 nm
The coverage of LORAN C is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
46.
100 kHz
100 MHz
190 kHz
190 MHz
The accuracy of LORAN C using surface wave fixing is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
45.
Chapter 21
lack of failure warning

the height difference between the ellipsoid and the earth
global coverage of WAAS is not available
degradation of range measurement because of ionospheric propagation errors
The number of SVs required to produce a 3D fix is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
3
4
5
6
431
Chapter 21
50.
Revision Questions
EGNOS provides a WAAS by determining the errors in and broadcasting these errors to
receivers using
a.
b.
c.
d.
51.
The principle error in GNSS is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
52.
d.
15 minutes
2.5 minutes
12.5 minutes
25 minutes
The provision of RAIM requires a minimum of SVs.

a.
b.
c.
d.
56.
identify the satellites

synchronise the receiver clocks with the SV clocks
pass navigation and system data to the receiver
all of the above
If the receiver almanac becomes corrupted it will download the almanac from the
constellation. This download will take:
a.
b.
c.
d.
55.
the receiver will select another SV with no loss in accuracy

the receiver will go into a DR mode with no loss of accuracy
the receiver will compensate by using the last calculated altitude to maintain
positional accuracy
the receiver position will degrade regardless of the action taken
The purpose of the PRN codes in NAVSTAR/GPS is to:

a.
b.
c.
d.
54.
ionospheric propagation
GDOP
receiver clock error
SV ephemeris error
If the signal from a SV is lost during an aircraft manoeuvre:

a.
b.
c.
53.
X, Y & Z co-ordinates, geostationary satellites

X, Y & Z co-ordinates, pseudolites
SV range, geostationary satellites
SV range, pseudolites
3
4
5
6
The best position on an aircraft for the GNSS aerial is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
432
in the cockpit as close as possible to the receiver

on the fuselage close to the centre of gravity
on the aircraft as far as possible from other aerials to reduce reflections
close to each wing tip to compensate for manoeuvre errors
Revision Questions
57.
The NAVSTAR/GPS constellation is inclined at to the equator with an orbital period of
a.
b.
c.
d.
58.
5 nm
5
1 nm
1
An aircraft using a 2D RNAV system is 23 nm from the waypoint on a 50 nm leg. The

waypoint is 45 nm from the VOR/DME and the aircraft is 37 nm from the VOR/DME. The
range indicated to the pilot will be:
a.
b.
c.
d.
63.
co-located VOR/DME
twin DME
VOR and/or DME
Any of the above
The accuracy required of a basic RNAV system is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
62.
50 Hz
C/A PRN code
P PRN code
C/A & P PRN code
A 2D RNAV system takes fixing inputs from:

a.
b.
c.
d.
61.
1227.6 MHz
1575.42 MHz
1215.0 MHz
1090.0 MHz
The NAV and system data message is contained in the signal.

a.
b.
c.
d.
60.
55, 11 hr 15 min
65, 11 hr 15 min
65, 12 hr
55 12 hr
The NAVSTAR/GPS frequency available to non-authorised users is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
59.
Chapter 21
23 nm
27 nm
37 nm
45 nm
The navigation database in a FMC:

a.
b.
c.
d.
can be modified by the flight crew to meet the route requirements

can be modified every 28 days
can only be read by the flight crew
cannot be accessed by the flight crew
433
Chapter 21
64.
Revision Questions
The RNAV function of the FMC produces a position which:

a.
b.
c.
d.
65.
The most accurate external reference position will be provided by:

a.
b.
c.
d.
66.
3 nm left
3 nm right
8 left
8 right
Refer to appendix A, diagram F. What is the required track?

a.
b.
c.
d.
70.
360 M
130 M
360 T
130 T
Refer to Appendix A, diagram A. What is the deviation from the required track?
a.
b.
c.
d.
69.
A
C
D
F
Refer to Appendix A, diagram E. What is the track from BANTU to ZAPPO?

a.
b.
c.
d.
68.
VOR/DME
Twin DME
Twin VOR
Suitable combination of VOR and DME
Refer to Appendix A. Which diagram shows the MAP display?

a.
b.
c.
d.
67.
combines the short term accuracy of the external reference with the long term
accuracy of the IRS
produces a long term accuracy from the short term accuracy of the external reference
and the IRS
produces a long term accuracy from the long term accuracy of the external reference
and the IRS
combines the long term accuracy of the external reference with the short term
accuracy of the IRS
165
173
157
130
Refer to Appendix A, diagram C. What is the symbol designated DFC which is coloured
cyan?
a.
b.
c.
d.
434
an in-use VORTAC
an available VORTAC
an in-use NDB
an available NDB
Revision Questions
71.
The JAR25 recommended colour for active route/flight plan is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
72.
cautions, abnormal sources and warnings

warnings, flight envelopes and system limits
engaged modes, warnings and cautions
flight director bar, flight envelopes and system limits
The JAR25 recommended colour for turbulence is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
74.
yellow
green
magenta
green
JAR25 recommends the use of red for:

a.
b.
c.
d.
73.
Chapter 21
red
black
white or magenta
amber
The FMC position is:

a.
b.
c.
d.
the selected IRS position updated by external reference using Kalman filtering
derived from IRS and external reference positions using the Kalman filtering process
derived from external reference position and monitored against the IRS position using
the Kalman filtering process
the external reference position updated by IRS information through the Kalman
filtering process
435
Chapter 21
Revision Questions
APPENDIX A
A
16.2 nm HDG
BUGLE
130
0358.4z
26.3 nm
HDG 130 M
DIT
ZAPPO
12000
1412z
10
AFS
1335.6z
WX + T
+12
130 M
100' / 20
ILS 1
2380
100' / 20
NAV
DME 16.7 HDG
16.2
BUGLE
110.10
HDG 130 M
0358.4z
WX + T
+12
10
CAD
BANTU
10000
1359z
EYY
EDNOR PIL
12000
1347z
DFC
2500
129 / 20
26.2 nm HDG 130 M
1422.7z
100 / 20
NAV
DME13.3 HDG 130 M
BURDY
ZAPPO
WX + T
+12
10
KBZN
BANTU
FROM
126 / 20
VOR 2
436
116.80
Revision Questions
Chapter 21
ANSWERS TO SPECIMEN EXAMINATION PAPER

1
21
41
61
22
42
62
23
43
63
24
44
64
25
45
65
26
46
66
27
47
67
28
48
68
29
49
69
10
30
50
70
11
31
51
71
12
32
52
72
13
33
53
73
14
34
54
74
15
35
55
16
36
56
17
37
57
18
38
58
19
39
59
20
40
60
437
Chapter 21
Revision Questions
EXPLANATION of SELECTED QUESTIONS

f
Q1.
Use c =

Q5.
Line of sight formula:
Range (nm) = 1.25 (HTX + HRX ) (H in feet)
Q13.
Line of sight formula again! Maximum range at which reception can be achieved is 198 nm.
Q14.
The phase difference is the bearing of the aircraft from the beacon (radial).
Q16/17. Draw a diagram!

Q19.
Height = Glidepath angle x range x 100 ft
Q28. Range =

Time Interval
nm.
2 x 6.17
Q33. Altitude of cloud tops = Tilt Beamwidth

2

Q38. The mode C increments in 100 ft steps.
) x Range x 100 + Aircraft Altitude
Q39.
1262 MHz is outside the allocated band for DME
Q41.
Pythagorus!
Q59.
The 50 Hz modulation passes the Nav and System Data message. The PRN codes provide a
timing function and SV identification.
Q62.
The range displayed is to the waypoint.
Q67.
Remember the PLAN display is orientated to TRUE north.
438

11 Radionavigation

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

11 Radionavigation

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

11 Radionavigation

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Introduction

Oxford Aviation Academy (UK) Limited 2008

Cover Photograph: Boeing 737 - 800 on approach to Bournemouth (EGHH)

This edition distributed by Transair (UK) Ltd, Shoreham, England: 2008

EASA Ref. No.

010 Air Law

020 Aircraft General Knowledge 1

Airframes & Systems

Fuselage, Wings & Stabilising Surfaces

020 Aircraft General Knowledge 2

020 Aircraft General Knowledge 3

020 Aircraft General Knowledge 4

030 Flight Performance & Planning 1

Mass & Balance

030 Flight Performance & Planning 2

Flight Planning & Monitoring

040 Human Performance & Limitations

070 Operational Procedures

080 Principles of Flight

Properties of Radio Waves

Properties of Radio Waves

Properties of Radio Waves

THE RADIO NAVIGATION SYLLABUS

ELECTRO-MAGNETIC (EM) RADIATION

Properties of Radio Waves

Figure 1.3. Vertical Polarization.

Properties of Radio Waves

This is known as the frequency (f) of the wave; hence:

So in the example above the frequency would be expressed as 8 MHz.

Properties of Radio Waves

300 x 106 x 0.125 x 10-6 = 37.5 m

If the frequency of a radio wave is 121.5 MHz calculate the wavelength.

Properties of Radio Waves

If the wavelength is 1515 m, what is the corresponding frequency?

= 198 000 Hz = 198 x 103 Hz = 198 kHz

For ease of calculation we can simplify the formulae:

Determine the frequency corresponding to a wavelength of 3.2 cm.

Noting that 3.2 cm = 0.032 m the calculation becomes:

Determine the wavelength corresponding to a frequency of 357 kHz.

Noting that 375 kHz = 0.375 MHz the calculation is:

= 9375 Mhz (or 9.375 Ghz)

Properties of Radio Waves

Very Low Frequency (VLF)

Low Frequency (LF)

Medium Frequency (MF)

300 3000 kHz

High Frequency (HF)

Very High Frequency (VHF)

Ultra High Frequency (UHF)

300 3000 MHz

Super High Frequency (SHF)

Extremely High Frequency

Properties of Radio Waves

Figure 1.4 Sinusoidal Wave - Phase Comparison

Properties of Radio Waves

INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

Properties of Radio Waves

PRACTICE FREQUENCY (f ) - WAVELENGTH () CONVERSIONS

Properties of Radio Waves

ANSWERS TO PRACTICE f - CONVERSIONS